Korg Electronic Keyboard 61key User Manual

Operation Guide  
E 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Automatically importing a Program  
Automatically importing a Combination  
Connecting a damper pedal, foot switch, or  
Using realtime controls to edit the sound or  
Recording multiple tracks from an external  
Diverse modulation settings  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Arpeggiator settings in Combination and  
Linking the arpeggiator to programs or  
Using the Drum Track function in Program  
Using the Drum Track function in Combination  
Drum Track function settings in Program  
Drum Track function settings in Combination  
Drum Track function settings in Sequencer  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction to the KROME  
Front and rear panels  
Front panel  
3
8
9
1
2
7
15  
11  
10  
13  
14  
6
12  
4 5  
* The diagram shown is for KROME-61  
(For details, please see “Using realtime controls to edit  
1. Volume  
VOLUME knob  
4. Arpeggiator  
This knob adjusts the volume of the AUDIO OUTPUT  
L/MONO, R outputs, as well as the volume of the  
headphone jack. (See page 15)  
ARP button  
This button turns the arpeggiator on/off. The button  
will be lit if the arpeggiator is on. (See page 85)  
2. SW1, 2 and Joystick  
5. DRUM TRACK  
SW1 and SW2  
These buttons are used to control the programs or  
effect parameters, or to turn the joystick lock function  
on/off. (See page 24)  
DRUM TRACK button  
This button turns the Drum Track function on or off.  
This button also indicates the operating state of the  
drum track. (Unlit: off, Blinking: waiting for trigger,  
Lit: on. See page 97.)  
Joystick  
You can control synthesis parameters or effect  
parameters by moving the joystick up/down/left/right.  
(See page 24)  
6. Effect buttons  
3. REALTIME CONTROLS  
These realtime controllers consist of four knobs and  
one button. You can use them to do the following  
things.  
• Control the sound and effects of programs and  
combinations  
• Control the arpeggiator  
MASTER FX button  
TOTAL FX button  
These buttons turn the master effect and total effect on/  
off. When the button is on (LED lit), the effect settings  
of the program, combination, or song will be enabled.  
When the button is off (LED unlit), the corresponding  
effect will be off.  
The on/off status of these buttons is remembered even  
when you switch programs, combinations, or songs.  
SELECT button, knobs 1–4  
Use the SELECT button to select the functions  
controlled by knobs 1–4. By using knobs 1–4 you can  
control the sound, effects, and arpeggiator.  
(For details, please see “Realtime control knobs” on  
page 25.)  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Introduction to the KROME  
7. Display  
12. Save (Write)  
Display  
WRITE button  
The TouchView display features simple touch control  
and selection of numerous features and parameters.  
Use this button to save programs, combinations, global  
settings, drum kits, or arpeggio patterns to internal  
memory (see page 9).  
You’ll also use this button to save songs to media (see  
page 75).  
When you press this button in the appropriate mode or  
page, a Write dialog box will appear. Press the button  
once again to save the data.  
8. Mode  
COMBI, PROG, SEQ, GLOBAL, MEDIA buttons  
KROME has five different modes, each one is  
optimized for a specific set of functions.  
13. Sequencer  
Press one of these buttons to enter the corresponding  
mode.  
The buttons in this section are used for operations in  
Sequencer mode, such as recording and playback (see  
page 54). The REC () button is also used to save a  
program or combination, or when using the Auto Song  
Setup function (see page 59).  
For more details, please see “Selecting modes” on  
page 9.  
9. PROG/COMBI BANK  
PAUSE ( ) button  
REW ( ) button  
FF ( ) button  
LOCATE ( ) button  
REC ( ) button  
A, B, C, D, E, F buttons  
These buttons select program banks A–F and  
combination banks A–D (see page 21, and page 44).  
You can also use these buttons to select the bank of  
timbre programs in a combination, or the bank of track  
programs in a song (see page 46, and page 57).  
START/STOP (  
) button  
If you want to select a GM bank, use the numeric keys  
(see page 22) or the Bank/Program Select menu (see  
page 22).  
14. TEMPO controls  
TEMPO knob  
This knob adjusts the tempo of the arpeggiator, drum  
track, or internal sequencer.  
10. VALUE controllers  
Use these controllers to edit the parameter thats  
selected in the display.  
TEMPO LED  
This LED will blink at quarternote intervals of the  
current tempo.  
INC and DEC buttons  
VALUE dial  
0–9, –, ., and ENTER buttons  
Together, these controls specify and confirm the value  
of the selected parameter. (See page 10)  
TAP button  
By pressing (or tapping) this button on the beat, you  
can enter the tempo used by the arpeggiator, drum  
track, or internal sequencer (see page 25).  
COMPARE button  
Compares your current edited sound to the sound  
before it was edited.  
For more details, please see “Compare function” on  
15. Headphone  
Headphone jack  
Connect your headphones here.  
11. PAGE SELECT, EXIT  
This jack will output the same signal as the AUDIO  
OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks.  
The headphone volume is controlled by the VOLUME  
knob.  
PAGE button  
When you press this button, a list of the pages within  
the selected mode will appear in the display. Press the  
button of the desired page. (See page 9)  
EXIT button  
Press this button to return to the main page of the  
current mode. (See page 9)  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Front and rear panels Rear panel  
Rear panel  
6
5
4
3
2
1
1. Power supply  
3. PEDALS  
follow the correct procedure described there.  
Note: The KROME has an auto poweroff function that  
automatically turns off the power when the keyboard  
or front panel buttons have not been used for a certain  
length of time. With the factory settings, this is set to 4  
You can connect a damper pedal, foot switch, and foot  
pedal to these jacks. This gives you a broader range of  
functions and effects to control. (See page 18)  
ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack  
ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack  
DAMPER jack  
Power switch  
This switch turns the power on/off. (See page 15)  
4. MIDI  
MIDI lets you connect the KROME to a computer or  
other MIDI devices, for sending and receiving notes,  
controller gestures, sound settings, and so on. (See  
AC adapter connector  
The included AC adapter is connected here.  
(See page 15)  
Connections must be made with the power turned  
off. Please be aware that careless operation may  
damage your speaker system or cause  
malfunctions.  
MIDI IN connector  
MIDI OUT connector  
5. SD  
Cable hook  
Use this to secure the cable of the included AC adapter.  
After connecting the AC adapter, loop the cable  
around the hook located on the KROMEs rear panel so  
that the cable won’t get pulled out inadvertently. Leave  
enough slack on the plug end so that you can  
disconnect it if you want to. (See page 15)  
SD card slot  
You can insert an SD card here, and use it to save/load  
KROME programs, combinations, or song data. (See  
Be careful not to bend the base of the plug any  
more than necessary.  
6. USB  
USB connector  
(for connecting to computer)  
2. AUDIO OUTPUTS  
You can connect your computer to this connector.  
Using a single USB cable, your KROME can send and  
receive MIDI information directly to and from a  
computer, without requiring a MIDI interface. (See  
AUDIO OUTPUT L/MONO & R jack  
These are the stereo audio outputs. Use the VOLUME  
knob to adjust the volume. (See page 17)  
Note: The USB connector of the KROME is only able to  
transmit and receive MIDI data.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction to the KROME  
c: Tab  
Objects in the display  
Most pages are divided into two or more tabs.  
The KROME uses Korgs TouchView graphical user  
interface.  
d: Parameters  
The parameters for various settings are shown in the  
By pressing or dragging objects shown in the display,  
you can select programs or combinations, or edit  
parameter values. Here we’ll explain the names and  
functions of these objects.  
display.  
e: Edit cell  
a: Mode button  
g: Check boxes  
l: Stopwatch button  
When you touch a parameter in the display, the  
parameter or parameter value will usually be  
highlighted (displayed in reverse highlighting). This is  
called the edit cell, and the highlighted item will be  
available for editing.  
b: Current page  
k: Menu command button  
j: Popup  
button (2)  
i: Popup  
button (1)  
Use a value controller such as the VALUE dial (see  
page 2) to edit the value.  
Alternatively, you can edit the value by pressing the  
edit cell and using your finger to drag in the direction  
of the triangles that appear. (The shading of the  
triangles will change in three levels; this function will  
become available when the darkest shading is  
reached.)  
e: Edit cell  
f: Sliders and knobs  
d: Parameters  
c: Tab  
h: Toggle buttons  
a: Mode button  
This indicates the mode thats currently selected.  
When you press this button, the Mode menu will  
appear. In the mode menu, press the name of the mode  
that you want to move. If you select the currently  
selected mode, the Page Select menu for that mode will  
appear. Even in another mode, pressing the right side  
of the name will display the Page Select menu for each  
mode.  
To close the menu, press the Close button or the EXIT  
button.  
If you access this menu from Global or Media mode, it  
will include an item named Return. If you press  
Return, you will return to the mode where you were  
before selecting Global or Media mode.  
In addition, you can display the edit pad by pressing  
twice in succession on the edit cell, or by holding it  
down for a time and then releasing it (see page 6).  
f: Sliders and knobs  
To edit the value of an object shaped like a slider or  
knob, press it to move the edit cell. For details on how  
to edit the value, please see “e: Edit cell,” above.  
The parameter will be active if it is checked, and  
inactive if it is unchecked.  
Mode menu  
When selected in Program,  
When selected in Global or  
Combination, or  
Media mode  
Sequencer mode  
g: Check boxes  
The presence or absence of a check mark in these boxes  
will enable/disable parameters or functions. Putting a  
check mark in the box will enable the item, and  
clearing the check mark will disable it.  
h: Toggle buttons  
This type of button will change its function or switch  
on/off each time it is pressed.  
b: Current page  
This indicates the current page within the selected  
mode.  
Play/Rec/Mute button (Sequencer mode)  
Solo On/Off button (Sequencer mode)  
On/Off button for Effect  
Beginning on the left, this area shows the mode button,  
page number: name, and tab name.  
Mode button  
Page number and name  
Tab name  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Front and rear panels Objects in the display  
* Dialog box  
i: Popup button (1)  
When this button is pressed, a popup menu will  
appear, showing the parameter values that are  
available for selection.  
To enter the parameter value, press the desired value in  
the popup menu.  
When you select a menu command, you’ll see a screen  
containing the settings needed to execute the  
command. This is called a dialog box. The dialog box  
that appears will depend on the menu command that  
you select. Some commands, such as Exclusive Solo,  
do not display a dialog box.  
* Popup menu  
Pin  
This switches the popup menu  
Text edit button  
Pin  
display between locked and  
unlocked.  
When locked, the pin will be shown  
closed, and the popup menu will  
remain displayed even after you  
press a parameter value. When  
unlocked, the pin will be shown  
opened, and the popup menu will  
close immediately when you press a  
parameter value.  
Cancel button  
OK button  
* Text edit button  
j: Popup button (2)  
When you press this button, the text edit dialog box  
appears for changing the names of Programs,  
Combinations, Songs, etc. For details, please see  
When you press this button, a tabbed menu will  
appear.  
To close a tabbed menu, press the OK button or Cancel  
button.  
Character Set Selects  
the type of character.  
Text  
Cursor  
Scroll bar  
Use this when you need to see parameter values that  
extend beyond what can be shown in the display at  
one time.  
Character  
buttons  
Press here to scroll to left or right.  
Shift button  
Switches  
between  
Press here and slide to left or  
right to scroll to the desired  
location.  
Press here to scroll to the  
corresponding location.  
uppercase and  
lowercase  
characters.  
Delete button  
Deletes the  
character to the  
left of the cursor.  
Cursor buttons  
Move the cursor  
to left or right.  
Cancel button, OK button  
If you are satisfied with the text  
that you input, press the OK  
button. If you wish to discard  
your input and exit the text edit  
box, press the Cancel button.  
k: Menu command button  
* Menu  
Space button  
Insert a space at  
the cursor location.  
Clear button  
Delete all characters  
of the text.  
When this button is pressed, a list of menu commands  
will appear.  
The menu commands that appear will differ  
depending on the selected page.  
You can also select up to ten menu commands by  
holding down the ENTER button and pressing a  
numeric key 0–9. The menu will close when you press  
the display in a location other than the menu, or when  
you press the EXIT button.  
* OK and Cancel buttons  
After performing other operations in the dialog box,  
you can execute the command by pressing the OK  
button. To cancel without executing, press the Cancel  
button. (The operation will occur when you press and  
release the button.) The dialog box will close.  
The EXIT button corresponds to the Cancel button,  
Done button, and Exit button.  
* Done, Copy, and Insert buttons  
Menu command button  
There are buttons which perform function when they  
are pressed and released, such as Done, Copy, and  
Insert (similar to the OK and Cancel buttons explained  
Menu button  
l: Stopwatch button  
When you press the button on the upper right of the  
display, the time elapsed since poweron will be  
displayed. You can use the START/STOP button and  
RESET button to measure elapsed time. This is  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction to the KROME  
convenient when you want to check the time during a  
live performance or rehearsal, or to determine the  
approximate playback time of a song.  
• START/STOP: Starts or stops the stopwatch  
• RESET: Returns the time to 000:00:00  
Value slider / Wheel pad  
When you hold down an edit cell, slider, or knob for a  
while and then release it, the wheel/value slider will  
appear.  
To change the value, drag the wheel/slider pad.  
SLIDER  
m: Radio buttons  
Press a radio button to select one value from two or  
more choices.  
WHEEL  
* Edit pad  
Numerical input pad / calculator  
Note: If you don’t want the edit pad to appear, clear the  
“Enable Edit Pad” check box in the menu found in  
Global P0: Basic Setup– System Preferences (see  
If you press an edit cell, slider, or knob twice in quick  
succession, a pad for inputting numbers or using a  
calculator will appear. The various buttons have the  
following functions.  
• OPERATION DIRECT/CALCULATE: Switches  
between numerical input pad and calculator.  
* EG, Velocity Split  
You can change the values of a EG or velocity split  
object by dragging in the display.  
• CE (clear entry): Clears the currentlyinput number.  
• Ent: Enters the number from the pad into the  
parameter, and closes the pad.  
• RECALL: Copies the parameter value into the pad.  
• Close: Closes the pad.  
Numerical input pad  
Calculator  
Note: Some parameters cannot use the calculator  
function.  
* Realtime control popup  
Bank and number select pad  
When you use a REALTIME CONTROLS knob, a  
popup will indicate the function thats being controlled  
and its value. A certain length of time after you stop  
using the knob, this popup will close automatically. If  
you press the popup while its displayed, it will stay  
visible, allowing you to enter the value using a value  
controller such as the numeric keys.  
If you press twice in succession on Program Select,  
Combination Select, or Timbre Select, the bank and  
number select pad will appear.  
Bank and number select pad  
Note: If you don’t want the realtime control popup to  
appear, clear the “REALTIME CONTROL PopUp”  
check box in the menu located in Global P0: Basic  
Setup– System Preferences.  
• BANK: Selects the program or combination bank.  
• For other functions, see “Numerical input pad.”  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Basic Information About the KROME’s modes  
Basic Information  
Sequencer mode  
Sequencer mode lets you record, playback, and edit  
MIDI tracks. You can:  
About the KROMEs modes  
The KROME has numerous functions that let you play  
and edit programs or combinations, record and play  
back sequence data, and manage media. These  
functions are grouped into “modes.” The KROME has  
five modes.  
• Use the sixteentrack MIDI sequencer to record and  
play back songs.  
Record a single MIDI track at a time, or record as  
many as all sixteen tracks simultaneously. You can  
also record exclusive messages.  
• Use multiple tracks to record and play back  
performances generated by two arpeggiators.  
• Use one or more tracks to play back the patterns in  
the drum track.  
Program mode  
Programs are the basic sounds of KROME.  
In Program mode, you can:  
• Select and play Programs.  
• Use one arpeggiator in your performance.  
• Play back Drum Track patterns while you perform  
using a Program.  
• Edit songs.  
• Use the KROME as a 16part multitimbral sound  
module.  
• GM/GM2 playback is also supported.  
• Use the Tone Adjust function to easily edit the  
program of each track.  
• Use up to five insert effects, two master effects, and  
one total effect.  
• Record patterns and assign them to individual  
keys, using RPPR (Realtime Pattern Play/  
Recording).  
• Edit Programs  
You can use the realtime controls and the Tone  
Adjust function to easily edit the program.  
You can adjust the parameters and settings of the  
oscillators, filters, amps, EGs, LFOs, effects, arpeggi‐  
ator, drum track, etc.  
You can use up to five insert effects, two master  
effects, and one total effect.  
Plus, you can create drum programs using drum  
kits (as created in Global mode).  
• Create a Cue List that will play back multiple songs  
in the order that you specify.  
• Create user Drum Track patterns.  
Combination mode  
Global mode  
Combinations are sets of up to 16 programs that can be  
played simultaneously, letting you create sounds that  
are more complex than a single Program. In  
Combination mode, you can:  
• Select and play Combinations.  
• Use multiple timbres to play arpeggio patterns  
generated by two arpeggiators.  
Global mode lets you adjust overall settings for the  
entire KROME, and edit drum kits, arpeggio patterns.  
In Global mode, you can:  
• Adjust settings that affect the entire KROME, such  
as master tune and global MIDI channel.  
• Create user scales.  
• Create drum kits using drumsamples.  
• Create user arpeggio patterns.  
• Rename program, and combination categories.  
• Set the function of the assignable pedals and  
assignable buttons.  
• Use one or more timbres to play back the patterns  
in the drum track.  
• Use the KROME as a 16track multitimbral tone  
generator.  
• Edit Combinations  
• Transmit MIDI System Exclusive data dumps.  
You can use the tone adjust function to easily edit  
the program of each timbre.  
Media mode  
You can save or load data using an SD card. In Media  
mode, you can:  
• Save and load Programs, Combinations, Songs, and  
Global setup data.  
• Format SD card, copy and rename files, etc.  
You can assign Programs to each of the 16 Timbres,  
each with separate volume, pan, EQ, and keyboard  
and velocity zones; make settings for effects, arpeg‐  
giator, drum track.  
Plus, you can use up to five insert effects, two mas‐  
ter effects, and one total effect.  
• Perform file operations such as copying data to or  
from media.  
• Export and import sequences to and from SMF  
(Standard MIDI Files).  
• Use the Data Filer function to save or load MIDI  
System Exclusive data.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Introduction to the KROME  
Relational diagram of the KROME’s modes  
PROGRAM  
OSC 1  
Insert / Master / Total Effect  
Multisample 1  
Drum Kit  
IFX 1  
MFX 1  
MFX 2  
TFX  
Multisample 5  
Multisample 6  
Multisample 7  
Multisample 2  
IFX 5  
Multisample 3  
Multisample 4  
PITCH1  
Arpeggiator  
Multisample 8  
AMP1/  
FILTER1  
DRIVER1  
OSC 2  
Multisample 1  
Drum Kit  
Multisample 5  
Multisample 6  
Multisample 7  
Multisample 2  
Multisample 3  
Multisample 4  
PITCH2  
DrumTrack  
DRUMS PROGRAM  
Multisample 8  
AMP2/  
FILTER2  
DRIVER2  
COMBINATION  
GLOBAL MODE  
Insert / Master / Total Effect  
DRUM KIT  
Key Assign  
TIMBRE  
9
TIMBRE 1 PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
IFX 1  
MFX 1  
MFX 2  
TFX  
TIMBRE 10  
TIMBRE 11  
TIMBRE 12  
TIMBRE 13  
TIMBRE 14  
TIMBRE 15  
TIMBRE 16  
TIMBRE 2  
TIMBRE 3  
TIMBRE 4  
TIMBRE 5  
TIMBRE 6  
TIMBRE 7  
TIMBRE 8  
PROGRAM  
Drumsample 1  
Drumsample 2  
Drumsample 3  
Drumsample 4  
Drumsample 5  
Drumsample 6  
Drumsample 7  
Drumsample 8  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
IFX 5  
Arpeggiator  
Arpeggiator  
A
B
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
ARPEGGIO PATTERN
Drum Track  
Preset Pattern: P0 - 4  
User Pattern  
SEQUENCER  
MIDI TRACK 1...16  
Insert / Master / Total Effect  
TRACK  
9
TRACK 1  
TRACK 2  
TRACK 3  
TRACK 4  
TRACK 5  
TRACK 6  
TRACK 7  
TRACK 8  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
IFX 1  
MFX 1  
MFX 2  
TFX  
TRACK 10  
TRACK 11  
TRACK 12  
TRACK 13  
TRACK 14  
TRACK 15  
TRACK 16  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
IFX 5  
MEDIA MODE  
PCG  
Arpeggiator  
Arpeggiator  
A
B
PCG / SNG  
PCG  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
Drum Track  
DRUM KIT  
Preset Drum Track Pattern  
User Drum Track Pattern  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Information Basic operations  
Basic operations  
After you’ve turned on the KROME, heres how to  
perform basic operations, such as selecting modes and  
pages.  
Selecting modes  
In order to use a particular function on the KROME,  
you must first select the appropriate mode.  
• Press one of the front panel mode buttons to enter  
the corresponding mode.  
2. Press the button for the page that you want to  
view.  
P0: Play is the page you’ll normally use when  
performing on the KROME. (The same is true in  
Program mode.) Editing is done in other pages.  
COMBI button:  
PROG button:  
SEQ button:  
GLOBAL button:  
MEDIA button:  
Combination mode  
Program mode  
Sequencer mode  
Global mode  
Media mode  
As an example here, try selecting “P4 Zone/Delay.” The  
P4: Zone/Delay– Key Z T01–08 page will appear.  
• Alternatively, you can press the Mode button  
located in the upper left of the display, and select  
the desired mode from a menu (see page 4).  
For a summary of each mode, please see About the  
Note: The selected mode is shown in the upper left of  
the display, and also indicated by the lit status of one of  
the above mode buttons.  
Note: By pressing the GLOBAL or MEDIA button  
twice, you can select the previouslyselected mode  
(Combination, Program, or Sequencer).  
Selecting page group and tabs  
Each mode has a large number of parameters, which  
are grouped into pages. These pages are further  
subdivided by tabs; with up to twelve tabs per page.  
Note: The page that appears will be showing the tab  
that you most recently selected.  
Using the PAGE button plus the numeric keys 0–9  
to access different pages  
• Make sure that the desired mode is selected.  
• Hold down the PAGE button and use the numeric  
keys 0–9 to specify the page number that you want  
to view.  
For this explanation we’ll use Combination mode as  
an example.  
The specified page number will appear. The page  
that appears will be showing the tab that you most  
recently selected.  
Selecting a page group  
Moving by selecting a page group  
Note: In pages consisting of multiple pages such as P5–  
1, P5–2, P8–1, and P8–2, the first page (P5–1, or P8–1)  
will be selected.  
The Page Select screen shows a list of the page groups  
within each mode. Select the desired page group from  
this list.  
Using the EXIT button to move between pages  
1. Press the PAGE button.  
If you’re in a page other than page 0 (e.g., Prog P0:  
Play) of each mode, pressing this button will take you  
to page 0.  
This button makes it easy to return to the main page of  
the current mode:  
• Press it once to go to the previouslyselected tab on  
the main P0: Play page (Play/REC page in  
Sequencer mode).  
Alternatively, you can access the mode menu and press  
the mode button, and then press the right side of the  
menu (see page 4).  
The page select menu will appear.  
The page where you were immediately before pressing  
the PAGE button is shown in a darker color for your  
reference.  
• Press it again to go to the first tab on the main P0:  
Play page (such as the main Program Play page). If  
you had previously selected a parameter on this  
page, that parameter will be selected.  
• Press it a third time to select the main parameter on  
the P0: Play page, such as the Program name in  
Program mode.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Introduction to the KROME  
When a dialog box is open, this button cancels the  
settings made in the dialog box and closes the dialog  
box, just like pressing the Cancel button.  
If a popup menu or menu is open, pressing EXIT closes  
the menu.  
Functions that use the ENTER button in conjunc-  
tion with another button  
ENTER has a few special functions when it is pressed  
in combination with other buttons.  
By holding down the ENTER button while you press a  
numeric key (0–9), you can select up to ten menu  
commands from within the current page.  
Selecting pages  
• You can access tabbed pages by pressing the tabs  
While a dialog box is displayed, the ENTER button  
corresponds to the OK button. (The EXIT button  
corresponds to the Cancel button.)  
In Sequencer mode, you can hold down the ENTER  
button and press the LOCATE ( ) button to use the  
menu command Set Location.  
shown in the bottom line of the display.  
This example shows the Program T01–08 page  
through Mixer T01–08 page of Combi P0: Play.  
Other  
Specifying a program bank or combination bank  
PROG BANK A, B, C, D, E, F/  
COMBI BANK A, B, C, D buttons  
Use these buttons to change banks when selecting  
Programs or Combinations. The LEDs in the buttons  
light up to show the current bank.  
In Program mode, these buttons select the Program  
bank.  
In Combination mode, these buttons have two  
functions:  
• When you’re selecting Combinations, they choose  
the Combination bank.  
• When you’re assigning a Program to a timbre  
within the Combination, they select the Program  
bank.  
Selecting a parameter and editing the  
value  
1. Press the parameter that you want to edit.  
2. If you select an edit cell, the display will be  
highlighted. Edit the value.  
• The way that the value will change depends on the  
type of parameter or object. (See “Objects in the  
In Sequencer mode, when a tracks Program name is  
selected, these buttons change the Program bank.  
The value in the edit cell can be edited by using the  
value controllers (VALUE dial, INC/DEC buttons,  
numeric keys 0–9, – button, (.) button, ENTER but‐  
ton, etc.).  
Using the keyboard to enter a note number or  
velocity value  
By playing a key while pressing a parameter that  
specifies a note number (such as G4 or C#2) or a  
velocity value, you can directly enter that note number  
or velocity value. (This is not available in menu  
command dialog boxes.)  
3. You can use knobs 1–4 to edit parameters that are  
assigned to the control surface.  
Note: You can use the COMPARE button to compare the  
sound you’re editing with the original unedited sound.  
Tempo input  
TEMPO knob, TAP button  
You can set the tempo by turning the TEMPO knob or  
by repeatedly pressing the TAP button.  
INC/DEC buttons  
Use these when you wish to make small changes in the  
value.  
VALUE dial  
COMPARE button  
Use this dial to edit the selected parameters value.  
This control is convenient when you want to scroll  
through a very long list of selections.  
You can use this button to return the settings of an  
edited program, combination, or song to their original  
state. Refer to the following section.  
Numeric keys 0–9, ENTER button, – button,  
(.) button  
These buttons are convenient when you know the  
exact value that you want to enter. Use the 0–9, –, and  
decimal (.) buttons to enter the value, and then press  
the ENTER button to confirm the entry.  
The – button inverts the sign (+/–) of the parameter  
value; the decimal (.) button inserts a decimal, for  
entering fractional values.  
Note: When selecting “Program Select” (see page 21),  
you can select a GM bank by holding down the 0  
button and pressing the (.), 1–9, or – buttons.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Information Basic operations  
Compare function  
Selecting and executing menu  
commands  
Program, Combination mode  
Use this when you wish to compare the edits you have  
made to a program or combinations sound with the  
unedited original (i.e., the sound that is written into  
memory).  
Menu command button  
When editing a program or combination, press this  
button. The LED will light up, and the lastwritten  
settings for that program or combination number will  
be recalled. When you press the COMPARE button  
once again, the LED will go dark and you will return to  
the settings that you were editing.  
1. When editing a program or combination, press  
this button.  
The LED will light up, and the lastwritten settings for  
that program number or combination number will be  
recalled.  
2. Press the COMPARE button once again.  
Note: The LED will go dark and you will return to the  
settings that you were editing.  
If you edit the settings that are recalled by pressing the  
COMPARE button (i.e., the settings that are written  
into memory), the LED will go dark, and it will not be  
possible to return to the previous edits by pressing the  
COMPARE button again.  
Menu button  
The utility functions provide commands that are  
specific to each page, such as Write (save) or Copy. The  
available utility functions will depend on the selected  
page.  
For example, the utility functions in Program mode let  
you write (save) the settings, or let you perform  
convenient editing operations such as copying settings  
between oscillators or effects, or a Sync function that  
lets you edit two EGs together.  
1. On the upper right side of the display, press the  
button.  
The menu command will appear.  
2. Select a menu command by touching it with your  
finger.  
v
A dialog box for the selected menu command will  
appear.  
Checktype commands will not display a dialog box;  
their status will be switched, and the list will close.  
By holding down the ENTER button and pressing a  
numeric key 0–9 you can access the dialog box for the  
first ten utility functions without going through the  
menu.  
• If you want to close the list without selecting a  
command, press the display somewhere other than  
the list, or press the EXIT button.  
Sequencer mode  
In Sequencer mode, you can use the COMPARE button  
to make “before and after” comparisons immediately  
after using realtime recording or step recording to  
record a song, or after performing an edit on a track.  
For example, this can be used effectively when  
realtimerecording a MIDI track for a song.  
1. Realtimerecord a MIDI track. (Take 1)  
2. Once again, realtimerecord on the same track.  
(Take 2)  
3. Press the COMPARE button. The LED will light  
up, and take 1 will be recalled.  
4. Press the COMPARE button once again. The LED  
will go dark, and take 2 will be recalled.  
3. For a parameter in a dialog box, select it by  
pressing it with your finger, and use the VALUE  
controllers (e.g., VALUE dial or INC/DEC buttons)  
to enter its value.  
When selecting a program or combination number in a  
dialog box, you can also use the BANK button to enter  
the bank as an alternative to using the VALUE  
controllers.  
4. To execute, press the OK button or the ENTER  
button.  
5. If at step 3 you once again realtimerecord on the  
same track (take 3), the Compare function will  
now be referencing take 1.  
6. If at step 4 you once again realtimerecord on the  
same track (take 3), the Compare function will be  
referencing take 2.  
If you decide not to execute, press the Cancel or the  
EXIT button.  
The dialog box will close.  
In this way, the Compare function lets you recall the  
previous recording or the previous state of event  
editing.  
Note: If you continue editing when the COMPARE  
button is lit, the button will go dark. This now becomes  
the musical data that will be selected when the  
COMPARE button is dark.  
Global mode  
The Compare function that brings back the settings  
prior to editing is not available in Global mode.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Introduction to the KROME  
Writing/saving  
Shortcuts  
After editing, you should write or save your changes as  
necessary.  
For example if you’ve edited a program, your changes  
will be lost if you select another program or turn off  
the power. The same applies to a combination.  
Settings you edit in Global mode and songs will be  
remembered as long as the power is on, but your  
changes will be lost when you turn off the power,  
unless you write these changes into memory.  
Selecting a GM bank program  
• Bank GM: Hold down the 0 numeric key and press  
–.  
• Banks g(1)–g(9): Hold down the 0 numeric key and  
press 1–9.  
• Bank g(d): Hold down the numeric key 0 and press  
(.).  
• You can write or save by pressing the WRITE  
button twice.  
For more details on the Write operations, see the  
following pages.  
Moving between pages within a mode  
• By holding down the PAGE button and pressing a  
numeric key 0–9 you can jump to the  
corresponding page.  
• Programs p.30  
Access the menu commands in each page (up  
to ten items)  
• Combinations p.47  
• Effect presets PG p.67  
• Global settings (pages 0–4) p.116  
• Drum kits p.116  
• By holding down the ENTER button and pressing a  
numeric key 0–9.  
• User arpeggio pattern p.116  
• User Drum Track patterns p.103  
Input note number values or velocity values  
• While holding down the edit cell in the display,  
Preset/user Drum Track patterns are saved in  
internal memory even when the power is turned  
off. Patterns that you create in Sequencer mode can  
be converted into user Drum Track patterns and  
saved in internal memory.  
press a note on the keyboard.  
Alternatively, select the edit cell in the display, and  
then hold down the ENTER button and press a note  
on the keyboard.  
Note: You can also use a MIDI noteon message instead  
of the keyboard.  
Note: While a dialog box is displayed, the ENTER  
button will perform the same function as the OK  
button. This means that you can’t use this method to  
enter a note number or velocity value in a dialog box  
that contains an OK button.  
• User template songs PG p.164  
Preset/user template songs are saved in internal  
memory even when the power is turned off. Track  
settings and effect settings of a song you create can  
be saved in internal memory by using the menu  
command Save Template Song.  
• For details on writing to internal memory p.115  
Refer to the following pages for more information  
about saving.  
• Saving a song p.75  
Specifying the location in a song  
In Sequencer mode, sets the current location as the  
Location (equivalent to the Set Location menu  
command)  
• Saving to media (Media– Save) p.118  
Note: On the KROME, the action of writing to internal  
memory is called “Write,” and the action of saving to  
an SD card device is called “Save.”  
• Hold down the ENTER button and press the  
LOCATE ( ) button.  
ENTER button  
Assigning a name (renaming)  
You can edit the name of an edited program,  
combination, song, drum kit, or arpeggio pattern.  
• While a dialog box is displayed, this button  
performs the same function as the OK button.  
You can also change the names of the program and  
combination categories.  
For details, please see “Editing names” on page 117.  
EXIT button  
This button makes it easy to return to the main page of  
the current mode:  
1. Press it once to go to the previously selected tab on  
the main P0 page.  
2. Press the EXIT button. You will move to the  
previously selected parameter of the P0 top page  
(Prog: Main, Combi/Seq: Program T01–08).  
3. Press the EXIT button. You will move to the  
following parameter of the P0 top page.  
Prog: Program Select  
Combi: Combination Select  
Seq: Song Select  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Information Basic operations  
In any page of Program or Combination mode,  
pressing EXIT a maximum of two times will  
immediately allow you to use the numeric keys or  
INC/DEC buttons to select programs or combinations.  
In Sequencer mode, pressing EXIT a maximum of three  
times will allow you to select a song.  
EXIT button (in dialog boxes)  
When a dialog box is displayed, this has the same  
function as the Cancel, Done, or Exit button.  
Initialize the KROME  
• With the power off, press the power switch while  
holding down the ENTER button and numeric key  
[0].  
(While data is being loaded, the display will  
indicate “Now writing into internal Memory.”)  
The result will be the same as when you’ve  
executed Load Preload/Demo Data All.  
(See page 125)  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction to the KROME  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup  
Turning the power on/off  
Connecting the AC adapter  
1. Make sure that the KROME is poweredoff.  
2. Connect the DC plug of the included AC adapter  
to the power supply jack on the KROME’s rear  
panel.  
You must use only the included AC adapter. Using  
any other AC adapter might cause malfunctions.  
3. Connect the power cord to the AC adapter.  
4. Plug the power cord into an AC outlet.  
Be sure to use an AC outlet of the correct voltage  
for your adapter.  
5. Use the KROME’s cable hook to fasten the cable so  
that the DC plug does not become accidentally  
disconnected.  
If the auto poweroff function is enabled, the time  
until auto poweroff turns off the power will be  
shown when the system starts up. If this dialog  
box does not appear, the auto poweroff function is  
disabled; the power will not turn off automatically  
AC adapter connections  
4: Cable hook  
1: Power  
supply jack  
Power switch  
When fastening the  
cable to the cable  
hook, take care not  
to bend this portion  
any more than  
AC adapter  
3. Turn on the power of the external equipment that’s  
connected to the KROME’s AUDIO OUTPUT L/  
MONO and R jacks, such as powered monitor  
speakers.  
4. Use the KROME’s VOLUME knob and the volume  
controls of your external equipment to adjust the  
volume to a suitable level.  
2: Plug into AC outlet.  
necessary.  
3: Power cord for AC adapter  
Note: The page that appears when you turn on the  
power will depend on the PowerOn Mode setting (see  
Turning the power on  
1. Turn the KROME’s VOLUME knob all the way to  
the left so that the volume is down.  
If external equipment such as powered monitor  
speakers are connected, lower their volume as well,  
and then turn off their power.  
2. Press the power switch on the KROME’s rear  
panel to turn the power on.  
Turning the power off  
When you turn off the power, unsaved data will be  
lost. Be sure to save any important data such as  
edited sounds or global settings (see page 12).  
If the KROMEs auto poweroff function is  
enabled, its power will automatically turn off if  
there has been no user input for a certain length of  
time. Unsaved data will be lost even if the power is  
turned off by the auto poweroff function.  
The display will show the model name and software  
version. (The illustration shows the screen that will  
appear with the factory settings. This may change  
without notice.)  
1. Turn the KROME’s VOLUME knob all the way to  
the left so that the volume is lowered.  
2. If external equipment such as powered monitor  
speakers are connected, lower their volume and  
then turn off their power.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Setup  
3. Press the power switch on the KROME’s rear  
panel to turn the power off.  
1. While this message is displayed, press the Change  
Setting button in the dialog box.  
The KROMEs internal data may be damaged if the  
power is turned off while data is being written into  
internal memory, such as during a Save operation.  
Never turn off the power while processing is being  
performed.  
The following dialog box will appear.  
The following message is displayed while data is  
being written into internal memory.  
“Now writing into internal memory”  
If writing to internal memory could not be  
completed successfully, the KROME will  
automatically repair the internal memory by  
initializing it the next time you turn on the power.  
This is not a malfunction. If this occurs, the  
following message will appear in the display;  
press the OK button.  
The internal memory has been corrupted, likely  
due to an interruption of power while the system  
was writing/saving data. This has been repaired  
and the affected Bank has been initialized.  
A small amount of electrical power is used even  
when the power is off (STANDBY). If you won’t be  
using the KROME for an extended period, turn off  
the power and unplug the power cord from the  
AC outlet.  
2. Press the popup button to select the length of time  
after which the power will turn off. If you don’t  
want the power to turn off automatically, choose  
the Disabled setting.  
Changing the setting during operation  
1. Press the GLOBAL button. (Alternatively, press  
the mode button and choose GLOBAL.)  
2. Press the EXIT button to access P0: Basic Setup.  
3. Press the System Pref. tab to access the System  
Preferences page.  
4. In Auto PowerOff,” specify the amount of time  
when you want the power to turn off. If you don’t  
want the auto poweroff function to automatically  
turn off the power, choose the Disabled setting.  
Auto power-off function  
The KROME supports an auto poweroff function that  
automatically turns off the power when the keyboard  
(*)  
or front panel buttons have not been used for a  
certain length of time.  
* Usage of the VOLUME knob is not included.  
Note: With the factory settings, the time until  
automatic poweroff will be approximately four hours.  
When the power turns off, the settings you had  
been editing will be lost. Make sure that you save  
important settings before this occurs.  
Auto power-off warning message  
Changing the auto power-off setting  
When the specified length of time has elapsed without  
any user input on the KROME, a message will appear,  
warning you that the auto poweroff function is about  
to turn off the power.  
If you want to change the setting so that the power  
does not turn off automatically, proceed as follows to  
disable the auto poweroff function.  
Making the change in the dialog box immediately  
after start-up  
If the auto poweroff function is enabled so that the  
power will turn off automatically, the dialog box will  
appear immediately after startup, indicating the time  
until automatic poweroff will occur.  
If you want to continue using the system, press the  
keyboard, a button, or the display. The Auto poweroff  
function will be reset. If the same specified length of  
time elapses with no user input, the same message will  
appear again.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connections Turning the power off  
Connections  
Connections must be made with the power turned  
off. Please be aware that careless usage may  
damage your speaker system or cause  
malfunctions.  
Connections to computers  
Pedal connections etc.  
ASSIGNABLE PEDAL  
ASSIGNABLE SWITCH  
Computer  
DAMPER  
USB  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
R L/MONO  
MIDI OUT  
Connections to MIDI equipment  
MIDI cable  
MIDI IN  
AC adapter power  
supply connector  
MIDI IN  
MIDI OUT  
Power cable  
(Included)  
INPUT  
to an AC outlet  
Connecting the AC adapter  
MIDI keyboard  
Powered  
monitors, etc.  
Analog audio output  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setup  
Audio connections  
The KROME does not contain builtin speakers. In  
order to hear the sound of your performance, you’ll  
need to connect audio equipment such as powered  
monitors, a mixer, a stereo set or headphones.  
Connecting a damper pedal,  
foot switch, or foot pedal  
If you connect an optional damper pedal, foot switch,  
or foot pedal to the KROME, you’ll be able to control  
the KROME using your feet.  
Connecting audio equipment  
The KROMEs audio output is designed to  
produce a signal level that is higher than consumer  
audio equipment such as CD players. For this  
reason, performing at high a volume may damage  
your speakers or equipment. Please use caution  
when adjusting the volume.  
1. Minimize the volume of all connected equipment,  
and turn off the power.  
2. Connect the KROME’s OUTPUT L/MONO and R  
jacks to the input jacks of your powered monitor  
speakers or mixer.  
Note: If you connect only the L/MONO jack, the L and  
R sound will be mixed for monaural output. In order to  
take full advantage of the KROMEs capabilities, we  
recommend that you listen in stereo.  
If you’re playing back through your stereo audio  
system or a cassetteradio that has external input  
connectors, connect the KROME to the jacks that are  
marked LINE IN, AUX IN, or external input. (You  
might need to obtain the appropriate adapter plug or  
conversion cable.)  
Connecting a damper pedal  
When you press the damper pedal, the notes you’ve  
pressed will be sustained so that they will continue  
even after you take your hands off the keyboard. This  
is also called a sustain pedal; it has the same function  
as the damper pedal of an acoustic piano.  
If the optional Korg DS1H damper is connected, you’ll  
be able to take advantage of the “halfdamper” effect,  
where the depth that you press the pedal will vary the  
damper amount. If any other type of pedal is  
Powered monitor speakers  
INPUT  
connected, it will function as a damper switch.  
In Combination or Sequencer mode, you can also select  
settings so that the damper will apply to some sounds  
but not to other sounds.  
L/MONO  
R
1. Connect a Korg DS1H damper pedal to the  
ASSIGNABLE PEDAL/SW1/DAMPER jack.  
2. Depending on which assignable jack you have  
connected the pedal to, set the controller type  
(Type) to Damper, and set the Polarity as  
PHONES  
appropriate (see page 202 of the Parameter Guide).  
Note: The halfdamper sensitivity is adjusted to a  
standard value when the KROME is shipped from the  
factory. If the halfdamper pedal you’re using does not  
respond appropriately, please adjust the sensitivity  
(see page 217 of the Parameter Guide).  
Headphones  
Connecting headphones  
Using headphones at high volume for an extended  
time may cause hearing damage. Please avoid  
excessively high volume levels.  
Connecting a foot switch  
1. Connect the stereo miniplug of your headphones  
to the KROME’s Headphone jack.  
This lets you use a simple foot switch, such as the Korg  
PS1 or PS3, as an assignable controller. The foot  
switch can perform a wide variety of functions, such  
as:  
• An assignable source for modulating sounds and  
effects  
2. Use the VOLUME knob to adjust the headphone  
volume.  
The KROMEs Headphone jack will output the same  
signal as the OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks.  
The output from the OUTPUT jack is not turned off  
even if headphones are connected to the Headphone  
jack.  
• Portamento on/off  
• Program select up or down  
• Sequencer start/stop or punch in/out  
• Tap Tempo  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Connections Connecting a damper pedal, foot switch, or foot pedal  
• Arpeggiator on/off  
• Switch the Drum Track on/off  
• Use various KROME controls (realtime control  
knobs, joystick, SW1/SW2, etc.)  
4. Set the “Foot Switch Polarity” to match the  
polarity of the pedal you’ve connected.  
If you’ve connected the optional PS1 or PS3 pedal,  
choose (–) KORG Standard.  
Now, the foot switch will step through the Programs,  
one by one.  
This button will always function in the same way  
regardless of the Program, Combination, or Song  
you’ve selected. You can assign the function in the  
Global mode.  
5. If you want to preserve this setting even when the  
power is turned off, be sure to Write the data. (See  
6. Press the PROG button to enter Prog P0: Play, and  
press the foot switch to change the Program.  
Note: This setting applies to selecting Combinations, as well.  
Note: With the Program Up/Down method, you won’t  
be able to select programs while the Bank/Program  
Select or Category/Program Select menus are open.  
Use the Assigning the foot switch to Value Inc/Dec”  
method described below.  
Using a foot switch to select Programs  
You can select programs by using a foot switch  
connected to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack. By  
assigning the appropriate function, you can increment  
or decrement the program number in steps of one.  
This lets you change Programs without using your  
hands–great for quick Program changes in live  
performance situations.  
There are two ways of doing this: by assigning the foot  
switch to Program Up/Down, or to Value Inc/Dec. Each  
of these is suited to a particular application, as  
described below.  
• Prog Up/Down: When performing in the normal P0  
screen  
Assigning the foot switch to Value Inc/Dec  
This lets you use the Assignable Foot Switch to duplicate  
the functions of the frontpanel INC or DEC buttons.  
This method is convenient if you want to open the  
Bank/Program Select menu or the Category/Program  
Select menu and switch programs while viewing the  
program or combination menu.  
1. Follow steps 1–2 under Assigning the foot switch  
• VALUE Inc/Dec: When performing while a list such  
as the Category/Program Select menu is open  
Assigning the foot switch to Program Up/Down  
Assigning the foot switch to Program Up or Program  
Down lets you directly control Program changes from  
the foot switch. For most situations, this is the more  
straightforward method.  
2. At the top of the page, set the Foot Switch Assign  
parameter to Value Inc (or Value Dec).  
3. Now, the foot switch will act just like you’re  
pressing the frontpanel INC or DEC buttons.  
To set this up:  
Note: The foot switch will work like this for the entire  
KROME–not just when the Bank/Program select menu  
or Category/Program Select menu is open.  
1. Connect a foot switch to the rearpanel  
ASSIGNABLE SWITCH input.  
Use an optional PS1 pedal switch.  
2. Access the Global P2: Controllers– Foot  
Controllers page.  
Connecting a foot pedal  
If you connect an optional EXP2 foot controller or  
XVP10 expression/volume pedal to the ASSIGNABLE  
PEDAL jack, you can use it to apply modulation to  
sounds or effects, or to adjust the overall volume.  
This pedal will always function in the same way  
regardless of the Program, Combination, or Song  
you’ve selected. You can assign the function in the  
Global mode.  
Like the Assignable Foot Switch, described above, the  
Foot Pedal can be used for many different functions,  
including:  
• Master Volume  
• Channel Volume, Pan, or Expression  
Proceed as follows.  
• Assignable sound modulation, as several different  
AMS or Dmod sources  
• Effects Send level control  
• Use various KROME controls (realtime control  
knobs, Joystick, SW1/SW2, etc.)  
Press the GLOBAL button to enter Global mode.  
Press the PAGE button to access the GLOBAL Page  
Select. Press P2 Controllers, then press the Foot  
Control tab in the display.  
3. Set “Foot Switch Assign” to either Program Up or  
Program Down.  
If you choose Program Up, the next program number  
up will be selected each time you press the foot switch.  
If you choose Program Down, the next program  
number down will be selected each time you press the  
foot switch.  
1. Connect an optional XVP10 or EXP2 to the  
ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jacks.  
2. After turning the power on, use Global P2:  
Controllers– Foot Controllers page “Foot Pedal  
Assign” to assign the function controlled by the  
foot pedal. (See page 111, and pages 202, 350 of the  
Parameter Guide)  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setup  
Controlling an external MIDI tone  
generator from KROME  
If you want to use the KROMEs keyboard, chord  
trigger switches and other controllers, sequencer, and  
arpeggiator to play or control an external MIDI sound  
module, use a MIDI cable to connect the KROMEs  
MIDI OUT connector to the MIDI IN connector of your  
external MIDI sound module.  
Connecting the KROME to  
a computer  
USB connection  
The KROME provides both MIDI and USB connectors  
as standard equipment. By connecting the KROME to  
your computer via USB, you can use it as a controller  
and MIDI sound module for your DAW software with  
single cable convenience; and with out the need for a  
MIDI interface.  
MIDI OUT  
MIDI IN  
By using the dedicated editor, you can edit some of the  
parameters of the KROME from your computer as  
though it were a software plugin.  
KROME  
MIDI keyboard  
Note: The USB connector of the KROME is only able to  
transmit and receive MIDI data.  
Controlling KROMEs tone generator  
from an external MIDI device  
When you wish to play or control the KROMEs tone  
generator from an external MIDI keyboard or  
sequencer etc., use a MIDI cable to connect the MIDI  
OUT connector of the external MIDI device to the  
MIDI IN connector of KROME.  
Before you connect the KROME to your computer  
via USB, you must install the KORG USBMIDI  
driver on your computer.  
Connecting via the MIDI connectors  
You can connect the KROME to your computer via  
MIDI by using a commercially available MIDI  
interface.  
MIDI IN  
MIDI OUT  
Note: For more about MIDI interfaces, refer to the  
owners manual of the MIDI interface you’re using.  
Some USBMIDI interfaces may be unable to  
transmit or receive the KROMEs MIDI exclusive  
messages.  
KROME  
MIDI keyboard  
Controlling two or more external MIDI  
tone generators from KROME  
You can also use a MIDI patch bay to control multiple  
MIDI devices.  
Connecting MIDI devices  
By connecting the KROMEs MIDI connectors to an  
external MIDI device you can transfer sound settings  
and performance data such as note messages between  
your external MIDI device and the KROME.  
KROME  
About MIDI  
MIDI OUT  
MIDI IN  
MIDI stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface,  
and is a worldwide standard for exchanging various  
types of musical data between electronic musical  
instruments and computers. When MIDI cables are  
used to connect two or more MIDI devices,  
performance data can be exchanged between the  
devices, even if they were made by different  
manufacturers.  
MIDI OUT  
MIDI OUT  
MIDI IN  
MIDI  
patch bay  
MIDI keyboard  
MIDI IN  
MIDI tone generator  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Playing and editing Programs  
About the KROME’s Programs  
Programs are the basic sounds of the KROME.  
You can play them by themselves, layer them together  
in Combinations, or play a different Program on each  
of the 16 MIDI tracks, either from the internal  
sequencer or from external computerbased  
sequencers.  
This section of the manual takes a quick look at playing  
Programs, including tours of the frontpanel  
controllers and basic editing techniques.  
Playing Programs  
This is shown in the top line of the display.  
Mode button  
Page number and name  
Tab name  
Selecting Programs  
There are several different ways to select Programs.  
Each one is convenient in a different way:  
Bank  
number  
• Using “Program Select” and the VALUE  
controllers:  
• Using the Bank/Program Select menu:  
• Using the Category/Program Select menu:  
• Find  
Program Select  
(Program number and name)  
Category Select popup button  
(Category number and name)  
Program Select popup button  
If a different page is shown, press the EXIT button a  
few times to return to the Prog P0: Play– Main page.  
3. Make sure that “Program Select” is selected.  
If its not selected, press “Program Select” in the  
display or press the EXIT button to highlight the  
indication.  
4. Select the program you want to play.  
You can use the following methods to select a program.  
• Use the INC or DEC buttons.  
• Using a foot switch: page 19  
• MIDI program change messages let you select  
Programs remotely, from either a MIDI sequencer  
or an external MIDI controller  
For details, please see below.  
Selecting a program using “Program  
Select” and the VALUE controllers  
• Turn the VALUE dial.  
• Use numeric keys 0–9 to enter the program number,  
and press the ENTER button.  
1. Press the PROG button. (The LED will light up.)  
(Refer to the illustration below for the buttons.)  
5. Press one of the PROG BANK A–F buttons to  
select a bank.  
Alternatively, you can use the mode button (see  
When you select a different Bank, the buttons LED will  
light up, and the selected bank will appear on the left  
side of the display.  
The KROME will enter Program mode.  
2. Access the Prog P0: Play– Main page.  
2: PROG P0: Play  
1: Mode name  
(button)  
3: Program Select  
4: Numeric keypads  
ENTER button  
1: ROG buttons  
5: BANK A–F buttons  
4: INC/DEC buttons  
Velocity meter  
4: VALUE dial  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Playing and editing Programs  
For example, to select bank B, press the PROG BANK B  
button. The B button will light up, and the name Bank  
B will appear on the left side of the display.  
Selecting by Bank/Program Select  
menu  
You can select Programs from a menu organized by  
Program bank.  
To select a GM bank, you’ll use the numeric keys.  
GM: Hold down 0 and press –.  
g(1)–g(9): Hold down 0 and press the desired num‐  
ber 1–9. For banks that do not have variation  
sounds, the basic GM sounds will be recalled. (An  
“*” will be appended to the beginning of the pro‐  
gram name.)  
1. Press the Program Select popup button.  
The Bank/Program Select menu appears.  
Bank/Program Select menu  
g(d): Hold down 0 and press (.).  
Auditioning the sound  
Play the keyboard to audition the program you’ve  
selected.  
The velocity meter shows the noteon velocity.  
• This shows the velocity value of noteon events for  
the global MIDI channel, such as the keyboard,  
MIDI IN, and arpeggiator. (If multiple noteon  
events are received simultaneously, the highest  
velocity value is shown.)  
• Since this shows the noteon velocity values, it will  
not be affected by the settings of the volume knob  
or by changes in the audio signal level.  
In this illustration, Bank A is selected. The menu  
displays the Programs contained in that bank.  
2. Press the tabs on the left side of the display to  
select banks.  
3. Press one of the program names in the center area  
to select a program.  
The selected program will be highlighted, and the  
program will change.  
Alternatively, you can use the INC/DEC buttons to  
switch programs.  
Overview: Program Banks  
As program banks, the KROME provides the six banks  
A–F and the GM banks (GM–g(d)). With the factory  
settings, the KROME has 640 preload programs in  
banks A–E. Bank F contains only initialized programs.  
Programs you’ve created should be stored in this bank.  
Play the keyboard or press the chord trigger buttons to  
hear the program you selected.  
4. If you selected Bank GM, the Variation button is  
shown.  
By repeatedly pressing this Variation button, you can  
successively step through the banks, allowing you to  
recall a GM2 sound set (see “To select a GM bank” on  
page 22).  
5. When you are satisfied with the selected Program,  
press the OK button to close the menu.  
With the exception of the GM–g(d) banks, you are free  
to save by overwriting these program memory areas.  
You can also save these programs on an SD card.  
Programs are organized into six banks as shown in the  
following table.  
Program bank contents  
Bank Prog. No.  
Explanation  
With the factory settings,  
these banks contain a wide  
variety of preloaded  
programs that use the  
internal multisamples,  
effects, and arpeggiator.  
Factory  
Programs.  
A…E 000…127  
If instead you press the Cancel button, the selection  
you made here will be discarded, and you will return  
to the program that had been selected before you  
opened the menu.  
Initialized  
Programs.  
Use these to create a  
program from scratch.  
F
000…127  
001…128  
001…128  
GM2 main  
programs.  
These banks contain 256  
GM programs and nine GM  
drum programs that are  
compatible with the GM2  
sound map. The programs  
of these banks are read-  
only.  
GM  
g(1)…  
g(9)  
GM2 variation  
programs.  
Bank GM contains the GM  
programs. GM lets you  
select 128 programs  
numbered from 001–128,  
and g(1)–g(d) lets you  
select nine drum  
GM2 drum  
programs.  
g(d)  
001…128  
programs.  
You can’t write (save) data  
to these banks.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Playing Programs Selecting Programs  
Find  
Selecting by Category/Program Select  
menu  
You can select Programs from within a category, such  
as keyboard, organ, bass, and drums.  
When shipped from the factory, the preloaded  
Programs are organized into 16 categories, each with  
several subcategories.  
Heres how to search for a program by a portion of its  
name.  
1. Access the Bank/Program Select menu or the  
Category/Program Select menu, etc.  
2. Press a tab to select the bank or category that you  
want to search.  
Note: The programs included in the selected tab will be  
1. Press the Category Select popup button.  
The Category/Program Select menu appears.  
Category/Program Select menu  
the subject of the search.  
3. On the lower left side, press the Find button to  
access the dialog box.  
4. Press the “T” button to access the text dialog box.  
In the illustration above, the Keyboard category is  
selected. The menu in the center column area shows  
the Programs which belong to that category.  
2. Press the tabs to the left and right of the display to  
select a different category.  
Enter the alphanumeric characters that you want to  
find, and press the OK button. For example if you want  
to find programs that take effective advantage of SW1  
or SW2, enter “sw”.  
5. If you select the “Ignore Case” check box,  
uppercase and lowercase characters will not be  
distinguished in the search.  
The name of the selected category will be displayed in  
full in the top righthand corner.  
6. Press the Find button to begin searching.  
Search results are shown in “Found.”  
3. Press one of the program names in the center area  
to select a program.  
The selected program will be highlighted, and the  
program will change.  
If one or more items are found, the number of items  
and the first found program will be displayed.  
Alternatively, you can use the INC/DEC buttons to  
switch programs. Touch the scroll ribbon at the bottom  
of the screen to see all of the Programs in that category.  
Press the Prev. button or Next button to find the  
previous or next program. This will cycle through the  
found items within the tab.  
Play the keyboard or press a chord trigger button to  
hear the program you selected.  
You can play the keyboard to audition the program  
that was found.  
4. If you want to select from a subcategory, press the  
Jump to Sub button to access the Sub Category/  
Prog Select menu.  
Press the left tabs to select a subcategory.  
Note: You can’t select tabs for a subcategory that has  
no associated programs.  
If no items are found, the display will indicate  
“nothing.”  
7. If you are satisfied with the selected program,  
press the OK button to close the menu.  
The selected program will be selected in the menu you  
selected in step 1. If you are satisfied with the selected  
program, press the OK button to close the menu.  
Select a program as described in step 3 above.  
If you want to search for a different program, or if no  
items were found, press the Cancel button.  
8. Press the tab that you want to select next, and  
search as described in steps 3–7.  
If you press the Cancel button, this selection will be  
discarded, and you will return to the program that had  
been selected prior to opening the menu.  
Press the OK button to confirm your selection, or press  
the Cancel button to discard it. You will return to the  
main category.  
5. When you are satisfied with the selected program,  
press the OK button to close the menu.  
If instead you press the Cancel button, your selection  
will be discarded, and you will return to the program  
that had been selected when you opened the popup  
menu.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playing and editing Programs  
Program information  
In the Prog P0: Play– Main page you can view the  
following information about the selected program.  
OSC Picture: This is a graphic that represents the  
programs oscillator.  
Using Controllers  
In addition to using the keyboard, the KROME lets you  
control the sound by using the joystick, SW1 and SW2  
buttons, knobs 1–4, damper pedal, and foot switch or  
foot pedal.  
These controls let you modify the tone, pitch, volume,  
effects, etc. in realtime as you play.  
OSC Oct: For a double oscillator or double drums, this  
indicates “Oct” (the basic pitch of the oscillator).  
SW1, SW2: This indicates the function thats assigned  
to the SW1/SW2 buttons, and the on/off state of the  
buttons.  
Realtime Controls – TONE CONTROLS/USER  
CONTROLS/ARP CONTROLS:  
[SW1], [SW2]  
(Lock  
function)  
This shows information about the functions of the  
REALTIME CONTROLS knob thats currently selected.  
Use the SELECT button to choose the functions that  
will be controlled by the knobs. For more information  
about these functions, please see page 28.  
Joystick  
EQ (Low, Mid[Hz], Mid, High): This shows the 3band  
EQ settings. You can use the value controllers to edit  
the values.  
Joystick  
The joystick moves in four directions: left, right, up  
(away from yourself), and down (towards yourself).  
Each of the four directions can be used to control a  
different function, such as modulating Program or  
effects parameters. These assignments can be different  
for every Program, but generally, they do the following:  
Effect Controls– IFX, MFX, TFX:  
This shows the effects that are assigned. The KROME  
provides insert effects 1–5, master effects 1 and 2, and a  
total effect. For the master effects, you can edit the  
return levels.  
Velocity Meter:  
Standard Joystick functions  
This meter shows the noteon velocity value.  
Controller  
Move the joystick…  
Left  
Normally controls…  
The meter shows the noteon velocity of the keyboard,  
MIDI IN, and arpeggiator etc. (If multiple noteon  
messages are received simultaneously, the highest  
velocity value is shown.)  
Name  
JS–X  
JS+X  
JS+Y  
JS–Y  
Pitch bend down  
Pitch bend up  
Vibrato  
Right  
Up (away from yourself)  
Down (towards yourself)  
Filter LFO (wah)  
Realtime Controls  
- Tone Controls  
- User Controls  
- Arp Controls  
For details, please see page 82.  
OSC  
Picture  
Effect Infomation  
IFX 1-5  
Joystick Lock  
This function lets you maintain the effect that had been  
applied prior to releasing your hand from the joystick.  
OSC Oct  
MFX 1, 2,  
Send level  
(On/O)  
TFX (On/O)  
SW1,  
SW2  
You can use the SW1/SW2 buttons or a foot switch  
connected to the KROME to lock the current position  
so that the effect will continue even after the joystick  
returns to the center position. For details, please see  
Velocity Meter EQ  
SW1, SW2  
You can use these buttons to control program  
parameters via AMS (Alternate Modulation), or effect  
parameters via Dmod (Dynamic Modulation).  
They can also transpose the keyboard by octaves, turn  
portamento on/off, or to lock the position joystick.  
Each button can work as either a Toggle or Momentary  
button. In Toggle mode, the assigned function is  
switched between on and off each time the button is  
pressed. In Momentary mode, the assigned function is  
active on only as long as you hold down the button.  
In Program mode, you can check the assignments of  
SW1 and SW2 on the Prog P0: Play– Main page.  
For details, please see “Program information” on  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Playing Programs Using Controllers  
When you write a Program or Combination, the on/off  
status of the SW1 and SW2 buttons is saved.  
1. Press the SELECT button to select the realtime  
control function between TONE, USER, or ARP.  
For details, please see page 82.  
TONE, USER: Use the knobs to modify the sound or  
effects (see page 28).  
ARP: Use the knobs to control the arpeggiator (see  
Locking the Joystick  
page 86).  
1. Using the standard factory sounds, select Program  
C027: Semi Distortion Guitar.  
You can freely switch between these functions without  
losing your current edits.  
2. Use knobs 1–4 to control the selected functions.  
When you turn one of these knobs, that knobs function  
and value will appear in a popup.  
(You can prevent this popup from appearing. See  
To select a program, make sure that you are in Program  
mode, and press the PROG BANK C button, numeric  
key 2, 7, and then the ENTER button.  
2. While holding down a key, move the joystick in  
the –Y direction (toward yourself).  
The tremolo effect will deepen.  
3. While keeping the joystick in the –Y direction  
(toward yourself), press the SW2 button. (The SW2  
button LED will light up.)  
There will be a slight amount of play when turning  
the knob near its minimum or maximum positions.  
When you press the button, its LED will light up, and  
the modulation effect at this point will be maintained.  
4. Release the joystick, and play the keyboard.  
The modulation will stay the same as it was when SW2  
was pressed. Even if you move the joystick toward  
yourself, the sound will not change.  
TEMPO knob and TAP button  
This adjusts the tempo for the KROME as a whole,  
including:  
• Arpeggiator  
• Drum Track  
5. Press the SW2 button once again to release the  
Lock function.  
• Songs in Sequencer mode  
• Temposynced LFOs  
• Temposynced (“BPM”) delay effects  
Keyboard  
TEMPO LED  
The KROMEs keyboard provides the following two  
types of control.  
The LED will blink at quarternote intervals of the  
current tempo.  
TEMPO knob  
This knob adjusts the tempo. Its a convenient way to  
make continuous adjustments.  
Note: If the Global P1: MIDI– MIDI Basic page MIDI  
Clock parameter is set to External MIDI, External USB,  
or if it is set to Auto and a clock is currently being  
received via MIDI, then neither the TEMPO knob nor  
the TAP button will have any effect.  
Velocity  
Velocity is a measure of how hard you play a note on  
the keyboard. This can be used to modulate many  
different aspects of the sound, such as volume,  
brightness, or the character of the attack.  
Note Number  
Sounds can be programmed to change in character  
based on the note being played.  
TAP button  
You can set the tempo of the Arpeggiator or Drum  
Track function in Program, Combination, and  
Sequencer modes by lightly pressing or tapping the  
TAP button several times on the beat. In Sequencer  
mode, you can control the song tempo in this way.  
As you play higher or lower on the keyboard, the note  
number can modulate the timbre such as becoming  
brighter as you play higher notes. Envelopes may also  
become faster or slower; the volume may change; and  
so on.  
To enter the tempo, use your finger to gently tap the  
TAP button. The tempo will be entered when you press  
the button twice, but you should tap several times in  
order to increase the precision. The average of the last  
sixteen taps will be specified as the tempo.  
Realtime control knobs  
The realtime controls consist of four knobs and the  
SELECT button. These controls function as follows.  
During playback, lightly press the TAP button several  
times at the desired tempo. The tempo will follow your  
tapping in realtime. This is a convenient way to match  
the tempo in realtime to the beat of a different source.  
• You can apply modulation to sounds or edit them.  
• You can control the arpeggiator.  
You can use tap tempo control whenever the  
TEMPO knob can be used. For example in  
Sequencer mode, tap tempo control will not be  
available if you are playing a song where the  
Tempo Mode setting is set to Auto. (See page 110  
of the Parameter Guide)  
Note: You can also use a foot switch connected to the  
ASSIGNABLE FOOT SWITCH jack to control the tap  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Playing and editing Programs  
tempo function (see page 18, and pages 202, 349 of the  
Parameter Guide).  
Performing with the  
arpeggiator or drum track  
Damper pedal / Foot switch / Foot  
pedal  
For details on using the damper pedal, foot switch, or  
pedal to control the sound, please see “Connecting a  
Based on note data that it receives from the keyboard  
or from the MIDI IN connector, the arpeggiator can  
generate a wide range of phrases and patterns  
including arpeggios, guitar or keyboard backing riffs,  
bass phrases, or drum patterns. By setting SELECT to  
ARP and using the knobs, you can vary the duration  
and strength of the arpeggiated notes.  
For more about the arpeggiator, please see page 85.  
The drum track uses a rich variety of drum patterns to  
play the KROMEs highquality drum programs. You  
can select any program and play along with the drum  
patterns.  
Of course you can also synchronize the arpeggiator  
and the drum track patterns and use them together.  
For more about the drum track, please see page 97.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Easy Program editing Adjusting the EQ  
Easy Program editing  
The fastest way to create the sound you need is to start  
from a preload program thats close to what you have  
in mind, and edit that program.  
Simple editing can be done within the various pages of  
P0: Play where you perform. You can adjust the EQ  
and volume level, and in the Tone Adjust page you can  
use the sliders and buttons to perform various useful  
edits. You can also use the front panel realtime controls  
to intuitively adjust the cutoff, resonance, and release  
time.  
Adjusting the volume balance  
A programs sound consists of up to two “oscillators”  
which are played mainly from the keyboard, and one  
“drum track” which automatically plays the rhythm  
section.  
The volumes of the oscillators and the drum track can  
be adjusted in the Prog P0: PlayMixer & Drum Track  
page.  
Note: Theres also a “mute function” which  
individually silences these, and a “solo function”  
which mutes all sounds other than the specified one.  
If you want to do detailed editing, use the editing  
pages P1 and following.  
1. Access the Prog P0: Play– Mixer & Drum Track  
page.  
Adjusting the EQ  
OSC Play/Mute Drum Track Play/Mute  
Menu  
You can adjust a midsweepable threeband EQ in the  
Prog P0: Play– Main page.  
Note: This EQ will affect both oscillator 1 and oscillator  
2.  
1. Access the Prog P0: Play– Main page.  
2. On the display, select the EQ gain knob or the  
center frequency of the Mid sweep EQ that you  
want to edit.  
3. Use the VALUE controllers (e.g., VALUE dial) to  
edit the value.  
You can also edit the value by dragging left or right on  
a knob or edit cell in the display.  
Volume  
2. Select a slider in the display, and use the VALUE  
dial etc. to adjust the volume of oscillators 1 and 2  
and the drum track.  
For oscillators that use two drum kits, you can use the  
OSC1 and OSC2 sliders to adjust the direct sound of  
the closemiced drum kit and the ambient sound of the  
drum kit captured with more space.  
Note: With singleoscillator programs, you won’t be  
able to control oscillator 2.  
3. You can press the Play/Mute button in the display  
to toggle the Play/Mute status of oscillators 1 and 2  
and the drum track.  
EQ  
4. You can press the Solo button in the display to  
toggle the Solo On/Off status of oscillators 1 and 2  
and the drum track.  
The function of the Solo button will switch each time  
you select “Exclusive Solo” in the menu (see page 64 of  
the Parameter Guide).  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Playing and editing Programs  
Knob 3: EG INT  
Using realtime controls to edit  
the sound or effects  
You can use the realtime controls (the SELECT button  
and knobs 1–4) to modify the sound and control the  
arpeggiator.  
1. Press the REALTIME CONTROLS SELECT button  
to switch the realtime control function between  
TONE, USER, or ARP.  
Each time you press the button, you’ll cycle through A,  
B, and C modes, and the corresponding LED will light  
up.  
This adjusts the filter EG intensity (the depth of how  
the EG affects the filter).  
Using the knob will change the amount of how the  
filter is affected by the EG. Normally, turning the knob  
toward the left will make the filter EG shallower, and  
turning the knob toward the right will make it deeper.  
Since the filter EG operates relative to the filter cutoff  
frequency, both knobs 1 and 3 will control the tonal  
change produced by the filter.  
Level  
Note: If CC#70–79 are assigned to REALTIME  
CONTROLS A mode and B mode, the sound that you  
edit using knobs 1–4 will be saved when you write the  
program. Arpeggiator settings you adjust in C mode  
will also be saved.  
Time  
2. Modify the sound by turning the knob that you  
want to control. See below for details.  
Knob 4: RELEASE  
This adjusts the filter and amp EG release time,  
changing the time from noteoff until the sound is no  
longer heard.  
Turning the knob will change the release time of the  
filter EG and the amp EG. Normally, turning the knob  
toward the left will shorten the release time, and  
turning the knob toward the right will lengthen it.  
TONE controls  
In TONE section you can turn knobs 1–4 to control or  
edit the following items.  
Note: When a knob is in the center position  
(12 o’clock), the parameter will have the value  
specified by the program.  
Attack Level  
Break Level  
note-on  
Level  
note-off  
Knob 1: CUTOFF  
This adjusts the filters cutoff frequency. Adjusting the  
cutoff frequency will modify the brightness of the  
sound.  
Release Level  
Sustain Level  
Level  
Time  
Release  
time  
Slope Time  
Decay Time  
Attack Time  
Sutart Level  
Example:  
Frequency  
High  
Low  
1. Select program “Category: KEYBOARD A066:  
Dark R&B Piano.  
Cut off  
frequency  
This is an electric piano sound. Lets try modifying the  
sound a little.  
Knob 2: RESONANCE  
2. Press the REALTIME CONTROLS SELECT button  
This adjusts the filters resonance level.  
to select TONE (the LED will lightup).  
Adjusting the filter resonance level will boost the  
sound in the region of the frequency, giving a  
distinctive character to the sound.  
3. While you play, slowly turn knob 1 (filter  
frequency) about 3/4 toward the right.  
The piano sound will become more like a synth sweep.  
4. Next, turn knob 2 (filter resonance) about 3/4  
toward the right as well.  
5. Leave knob 2 in its position, and try turning knob  
1 to the left and right.  
Raising the resonance will change the sound as though  
you were playing through a wah pedal.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Easy Program editing Using Tone Adjust  
USER controls  
Using Tone Adjust  
The Tone Adjust function lets you edit the parameters  
of the program. The program parameters that are most  
effective for editing will be assigned to the controllers  
in the display.  
In the USER section you can turn knobs 1–4 to control  
various aspects of the sound such as volume,  
portamento time,  
pan, filter and amp EG, pitch LFO, and master effect  
send level.  
In USER, the most useful functions are assigned  
individually for each preload program.  
The table below shows the standard assignments of the  
Realtime Controls knobs:  
1. Access the Prog P0: Play– Tone Adjust page.  
This page shows and reflects data generated by the  
tone adjust function, letting you view the parameter  
assignments and their precise values.  
Knob  
TONE1  
TONE2  
TONE3  
TONE4  
MIDI CC  
74  
Normally controls…  
Filter Cutoff Frequency  
2. To edit the sound, select a slider (1–8) or button (1–  
8) in the display, and use the VALUE dial etc. to  
use it. (You can edit the value of a slider by  
dragging it in the display.)  
71  
Filter Resonance  
Filter EG Intensity  
EG Release Time  
79  
72  
Note: You can assign the principal program  
parameters to the various controllers in the display. For  
details, please see page 7 of the Parameter Guide.  
USER1, 2 Varies for each Program  
USER3  
USER4  
Often Chorus Depth - but can vary per Program  
Often Reverb Depth - but can vary per Program  
For example:  
1. Select Program A069, “Deluxe E.Piano.”  
2. Access the P0: Play– Tone Adjust page.  
For details, please see page 16 of the Parameter Guide.  
3. Look at the assignments for sliders 5, 6, and 8 in  
the display.  
Slider 5 is assigned to F/A EG Attack Time; slider 6 is  
assigned to F/A EG Decay Time; and slider 8 is  
assigned to F/A EG Release Time.  
ARP controls  
In the ARP section you can control the arpeggiator in  
realtime.  
For details on functionality, please see page 86.  
4. Raise each of the three sliders so that they are  
about 4/5 of the way to the top.  
The display should show their values as between +60  
and +70. This means that you have edited the filter EG  
and amp EG attack, delay, and release to longer values.  
Saving the edits you made by moving the  
knobs  
The realtime control knobs are an ideal way to modify  
the sound while you perform. As needed, press the  
front panel WRITE button to Write the Program into  
memory and save the sound you’ve edited. (See  
5. Play a few notes.  
Notice that the sound has changed from an electric  
piano into a soft pad. Next, lets add just a bit of filter  
modulation, to make the sound more rich.  
However for Realtime Controls USER knobs 1–4,  
the edited settings can be saved only if you’ve  
assigned CC#70–79.  
6. Notice the assignment of slider 2 in the display.  
Slider 2 is assigned to “[OSC1] Filter LFO1 Int A”  
(OSC1 filter LFO1 intensity). It will adjust the amount  
of filter modulation produced by LFO1.  
7. Lower slider 2 slightly so that the display indicates  
about –6.  
8. Play a few more notes.  
The filter modulation has added some shimmer to the  
sound. Now, maybe it could use a bit more edge…  
Internally, a single knob usually affects several  
different parameters. When you write a Program, the  
edits are saved into the individual program  
parameters, and not to the knob itself.  
After writing the Program, you’ll notice that the knobs  
have returned to their center positions–since the old  
“edited” values are now the new “saved” values.  
Assigning Realtime Controls USER functions  
to knobs 1–4  
9. Look at the assignments for switches 6 and 7 in the  
display.  
You can assign the functions that knobs 1–4 will  
perform when Realtime Controls USER is selected.  
(See page 41)  
These are programmed to raise the Filter Cutoff and  
Filter Resonance, respectively. Switches are just on/off,  
but you can set a specific value for the On position;  
notice the +10 and +40 in the switchs value boxes.  
10. Press each of the two switch buttons.  
The sound now has a more interesting character, due  
to the filters. Since its brighter, we’ve also restored  
some of the electric piano character.  
Pretty easy, huh? Note: depending on the parameter,  
you may occasionally hear glitches in the sound as you  
move the control.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Playing and editing Programs  
Changing parameter assignments  
Comparing the unedited  
sound  
The factory Programs include default assignments of  
Tone Adjust parameters to the sliders, and buttons in  
the display. If you like, you can change any of the  
assignments. To do so:  
Using COMPARE  
1. Access the Prog P0: Play– Tone Adjust page.  
When you’re in the process of editing a sound,  
pressing the COMPARE button will recall the last  
saved version of the sound, as it was before you started  
editing.  
2. Press the popup button located to the left of the  
assigned parameter.  
A popup window will appear, with a long menu of  
parameters. You can tell various things about the  
selections, just from the way they appear in the menu:  
Parameters which affect only OSC1 or OSC2 are  
prefixed with [OSC1] and [OSC2], respectively.  
Parameters which affect both Oscillators, but which are  
specific to Programs, are prefixed with [OSC1&2].  
The other group of parameters at the beginning of the  
list, are “Common.” That is, you can use them with  
most Programs.  
Parameters can only be assigned to one Tone Adjust  
control at a time. If a parameter is already assigned, its  
grayed out.  
Saving your edits  
After you’ve edited a program, you must save it if you  
want to keep the changes you’ve made. If you reselect  
the program or turn off the power after editing, your  
edits will be lost.  
1. Press the WRITE button.  
The Write Program dialog box will appear. If you want  
to modify the writingdestination or name, you can do  
so (see page 117).  
2. Press the WRITE button once again to save (write)  
the program.  
3. Select a parameter from the menu.  
The parameter is now assigned to the control. To close  
the list without making any changes, press a location  
in the display outside the popup window, or press the  
EXIT button.  
For details, please see “Writing a Program or  
You can also save programs on an SD card as PCG files.  
For details, please see “Saving to SD card (Media–  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Detailed Editing with Programs Before you start editing  
Detailed Editing with Programs  
You can create original sounds by editing a preloaded  
program or by editing an initialized program. The  
programs you create can be saved in banks A–F.  
OSC (oscillator) 1/2  
The OSC (oscillator) generates the waveform that is the  
basis of the sound. On the KROME, the oscillator  
consists of multiple sampled sounds such as a  
multisample or a drum kit (drumsamples).  
The KROME provides two oscillators; OSC1 and  
OSC2. You can create more complex programs by  
combining these.  
Before you start editing  
The three elements of sound: pitch,  
tone, and volume  
The OSC, which is the basis of the sound, can be  
controlled by modulating its pitch, filter, amp, EG, and  
LFO to change the sound in a wide range of ways.  
Sound is made up of three basic elements: pitch, tone,  
and volume.  
Note: Pitch EG is shared by OSC1 and OSC2.  
The KROME provides “pitch,” “filter,” and “amp  
(amplifier)” sections that allow you to control these  
elements.  
The “pitch” section modifies the pitch, the “filter”  
section modifies the tone, and the “amp” section  
modifies the volume.  
You’ll edit “pitch” settings in P2: OSC/Pitch (P23) and  
OSC2 Pitch, “filter” settings in P3: Filter (P31–3), and  
“amp” settings in P4: Amp/EQ (P41–2).  
Effects  
As effects, you can use five insert effects, two master  
effects, and one total effect.  
The output of OSC 1/2 is sent to these effect processors.  
By choosing the desired effect for each processor and  
editing its parameters, you can apply a wide range of  
effects such as modulation, distortion, and  
reverberation.  
EG, LFO, AMS, and controllers  
Arpeggiator  
In addition to the three elements listed above, a sound  
can vary according to the passage of time, the pitch  
range in which its played, or by performance  
expressions.  
A program can use one arpeggiator. You can select an  
arpeggio pattern, specify the range that the pattern will  
be developed within, and specify the range of notes or  
velocities that will trigger the arpeggiator.  
Such aspects can be controlled by modulators and  
controllers such as the EG (envelope generator), LFO  
(low frequency oscillator), and joystick. These  
modulators and controllers apply change to the basic  
program.  
Take a look at the illustration “Program structure”  
Notice that the signal flow is in the order of Oscillator/  
Pitch, Filter, Amp. You can see how the EGs and LFOs  
affect each section.  
As shown in the illustration, each program consists of  
sections such as OSC 1/2, effects, and the arpeggiator.  
Program structure  
Program Basic/Controllers: P1  
Common LFO: P5–10  
Controllers: P1–3  
Arpeggio: P7–1, 2  
DrumTrk Pattern: P7–4, 5  
Tone Adjust: P0–7  
OSC1 LFO1: P5–1  
OSC1 LFO2: P5–2  
Master  
Effect  
1, 2: P9  
Routing: P8–1  
OSC1, 2  
OSC1 Setup: P2–1,  
OSC1 Velocity: P2–2  
Total  
Effect  
: P9  
Insert  
Effect  
Filter1(A/B): P3–1  
Amp1/Driver1: P4–1  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
L/MONO, R  
3Band EQ  
: P4–10  
1…5: P8  
OSC1 Pitch: P2–3  
Amp1 Mod: P4–2  
Filter Key Track: P3–2  
Filter1 Mod: P3–3  
Filter1 LFO Mod: P3–4  
Insert Effects  
Master Effects  
Filter1 EG: P3–10  
OSC1 AMS Mix: P6–1/2  
Common KeyTrack: P6–9/10  
Amp1 EG: P4–3  
FX Control Bus  
OSC 1  
OSC 2  
Pitch EG : P2–10  
Filter  
Effects  
OSC / Pitch  
Amplifier  
EQ  
P1–1, P2–2, etc. indicate the on-screen pages and tabs used when editing on the KROME.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playing and editing Programs  
An overview of the edit pages  
In order to do detailed editing, you’ll need to access the  
edit pages in the display.  
The preceding section “Easy Program editing” on  
page 27 explained how to use the Prog P0: Play page to  
do simple editing. For more detailed editing, you’ll use  
the P1 and following edit pages.  
Basic oscillator settings  
Here you can specify the type of program, select the  
basic waveform (multisample or drum kit), and specify  
whether it will play polyphonically or monophonically  
(poly/mono).  
Program type setting (single, double,  
drum kit)  
Page  
Main content  
Here you can specify the program type.  
Select and play programs. (see  
Broadly speaking the program type will be either “a  
program that uses a multisample” or “a program that  
uses a drum kit” (see “Multisamples and Drum Kits”  
This choice is made by the Prog P1: Basic/Controllers–  
Program Basic “Oscillator Mode” setting, which  
specifies which type the oscillators will use. Up to two  
can be used simultaneously for each type.  
Oscillator and Drum track level  
Simple drum track editing. (see  
P0: Play  
Simple arpeggiator editing. (see  
Tone Adjust settings. (see page 29)  
Basic program settings, such as  
Oscillator mode. (see page 32)  
SW1, 2, and knob settings. (see  
• Multisample: Single, Double  
• Drum kit: Drums, Double Drums  
P1: Basic/  
Controllers  
Oscillator selection and pitch settings.  
P2: OSC/Pitch  
P3: Filter  
Filter 1, 2 (tone) settings. (see page 38)  
Amp 1, 2 (volume) settings. (see  
Amp 1, 2 driver and pan settings.  
3-band parametric EQ settings.  
P4: Amp/EQ  
P5: LFO  
LFO settings. (see page 35)  
P6: AMS/Common AMS Mixer settings. (see page 36)  
KeyTrack  
Common keyboard tracking settings.  
P7: Arpeggiator/  
Drum Track  
Arpeggiator settings. (see page 88)  
Drum track settings. (see page 100)  
Single (single program) uses one oscillator, and  
Oscillator output bus and master effect  
send level settings. (see page 79)  
Insert effect routing, selection, and  
Double (double program) uses two oscillators.  
P8: Routing/IFX  
Drums (drum program) is similar to a single program,  
but uses a drum kit (created in Global mode) instead of  
a multisample. Double Drums (double drum  
program) uses two drum kits. By using an ambience‐  
type kit as the second drum kit, you can give a wider  
sense of space to the sound.  
Master effect routing, selection, and  
Total effect selection and settings. (see  
P9: MFX/TFX/LFO  
For details on how to access each mode and page,  
Polyphony  
Polyphony is the number of notes that can be played  
simultaneously, such as in a chord. The polyphony  
depends on the program type.  
Program type  
Single  
Polyphony  
120  
60  
Double  
Drums  
120  
60  
Double Drums  
Note:  
• Double Programs and Double Drums use twice as  
many voices as Single Programs.  
• Stereo Multisamples use twice as many voices as  
Mono Multisamples.  
• If using velocity crossfade switching, the  
multisample will use twice as many voices as usual.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Detailed Editing with Programs Basic oscillator settings  
for each string, so that the multisample would  
consist of six samples.  
Oscillator image setting  
• As the name suggests, Drum Kits are optimized for  
playing drumsamples.  
You can specify the program oscillator image thats  
shown in the P0: Play– Main page. Adjust this setting  
in Prog P1: Basic/Controllers– Program Basic Oscillator  
Mode “OSC Picture 1” and “2.”  
Velocity splits, crossfades, and layers  
1. Press the “OSC Picture 1” or “2” popup button (>)  
or the image icon shown at right; the dialog box  
will appear.  
Each oscillator provides eight velocity zones. This lets  
you switch between multisamples or drumsamples  
according to the velocity (speed) at which you play a  
key.  
By specifying the threshold (boundary value) where  
each zone will respond, and the amount of crossfading  
(the overlap between zones), you can specify how your  
keyboard playing dynamics will switch or layer the  
multisamples or drumsamples. You can use this to  
make the following types of setups.  
• Velocity splits, where multisamples (or  
drumsamples) are cleanly switched at the threshold  
• Velocity crossfades, where multisamples (or  
drumsamples) are smoothly crossfaded over a  
specified range outside the threshold  
• Velocity layers, where two multisamples (or  
drumsamples) are layered when you play a  
specified range outside the threshold  
2. To select an image, press an image in the list in the  
lower part of the screen, or at the left or right in the  
upper part.  
3. Press the OK button to confirm your choice.  
Note: If “Oscillator Mode” is set to Drums or Double  
Drums, the velocity settings prespecified for the drum  
kit will be used, and therefore will not be shown in the  
screen. The velocity zone settings of a drum kit can be  
edited in Global P5: Drum Kit (see page 105). You can  
jump automatically to Global P5 by pressing the Jump  
to DrumKit Edit button shown on the screen.  
Polyphonic/monophonic playing  
The Voice Assign Mode selects whether the Program  
will play polyphonically (Poly) or monophonically  
(Mono).  
When this is set to Poly, you can play both chords and  
melody lines. When this is set to Mono, only one note  
will sound even if you play a chord.  
Normally you’ll set this to Poly, but Mono is useful  
when playing sounds such as synth basses, synth  
leads, and other solo instruments.  
Selecting Multisamples  
Lets create a simple velocity crossfade between two  
Multisamples, using just OSC1.  
1. Access the Prog P2: OSC/Pitch– OSC1 Setup page.  
Try switching between Poly and Mono, and listen to  
the results.  
2. Set the Multisample On/Off for multisample1 and  
multisample2 to On.  
Set the Multisample On/Off for multisample3 and  
multisample4 to Off.  
Working with Multisamples  
What is a multisample?  
A sample is a digital recording of a particular  
instrument or waveform (or other natural or artificially  
processed sound) recorded at a specific pitch. A  
multisample is a collection of similarly voiced samples,  
used to create the same type of sound piano, bass,  
guitar, strings, organ across the entire keyboard, as  
the basis of a program. The oscillators of single and  
double programs use multisamples. There are 583  
multisamples available in this instrument.  
Bank  
Slider  
Multi-  
sample  
On/Off  
You can assign up to four multisamples to each  
oscillator and switch between them by velocity.  
By dragging the slider to the left, you can select each  
multisample and view its settings.  
3. Select Stereo as the Multisample Bank for  
multisample1 and multisample2.  
There are two main types of Multisample Banks:  
Mono, and Stereo. Note that stereo Multisamples will  
require twice as many voices as mono Multisamples.  
Multisamples and Drum Kits  
Multisamples and Drum Kits allow you to play  
samples in different ways.  
• Multisamples lay out one or more samples across  
the keyboard. If we use the example of a simple  
guitar multisample, one sample could be assigned  
Multisamples are organized by category such as piano,  
guitar, bell, etc.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Playing and editing Programs  
4. Press the Multisample popup button for  
multisample1.  
Assigning a drum kit  
What is a drum kit?  
Drum kits are created or edited in Global mode. For  
each note of the keyboard, you can assign up to eight  
drum instrument samples, and use layering,  
Multisample popup button  
crossfading, or velocity switching to switch between  
them. Then, in Program mode, you can adjust filter  
and amp settings, and specify effects and routing to the  
audio output jacks. (See page 105)  
To use a drum kit in a Program, set Oscillator Mode to  
Drums or Double Drums, and choose one of the 48  
user drum kits or the nine GM2 drum kits.  
This brings up a list of Multisamples, organized by  
category. Use the tabs on the left of the display to  
browse through the different categories.  
5. Select a Multisample by touching its name in the  
list. You can also use Find to search for a  
Multisample.  
6. Press the OK button to confirm your selection.  
7. Perform the same steps for multisample2,  
selecting a different Multisample than for  
multisample1.  
Now that you’ve assigned Multisamples to  
multisample1 and multisample2, lets set up the  
velocity ranges and crossfades.  
Selecting a drum kit  
1. Access the Prog P1: Basic/Controllers– Program  
Basic page.  
2. Set “Oscillator Mode” to Drums or Double  
Drums.  
Multisamples have now been assigned to multisample  
1 and 2.  
8. Specify the velocity range and crossfade range.  
Press the Velocity tab to access the OSC1 Velocity page.  
Set the multisample 2 “Threshold Velocity” to 001, and  
turn “Crossfade” Off.  
3. Select a drum kit in the Prog P2: OSC/Pitch– OSC1  
Setup page.  
9. Set the multisample 1 “Threshold Velocity” to 80.  
You can also set “Threshold Velocity” by dragging the  
bottom edge of the line graph.  
With these settings, Multisample2 will sound for notes  
played with a velocity of 79 or less, and Multisample1  
will sound for notes played with a velocity of 80 or  
greater.  
The Velocity Split meter shows the oscillators eight  
multisamples and the velocity zones of each oscillator.  
The meter on the left shows the noteon velocity. This  
lets you see which multisample and oscillator will  
sound for that specific velocity.  
10. Set the multisample 1 “Crossfade” to 20, and its  
“Curve” to Linear.  
4. Specify the basic pitch of the oscillator. For a drum  
kit, set “Octave” to +0 [8ʹ].  
The state of this split is shown visually in the screen.  
The two multisamples will fade across the range from  
80 to 100, with multisample 2 fadingout while  
multisample 1 fadesin. This produces a smooth  
change without any sudden switch.  
11. As necessary, use the Prog P2: OSC/Pitch– OSC1  
Setup page to adjust the “Level” of the two  
multisamples.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Detailed Editing with Programs Creating time-varying changes (LFO and EG)  
4. Select the Shape parameter, and use the VALUE  
dial to move through its different settings, from  
–99 to +99.  
Notice how the shape of the waveform becomes more  
curved, and how –99 emphasizes the lower part of the  
shape, and +99 emphasizes the upper part.  
Creating time-varying  
changes (LFO and EG)  
Using LFOs  
You can use the cyclic change produced by the LFO  
(Low Frequency Oscillator) to modulate numerous  
aspects of the sound.  
Each Program has two LFOs: LFO1 and LFO2. There is  
also a single Common LFO, shared by both Oscillators.  
While LFO1 and LFO2 are separate for each voice, the  
Common LFO is shared by all voices in the Program.  
This makes it useful when you want all of the voices to  
have an identical LFO effect.  
You can use these LFOs to modulate many different  
Program parameters, including:  
• Pitch (for vibrato)  
• Filters (for wah effects)  
• Volume (for tremolo)  
• Pan (for autopanning)  
The LFOs can modulate many other parameters, in  
addition to those listed above.  
5. Select the Phase parameter, and use the VALUE  
dial to sweep through its range of values.  
Notice how the waveform shifts from side to side.  
Among other things, this lets you offset the LFOs from  
one another in time, which can create interesting  
organic effects.  
6. Use the Freq (Frequency) parameter to set the  
speed of the LFO.  
7. Use the Fade and Delay settings to control the way  
the LFO sounds at the beginning of the note.  
For more information on LFOs, please see page 42 of  
the Parameter Guide.  
All of these parameters control the way that the LFO  
works. In order for the LFO to actually affect the  
sound, you can use the dedicated LFO routings on the  
Filter, Pitch, and Amp pages, or use the LFOs as AMS  
sources for a wide variety of parameters.  
Using EGs (Envelope Generators)  
Using the basic LFO  
1. Access the Prog P5: LFO– OSC1 LFO1 page.  
An envelope creates a modulation signal by moving  
from one level to another over a specified time, and  
then moving to another level over another period of  
time, and so on.  
Waveform  
The Program includes three EGs, for Pitch, Filter, and  
Amp. These produce timevarying changes in pitch,  
tone, and volume respectively. They can also be used to  
modulate a number of other program parameters via  
AMS.  
Attack Level  
note-on  
note-off  
Break Level  
Level  
Release  
Level  
Sustain Level  
2. Select the Waveform parameter.  
Time  
Release Time  
Use the INC and DEC buttons to scroll through the  
different waveforms, and look at their shapes in the  
graphic display.  
Decay Time  
Attack Time  
Slope Time  
Sutart Level  
There are a number of waveforms to choose from. Each  
are suited to different applications:  
Triangle and Sine are the classic LFO shapes for  
vibrato, tremolo, panning, and filter wah effects.  
Note: The parameters that can be modulated by an EG  
and the range of values will differ depending on the  
EGs provided for each section.  
Square is useful for gated on and off filter and amp  
effects, and can create trills when modulating pitch.  
The Guitar waveform is designed especially for guitar  
vibrato; it bends only upwards from the base value.  
Saw and Exponential Saw Down are good for  
rhythmic filter and amp effects.  
Random 1 (S/H) creates the classic sampleandhold  
effect, which is great for modulating a resonant filter.  
3. After looking at the different waveforms, select  
Triangle.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playing and editing Programs  
output signal can be used to modulate a variety of  
parameters.  
Diverse modulation settings  
(AMS and AMS mixer)  
This also means that the original, unmodified inputs to  
the AMS Mixers are still available as well. For instance,  
if you use LFO 1 as an input to an AMS Mixer, you can  
use the processed version of the LFO to control one  
AMS destination, and the original version to control  
another.  
Finally, you can cascade the two AMS Mixers together,  
by using AMS Mixer 1 as an input to AMS Mixer 2.  
For details, please see “6–1: OSC1 AMS Mix1” on  
page 46 of the Parameter Guide.  
Using AMS  
AMS (Alternate Modulation Source) lets you modulate  
program parameters using controllers, EG, or LFO as  
the modulation source. Extremely creative types of  
modulation are possible; for example, you can use a  
single controller to simultaneously modulate multiple  
parameters, or you can use an EG to modulate an  
LFOs frequency and then use that LFO to modulate a  
filter.  
Tips for using AMS  
AMS (Alternate Modulation Source) refers to any of  
the assignable modulation sources in KROME,  
including:  
• Controllers of the KROME itself, such as the  
joystick, SW 1/2, and the realtime knobs  
When making settings for alternate modulation, think  
of the effect that you wish to produce, what type of  
modulation will be necessary to produce that effect,  
and what parameter of the oscillator, filter, or amplifier  
needs to be controlled.  
• Incoming MIDI controllers  
• Modulators such as the Filter, Pitch, and Amp EGs,  
the LFOs, or the AMS Mixers  
Next, select a source (AMS) and set the Intensity. If  
you proceed logically in this way, you will achieve the  
desired effect.  
For example in a guitar sound program where you  
want to use the joystick to control the feedback, you  
would make assignments so that the joystick controls  
the filter frequency and resonance.  
Intensity is a parameter that sets the degree (speed,  
depth, amount etc.) of how AMS will control the  
modulation.  
A number of frequentlyused modulation routings,  
such as using the joystick to vary the pitch, are  
provided as additional, dedicated routings, separate  
from AMS.  
Note that not all AMS sources may be available for  
some modulation destinations.  
For details on alternate modulation and AMS, please  
see below.  
Controller Setup page  
For each program, the function of Realtime Control  
knobs 1B–4B and the SW1 and SW2 buttons can be  
assigned in the Prog P1: Basic/Controllers– Controllers  
Setup page.  
For details, please see “Setting the functions of SW1  
• “Alternate Modulation Sources (AMS)” on page 339  
of the Parameter Guide  
• “AMS (Pan)” on page 36 of the Parameter Guide  
Using the AMS Mixers  
The AMS Mixers combine two AMS sources into one,  
or process an AMS source to make it into something  
new.  
For example, this lets you use an LFO to modulate a  
filters resonance while also modulating it by an EG.  
Although resonance has only one AMS input, using  
the AMS mixer makes this possible. You could also do  
things such as using the filter EG to control the amount  
of LFO1. The wide variety of other possibilities include  
using the joystick to control the amount of pitch EG,  
allowing the joystick to apply bend only to notes  
played while you hold down the foot switch, or  
changing the response of a realtime controller.  
The AMS Mixer outputs appear in the list of AMS  
sources, just like the LFOs and EGs. An AMS mixers  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Detailed Editing with Programs Controlling Pitch  
Portamento  
Controlling Pitch  
Portamento makes the pitch change smoothly when  
you play the next note before releasing the previous  
note.  
The Time parameter controls how long it will take the  
pitch to change. As this value is increased, the pitch  
will change over a longer time. With a value of 000,  
there will be no portamento.  
Pitch bend  
Pitch bend smoothly changes the pitch upward or  
downward, similar to how a guitarist can “bend”  
strings. On the KROME, you will normally use the  
joystick to control pitch bend in realtime.  
You can turn Portamento on and off via SW1 or SW2,  
by assigning them to Porta.SW CC#65.  
The JS (+X) and JS(–X) settings specify the amount of  
pitch change (in semitones) that will occur when MIDI  
pitch bend messages are received or when the joystick  
is moved to left or right. A setting of +12 allows the  
pitch to be controlled a maximum of one octave  
upward; a setting of –12 allows the pitch to be  
controlled a maximum of one octave downward.  
Note: You can also control pitch bend using a  
controller other than the joystick, or via MIDI.  
Ribbon (#16) specifies the amount of pitch change (in  
semitone units) that will occur when MIDI control  
change message #16 is received. With a setting of +12, a  
value of 127 will raise the pitch one octave, and a value  
of 0 will lower the pitch one octave.  
Creating Vibrato  
You can use an LFO to create vibrato.  
LFO1 Int. or LFO2 Int. sets the depth of how the  
selected LFO will affect the pitch. With a setting of  
+12.00, vibrato will produce a maximum of ±1 octave of  
pitch change.  
JS+Y Int specifies the amount of vibrato that the LFO  
will produce when the joystick is pushed away from  
you.  
Intensity (AMS Intensity) specifies the depth of  
vibrato that will be applied by the LFO when  
modulated by the selected AMS (Alternate Modulation  
Source). For example, if the panel switch assignment  
for SW1 is set to SW1 Mod. (CC#80) (Prog 1–7a), and  
you set LFO1 AMS to SW1: CC#80 and specify an  
appropriate value for Intensity, vibrato will be applied  
when you turn SW1 on or when MIDI control change  
#80 is received.  
Pitch EG  
When the Intensity value is set to +12.00, the pitch EG  
specified in the Pitch EG page will produce a  
maximum of ±1 octave of pitch change.  
To realistically simulate the slight change in pitch that  
occurs when a string is plucked or at the attack of a  
brass or vocal sound, you can use the EG to create a  
subtle change in pitch at the attack.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Playing and editing Programs  
Using Filters  
The filters allow you to diminish or emphasize  
specified frequency areas of the sound.  
The tone of the sound will depend significantly on  
the filter settings.  
The basic filter settings, including the routing, type,  
cutoff frequency, and resonance, are set on the P3–1:  
Filter page.  
Filter Routing  
Low Pass: This cuts out the parts of the sound that are  
higher than the cutoff frequency. Low Pass is the most  
common type of filter, and is used to make bright  
timbres sound darker.  
High Pass: This cuts out the parts of the sound that are  
lower than the cutoff frequency. You can use this to  
make timbres sound thinner or more buzzy.  
Each oscillator has two filters, Filter A and Filter B. The  
Filter Routing parameter controls whether one or both  
of the filters are used, and if both are used, it controls  
how they are connected to each other.  
The Single routing uses only Filter A as a single 2pole,  
12dB/octave filter (6dB for Band Pass and Band Reject).  
Band Pass: This cuts out all parts of the sound, both  
highs and lows, except for the region around the cutoff  
frequency. Since this filter cuts out both high and low  
frequencies, its effect can change dramatically  
depending on the cutoff setting and the oscillators  
multisample.  
With low resonance settings, you can use the Band  
Pass filter to create telephone or vintage phonograph  
sounds. With higher resonance settings, it can create  
buzzy or nasal timbres.  
The Serial routing uses both Filter A and Filter B. The  
oscillator first goes through Filter A, and then the  
output of Filter A is processed through Filter B.  
Parallel also uses both Filter A and Filter B. The  
oscillator feeds both filters directly (and allow  
independent settings for each), and the outputs of the  
two filters are then summed together.  
The 24dB(4Pole) routing merges both filters to create a  
single 4pole, 24dB/octave filter (12dB for Band Pass  
and Band Reject). In comparison to Single, this option  
produces a sharper rolloff of frequencies beyond the  
cutoff frequency, as well as a slightly more delicate  
resonance. Many classic analog synths used this type  
of filter.  
Band Reject: This filter type–also called a notch filter–  
cuts only the parts of the sound directly around the  
cutoff frequency. Try modulating the cutoff with an  
LFO to create phaserlike effects.  
Filter Types and Cutoff Frequency  
Serial and Parallel Routing  
Oscillator  
Filter A (Low Pass)  
Filter B (High Pass)  
Low Pass  
Filter A (Low Pass)  
High Pass  
Band Pass  
Oscillator  
Filter B (High Pass)  
Filter Types  
This selects the parts of the sound that will be affected  
by the filter, as described below. With the Serial and  
Parallel routings, you can independently set the types  
for Filter A and Filter B.  
Band Reject  
The filters will produce very different results  
depending on the selected filter type.  
Cutoff Frequency  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Detailed Editing with Programs Using Filters  
Resonance  
LFO modulation  
Resonance emphasizes the frequencies around the  
You can modulate the filter via LFO1, LFO2, and the  
Common LFO. Among other applications, LFO  
modulation of the filter can produce the classic “auto‐  
wah” effect.  
The Filter1/2– LFO Mod. page lets you set up the  
following parameters separately for each LFO:  
cutoff frequency, as shown in the diagram below.  
When this is set to 0, there is no emphasis, and  
frequencies beyond the cutoff will simply diminish  
smoothly.  
At medium settings, the resonance will alter the timbre  
of the filter, making it sound more nasal, or more  
extreme. At very high settings, the resonance can be  
heard as a separate, whistling pitch.  
To make the resonance track the keyboard pitch, please  
see “Key Follow” on page 29 of the Parameter Guide.  
Low resonance  
High resonance  
Intensity to A and Intensity to B specify how much  
the LFO changes the tone.  
JSY Intensity to A and JSY Intensity to B specify the  
depth of the wah effect produced by the LFO when the  
joystick is moved toward yourself, or when CC#2 is  
received.  
The AMS setting selects an AMS modulation source to  
scale the amount of the LFO applied to Filters A and B.  
The two filters share a single AMS source, with  
separate intensity settings.  
For example if AMS is set to SW1: CC#80, turning SW1  
on will apply an autowah effect (see page 37).  
Modulating the filters  
You can modulate the filter cutoff frequency using the  
Filter EG, the LFOs, keyboard tracking, and other  
builtin and MIDI controllers. This is a great way to  
add a rich variety of tonal change to the sound.  
Keyboard Track  
Filter EG  
Most acoustic instruments get brighter as you play  
higher pitches. At its most basic application, keyboard  
tracking recreates this effect by increasing the cutoff  
frequency of a lowpass filter as you play higher on the  
keyboard. Usually, some amount of key tracking is  
necessary in order to make the timbre consistent across  
the entire range.  
The Filter EG is a multistage envelope, which you can  
use to modulate the filter as well as other Program  
parameters. The EG itself is set up on the EG tab; the  
way that it affects the filters is controlled by the  
parameters described below, on the Filter1/2–  
Modulation page:  
The KROME keyboard tracking can also be much more  
complex, since it allows you to create different rates of  
change over up to four different parts of the keyboard.  
For instance, you can:  
• Make the filter cutoff frequency increase very  
quickly over the middle of the keyboard, and then  
open more slowly–or not at all–in the higher  
octaves.  
• Make the cutoff frequency increase as you play  
lower on the keyboard.  
• Create abrupt changes at certain keys, for splitlike  
effects.  
The Intensity to A and Intensity to B settings control  
the basic amount of EG modulation for filter  
frequencies A and B, respectively, before other  
modulation.  
The Velocity to A and Velocity to B settings let you use  
velocity to control the amount of EG modulation.  
The AMS setting selects an AMS modulation source to  
scale the amount of the Filter EG applied to Filters A  
and B. The two filters share a single AMS source, with  
separate intensity Into A or to B settings.  
How Key Track works: Keys and Ramps  
The keyboard tracking works by creating four ramps,  
or slopes, between five keys on the keyboard.  
For details, please see “How it works: Keys and  
Ramps” on page 28 of the Parameter Guide.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Playing and editing Programs  
Pan - Use DKit Setting  
Use DKit Setting applies when Oscillator Mode is set  
to Drums or Double Drums.  
If this is checked, the Program can use a different pan  
position for each drum sound, as specified by the  
Drum Kit. If this is unchecked, all drum sounds will  
use the Programs pan position.  
The factory presets and GM drum kits use individual  
pan positions for the different drums, so normally its  
best to leave this checked.  
Using the Amp section  
The Amp section includes controls for volume, pan,  
and the driver circuit.  
You can control the volume using the Amp EG, LFO 1/  
2, Key Track, and velocity, along with other AMS  
sources.  
Each Oscillator has its own Amp section: Amp1 for  
OSC1, and Amp2 for OSC2.  
Background - what does “Amp”  
mean?  
Amp modulation  
Different sounds have characteristic shapes to their  
volume levels.  
For example, the volume of a piano note begins at a  
high volume the instant you play the note, and then  
decreases gradually.  
The volume of an organ note, on the other hand,  
remains constant as long as you continue pressing the  
key.  
The volume of a note on a violin or wind instrument  
can be varied during the note by the musician (i.e., by  
regulating the amount of pressure on the bow or the  
force of the breath).  
The basic volume level is set by the Amp Level  
parameter. You can then alter this using the  
modulation sources below:  
Volume  
Piano  
Volume  
Organ  
Volume remains constant  
until note is released  
Volume decays  
gradually  
Keyboard Track  
This lets you vary the volume relative to the note you  
play.  
Time  
Time  
For details, please see “Keyboard Track” on page 39.  
Pan  
Amp Modulation  
Velocity Intensity is used by most programs to  
decrease the volume of softly played notes and  
increase the volume of strongly played notes, and the  
Amp Modulation parameter adjusts the depth of this  
control.  
Normally you will set Amp Modulation to positive (+)  
values. As this setting is increased, there will be  
greater volume difference between softly played and  
strongly played notes.  
LFO1/2  
Specifies how the LFOs will produce cyclic changes in  
volume (tremolo effect).  
The volume will be affected by the LFO(s) where you  
set an LFO1 Intensity, LFO2 Intensity value.  
Intensity (AMS Intensity) adjusts the depth of how the  
tremolo effect produced by the LFO will be affected  
when you assign an AMS (LFO1 AMS, LFO2 AMS).  
Pan  
The main Pan parameter controls the stereo position  
after the signal has passed through the oscillator, filter,  
and amp.  
Normally you’ll set this to C064, so that the sound is  
centered equally between the left and right speakers.  
For example, if you set AMS to JSY: CC #02, tremolo  
will be applied when you push the KROMEs joystick  
down (toward yourself), or when CC#02 is received.  
To create a stereo effect when Oscillator Mode is set to  
Double, set the Amp1/Driver 1 page Pan to L001, and  
the Amp2/Driver2 page Pan R127. This will make  
OSC1 go to the left speaker, and OSC2 go to the right  
speaker.  
With a setting of Random, the pan will change  
randomly each time you play a note on KROME,  
producing an interesting effect.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Detailed Editing with Programs Making controller assignments  
Amp EG  
Making controller  
assignments  
The Amp EG lets you control how the volume changes  
over the course of a note.  
Setting the functions of SW1 and SW2  
SW1 and SW2 are the two buttons above the joystick.  
These on/off buttons can perform a number of different  
functions, such as modulating sounds or effects, or  
locking the modulation values of the joystick.  
Also, each one may work either as a toggle, or as a  
momentary switch. In Toggle mode, each press  
alternates between on and off; in Momentary mode,  
the switch only changes for as long as you hold it  
down.  
Each Program, Combination, and Song stores its own  
settings for what the buttons will do, and whether each  
button is on or off (based on their current states when  
the data is saved).  
You can set up Panel Switch Assign on the Controllers  
Setup page.  
Every instrument has its own characteristic volume  
envelope. This is part of what gives each instrument its  
identifiable character.  
Conversely, by changing the volume contour–for  
instance, applying a stringlike Amp EG curve to an  
organ multisample– you can produce interesting and  
unusual sounds.  
Mode  
Page  
Piano  
Programs  
Prog P1: Basic/Controllers  
Combi P1: Controllers  
Seq P1: Controllers  
Combinations  
Songs  
Note: The on/off status of the SW1 and SW2 buttons  
will be preserved when you write the program or  
combination.  
Note: You can use SW1/2 as alternate modulation or  
effect dynamic modulation sources to control program  
parameters or effect parameters.  
Organ  
Strings  
To do so, you will normally assign SW1 Mod.(CC#80)  
and SW2 Mod.(CC#81).  
For an example of assigning the SW1 button as an  
effect dynamic modulation source for a program, and  
using it to control an effect, see page 82.  
Drive  
For a complete list of the possible assignments, see  
page 348 of the Parameter Guide.  
Note: If you want to keep these settings after the power  
is turned off, you must save them (see page 116).  
The Drive circuit adds saturation and overdrive to the  
sound, for everything from subtle fattening to drastic  
distortion. Unlike an overdrive effect, Drive processes  
each voice individually, so the timbre stays the same  
regardless of how many voices are being played.  
The two main parameters, Drive and Low Boost, work  
together to create the overall effect.  
Drive controls the amount of edge and bite in the  
timbre. Low settings will produce mild saturation, and  
higher settings create more obvious distortion.  
Often, its useful to increase the Low Boost along with  
the Drive.  
Note: even when the Drive amount is set to 0, the  
Drive circuit still affects the timbre. If your goal is a  
completely pristine sound, use the Bypass control  
instead.  
Low Boost is a special lowfrequency EQ which  
controls the body character of the sound. The specific  
EQ frequencies affected will change with the Drive  
setting.  
Higher amounts increase the bass boost, and will also  
intensify the effect of the Drive parameter.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playing and editing Programs  
Setting the functions of Realtime  
Controls USER knobs 1–4  
When the Realtime controls is set to USER, the four  
knobs on the right function as Realtime knobs 1–4.  
These can perform a number of different functions,  
such as modulating sounds or effects, adjusting effects  
send levels, and so on.  
Each Program, Combination, and Song stores its own  
settings for what the knobs will do.  
When using the sliders for AMS or Dmod, its  
important to understand that creating an assignment is  
a twostep process. First, you assign the knob to send a  
MIDI controller, such as Knob Mod.1 (CC#17). Second,  
you assign that MIDI controller to modulate one or  
more Program or effects parameters.  
For the first part of the above, use the modes  
Controllers Setup page (See “Setting the functions of  
Arpeggiator settings  
According to the note data received from the keyboard  
or from the MIDI IN connector, the arpeggiator will  
automatically generate a wide range of phrases or  
patterns including arpeggios, guitar or keyboard  
backing riffs, bass phrases, or drum patterns. When the  
realtime controls ARP is selected, you can use the  
knobs to vary the duration and dynamics of the  
arpeggiated notes.  
For more about the arpeggiator, please see page 85.  
Drum Track settings  
You can use the KROMEs rich variety of drum  
patterns to accompany you with highquality drum  
programs while you perform using a program.  
Playing along with Drum Track patterns is often a  
useful way to come up with new phrases.  
For more about the Drum Track function, please see  
The default assignments for knobs 1–4 are Knob Mod.1  
(CC#17), Knob Mod.2 (CC#19), Knob Mod.3 (CC#20),  
and Knob Mod.4 (CC#21), respectively.  
Heres an example of how to set up knob 1 to control a  
Programs filter and amp EG attack time:  
1. Press the MODE PROG button to enter Program  
mode.  
2. Access the P1: Basic/Controllers– Controllers  
Setup page.  
Effects  
For details, please see “Using Effects” on page 77.  
Press the PAGE button to access Page Select, and  
choose “P1 Basic/Controllers.” Press the Controllers  
tab.  
3. Press the Realtime Controls Knob Assign “Knob  
1–B” popup button, and choose F/A Attack  
(CC#73).  
4. Press the CONTROL ASSIGN REALTIME  
CONTROL button to select USER. (The LED  
USER will light up.)  
5. Use knob 1 to control the EG attack for the filter  
and amp.  
Automatically importing a  
Program into Sequence mode  
You can use the Auto Song Setup feature, which  
automatically copies the settings of the program or  
combination and puts the KROME in recordstandby  
mode when you simply press the REC () button.  
Then you can press the SEQUENCER START/STOP  
(
) button to begin recording.  
For details, please see Auto Song Setup function” on  
For details, please see page 348 of the Parameter  
Guide.  
Note: If you wish to keep these settings after the power  
is turned off, you must save the Program,  
Combination, or Song (see page 116).  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Playing and editing Combinations  
As with Programs, each Combination has five insert  
effects, two master effects, and one total effect for  
shaping and transforming the sounds of the individual  
Timbres.  
This section of the manual takes a quick look at playing  
Combinations, including a tour of the frontpanel  
controllers and basic editing techniques.  
About the KROME’s combinations  
Combinations let you split and layer up to 16 Programs  
at once.  
A Combination is made up of 16 Timbres (Note that  
you don’t have to use all 16 Timbres). Each Timbre is  
assigned a Program, along with parameters for key  
range and velocity zones, mixer settings, MIDI channel  
and controller filtering, and so on.  
Playing combinations  
Selecting a program using  
“Combination Select” and the VALUE  
controllers  
1. Press the COMBI button. (The LED will light up.)  
(Refer to the illustration below for the buttons.)  
Alternatively, you can use the mode button (see  
The KROME will enter Combination mode.  
2. Access the Combi P0: Play– Program T01–08 page.  
This is shown in the top line of the display.  
Selecting Combinations  
There are several different ways to select  
Combinations. Each one is convenient in a different  
way:  
• Using “Combination Select” and the VALUE  
controllers:  
• Using the Bank/Combination Select menu:  
• Using the Category/Program Select menu:  
• Find  
• Using a foot switch: page 19  
• Sending MIDI program change messages to select  
Programs remotely:  
Mode button  
Mode, page number  
and name  
Tab name  
For details, please see below.  
Bank  
number  
Combination Select  
(Combination number and name)  
Combination Select popup button  
Category Select popup button  
(Category number and name)  
If a different page is shown, press the EXIT button  
several times to move to the Combi P0: Play– Program  
T01–08 page.  
3. Make sure that “Combination Select” is selected.  
If it is not, press “Combination Select” in the display to  
highlight it.  
4. Select the combination you want to play.  
You can use the following methods to select a combination.  
2: COMBI P0: Play  
1: Mode name  
3: Combination Select  
(button)  
4: Numeric keypads  
ENTER button  
5: BANK SELECT  
A–F buttons  
1: COMBI button  
4: INC/DEC buttons  
4: VALUE dial  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Playing and editing Combinations  
• Use the INC or DEC buttons.  
• Turn the VALUE dial.  
• Use numeric keys 0–9 to enter the combination  
number, and press the ENTER button.  
5. Press a COMBI BANK A–D button to switch  
banks.  
When you select a different Bank, the buttons LED will  
light up, and the selected bank will appear on the left  
side of the display.  
Velocity meter  
For example, to select bank B, press the COMBI BANK  
B button. The B button will light up, and the name  
Bank B will appear in the left side of the display.  
Overview: Combination Banks  
With the factory settings, the KROME contains 384  
preloaded combinations that are GM2 compatible. In  
addition to these, there are 128 combinations to store  
sounds that you create, or store optional sound  
libraries.  
Auditioning the sound  
Play the KROMEs keyboard to hear the combination  
you’ve selected.  
Key zone preview allows you to check the timbres  
layer and split settings, as well as how the arpeggiator  
is used.  
Combinations are organized into four banks as shown  
in the following table.  
Combination bank contents  
• The keyboard area indicates the last (single) note‐  
Bank  
A, B, C  
Combi. No.  
000...127  
Explanation  
Factory Combinations  
Initialized Combinations  
on that was received on the global MIDI channel.  
• The key zone area shows the timbres that will  
sound at the key position, differentiated by several  
colors according to the settings of each timbre.  
D
000...127  
Selecting by Bank/Combination  
Select menu  
You can select Combinations from a list organized by  
Combination bank.  
• Press the Combination Select popup button to  
access the menu and make your selection.  
The selection method is the same as in “Selecting by  
page for details.  
Green: Timbres that are sounded on the global MIDI  
channel, such as by the keyboard.  
Yellow: Timbres that will sound only when the  
arpeggiator is on (see page 90).  
Orange: Timbres that will sound only when the drum  
track is on.  
Bank/Combination Select menu  
Blue: Timbres whose timbre channel is set to  
something other than the global channel. These will  
not be sounded by the KROMEs keyboard,  
arpeggiator, or drum track, but will sound in response  
to MIDI noteon messages from an external device.  
Purple: These timbres are used to play an external  
sound module. They do not sound on the KROME.  
None: Timbres whose timbre status is off. These will  
not sound.  
The velocity meter shows the noteon velocity value.  
• Noteon velocities from the keyboard, MIDI IN,  
arpeggiator, and drum track are shown for each  
timbre/channel. (If multiple noteon events occur  
simultaneously, the highest velocity value will be  
shown.)  
• Since this shows the noteon velocity values, it is  
not affected by the setting of the Volume slider nor  
by changes in the audio signal level. Also, the meter  
will respond even if key zone settings or velocity  
zone settings are such that the note is not sounded.  
Timbres whose Play/Mute and Solo settings allows  
them to play are shown in a dark color, and timbres  
that are muted are shown in a light color.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Playing combinations Using controllers to modify the sound  
Selecting by Category/Combination  
Select menu  
You can select Combinations arranged by category,  
such as keyboard, organ, bass, and drums.  
When shipped from the factory, the preloaded  
Combinations are organized into 16 categories, each  
with several subcategories.  
• Press the Category Select popup button to access  
the menu and make your selection.  
Using controllers to modify  
the sound  
The KROME provides a variety of controllers that you  
can use to vary the sound, such as the joystick, the  
SW1, SW2 buttons, and the control surface knobs. It  
also provides chord trigger buttons.  
For details, please see the corresponding explanation  
The selection method is the same as in “Selecting by  
that page for details.  
Performing with the  
arpeggiator or drum track  
Category/Combination Select menu  
Based on note data it receives from the keyboard or  
from the MIDI IN connector, the arpeggiator can  
generate a wide range of phrases and patterns  
including arpeggios, guitar or keyboard backing riffs,  
bass phrases, or drum patterns. When the realtime  
controls ARP is selected, you can use the knobs to vary  
the duration and dynamics of the arpeggiated notes.  
For more about the arpeggiator, please see page 85.  
The Drum Track function uses a rich variety of drum  
patterns to play the KROMEs highquality drum  
programs. You can perform along with the drum  
patterns, or synchronize Drum Track patterns with the  
phrases generated by arpeggiator.  
For more about the Drum Track function, please see  
Find  
You can search for a combination by a portion of its  
name.  
The procedure is the same as explained in “Find” on  
page 23. Please see that explanation for details.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playing and editing Combinations  
Easy Combination editing  
You can edit any of the Combinations shipped with  
KROME. You can create your own combinations by  
editing a preloaded combination, or by starting from  
an initialized combination.  
Adjusting the mix  
Adjusting the volume of each timbre  
1. Access the Combi P0: Play– Mixer T01–08 page.  
This page shows the volume, pan, and Program  
assignments for all 8 Timbres.  
A combination has sixteen timbres; you can assign a  
program to each timbre and specify its volume and  
pan, the key range in which the program will sound,  
and how its sound will be routed to the effects. You can  
create simple setups such as detuned sounds, split, or  
layers, or highly complex orchestralike setups.  
Even without moving to the various pages for detailed  
editing, you can make dramatic changes just from  
within the Combi P0: Play page. You can also edit  
using the control surfaces knobs on the front panel.  
Changing the program of each  
timbre  
Changing the Programs assigned to timbres (1–16) is a  
quick way to dramatically alter the sound of the  
Combination.  
2. In the display, press the timbre 1 volume slider  
and slide it up or down to adjust the volume.  
1. Access the Combi P0: Play– Program T01–08/T09–  
16 page.  
In this page you can view the program assigned to each  
timbre 1–16, and the play/mute and solo status of each.  
You can also highlight the numerical area of the slider  
and use the VALUE dial or the numeric keys to adjust  
the value.  
If you check Hold Balance, moving any one of the  
volume sliders (volume values) will cause the volume  
of the other timbres to change as well, maintaining the  
relative volume balance between timbres 1–16. This is a  
convenient way to adjust the overall volume.  
Selected  
Timbre Info  
Timbre No.  
Category/Timbre  
Program Select  
Bank/Timbre  
Program Select  
Adjusting the panning of each timbre  
1. Access the Combi P0: Play– Mixer T01–08 page.  
Program Select  
Play/Mute  
2. Press the timbre 1 pan knob, and slide it left/right  
to adjust the panning.  
Solo On/Off  
You can also highlight the numerical area of the knob  
and use the VALUE dial or the numeric keys to adjust  
the value.  
Timbre pan interacts with the pan stored in the  
Program. A setting of C064 reproduces the Programs  
oscillator pan settings. Adjusting the Timbre Pan will  
move the sound to left or right while preserving the  
pan relationship between the oscillators. A setting of  
L001 is far left, and R127 is far right.  
2. Use any of the following methods to select a  
Program for each timbre.  
• Choose Program Select, use numeric keys 0–9 to  
input the program number, and press the ENTER  
button.  
• Choose Program Select and turn the VALUE dial or  
use the INC/DEC buttons.  
• If the Program Select parameter is selected, the  
PROG BANK A–F buttons will switch program  
banks. (If Timbre Program Select is selected, the  
BANK button LED of the program bank selected for  
that timbre will light up.)  
• From the Bank/Program Select menu you can view  
and select programs by bank.  
• From the Category/Program Select menu you can  
view and select programs by category.  
• You can transmit MIDI program changes from a  
connected external MIDI device. (See page 359 of  
the Parameter Guide)  
Note: To select the timbre program via MIDI program  
change the timbres status must be set to “INT.”  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Detailed Editing with Combinations Simple editing using the knobs  
Simple editing using the  
knobs  
You can use the Control Surface to perform a variety of  
edits.  
For example, you can use the control surface to adjust  
the Filter cutoff or resonance. You can also use it to  
vary the depth of an effect, or to change the way in  
which the arpeggiator generates a phrase.  
For details, please see “Realtime control knobs” on  
Saving a Combination you’ve  
edited  
After you’ve edited a combination, you must save it if  
you want to keep the changes you’ve made. If you re‐  
select the combination or turn off the power before  
saving, your edits will be lost.  
1. Press the WRITE button.  
The Write Combination dialog box will appear. If you  
want to change the writing destination or the name,  
make the appropriate changes (see page 117).  
2. Press the WRITE button once again to save (write)  
the data.  
For details, please see “Writing a Program or  
You can also save combinations on an SD card as PCG  
files.  
For details, please see “Saving to SD card (Media–  
Detailed Editing with Combinations  
You can edit the preloaded combinations (Banks A–C)  
that the KROME is shipped with, or start with an  
initialized Combination to create your own original  
sounds.  
You can use the factory Programs to create new  
Combinations, or use your own custom Programs.  
Note: If you’re in the process of editing a Program in  
Program mode, and you use that Program in a  
Combination, you’ll hear the edited version in  
Combination mode as well.  
About the edit pages  
In the Combi P0: Play page you can select and play  
combinations. Here you can also use the control  
surfaces knobs and the toneadjust function for quick  
editing, or to edit the settings of the arpeggiator or  
drum track. In the other pages you can edit the sound  
in greater detail.  
For details on each mode and how to access each page,  
Combination structure and corresponding pages  
Controllers: P1–1  
DrumTrack: P7–7  
Tone Adjust: P0–7  
Timbre1  
Program  
Routing: P8-1, 2  
Parameters  
3Band EQ  
Arpeggio: P7–1, 2, 3, 4, 5  
Timbre2  
Program  
Parameters  
3Band EQ  
Master  
Effects  
1, 2: P9  
Timbre  
Timbre3  
Program  
Parameters  
3Band EQ  
Insert Effects  
Master Effects  
Total  
Effects:  
P9  
Insert  
Effects  
1…5: P8  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
L/MONO, R  
Timbre4  
Program  
Parameters  
3Band EQ  
FX Control Bus  
Timbre16  
Program  
Parameters  
3Band EQ  
P1–1, P2–2, etc. indicate the on-screen pages and tabs used when editing on the KROME.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Playing and editing Combinations  
A suggested approach for  
editing  
First, select a Program for each Timbre, on the P0:  
Play– Program T01–08 or T09–16 page. (Note that you  
don’t have to use all 16 Timbres)  
Layers, Splits, and Velocity  
Switches  
Within a Combination, you can use note range and  
velocity level to define the “zone” in which a specific  
timbre will play.  
Next, create any desired keyboard or velocity splits,  
layers, or crossfades between the different Timbres.  
You can do this on the P4: Zone/Delay– Keyboard  
Zones page.  
After this, adjust the volumes of the Timbres (back on  
the Program Select/Mixer tab), and set up any other  
Timbre parameters as desired.  
The Programs assigned to each Timbre can be played  
in three ways: as part of a layer, a split, or a velocity  
switch. A Combination can be set to use any one of  
these methods or to use two or more of these methods  
simultaneously.  
Layer  
To add finishing touches to the sound, set up the Insert,  
Master, and Total Effect as desired (on the P8: Routing/  
IFX and P9: MFX/TFX/LFO pages, respectively.) These  
effects can be different from those associated with the  
individual Programs in Program mode, if desired.  
Layers cause two or more Programs to play  
simultaneously when a note is played.  
Program A  
Program B  
Layer:  
Two or more programs sound  
simultaneously.  
In addition, you can make arpeggiator and drum track  
settings (on the P7: ART/DT page) and controller  
settings (on the P1: Controllers page) to create the  
finished Combination.  
Split  
Splits cause different Programs to respond on different  
areas of the keyboard.  
Soloing timbres  
You can use the Control Surfaces Solo function to hear  
the sound of each timbre by itself.  
For details, please see “Solo On/Off” on page 72 of the  
Parameter Guide.  
Program B  
Program A  
Split:  
Different programs will sound in  
different areas of the keyboard.  
Velocity Switch  
Velocity Switches cause different Programs to respond  
depending on the velocity (how hard you play the  
notes).  
Restoring edited settings  
Program B  
Program A  
Strong  
Soft  
Keyboard playing  
dynamics  
Using COMPARE  
Velocity Switch:  
When you’re in the process of editing a sound,  
pressing the COMPARE button will recall the saved  
version of the sound, as it was before you started  
editing.  
Keyboard playing dynamics  
(velocity) switches between  
different programs.  
On the KROME, you can use a different Program for  
each of up to sixteen Timbres, and combine two or  
more of the above methods to create even more  
complex setups.  
Program A  
Program D  
Program C  
Strong  
Soft  
Keyboard playing  
dynamics  
Program B  
Example:  
B and C/D are split. In the lower  
keyboard range, A and B are  
layered. In the higher keyboard  
range, C and D are switched by  
velocity and layered with A.  
As an additional possibility, you can set the slope for a  
key zone or velocity zone so that the volume  
diminishes gradually. This lets you change a split into a  
keyboard crossfade, or a velocity switch into a velocity  
crossfade.  
Keyboard X-Fade (keyboard  
crossfade):  
Program B  
Program A  
As you play from low notes to  
high notes, the volume of A  
will fade out, and the volume  
of B will fade in.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Detailed Editing with Combinations Layers, Splits, and Velocity Switches  
Creating Key Splits and Layers  
Creating Velocity Switches  
Next, lets create a simple velocity switched  
Combination, like the diagram below:  
Splits and Layers  
Lets create a Combination that combines both splits  
and layers, like the diagram below:  
127  
64  
63  
1
Timbre 1  
Timbre 2  
Brass  
Velocity  
switch  
Strings  
Timbre 1  
Timbre 2  
Timbre 3  
Piano  
Brass  
Strings  
1. Access the Combi P0: Play– Program T01–08 page.  
2. Select a brass sound for Timbre 1, and a strings  
sound for Timbre 2.  
C–1  
B3 C4  
G9  
1. Access the Combi P0: Play– Program T01–08 page.  
3. Access the P3: Timbre Parameters– MIDI T01–08  
page.  
2. Select a piano sound for Timbre 1, a brass sound  
for Timbre 2, and a strings sound for Timbre 3.  
4. For Timbres 1 and 2, set Status to INT and MIDI  
Channel to Gch (the Global Channel).  
3. Access the P3: Timbre Parameters– MIDI T01–08  
page.  
5. Access the P4: Zone/Delay– Vel Z T01–08 page.  
6. Set Timbre 1’s Top Velocity to 127, and its Bottom  
Velocity to 64.  
4. For Timbres 1–3, set Status to INT and MIDI  
Channel to Gch (the Global Channel).  
You can also enter a velocity value by selecting the  
parameter and then playing a note with the desired  
velocity on the keyboard while holding down the  
ENTER button.  
5. Access the P4: Zone/Delay– Key Z T01–08 page.  
6. Set Timbre 1’s Top Key to G9, and its Bottom Key  
to C4.  
7. Set Timbre 2 to a Top Velocity of 63, and a Bottom  
Velocity of 1.  
Velocity Zone Slope  
Similar to Key Zone Slopes, as described above, these  
let you fade in and fade out sounds gradually over a  
velocity range, instead of a simple hard switch.  
In the case of the example above, you could set the  
velocity zones of the two Timbres so that they partially  
overlap. Then, set the Top Slope and Bottom Slope so  
that the sound changes gradually, instead of changing  
suddenly between velocity values of 63 and 64.  
You can also enter a note value by selecting the  
parameter and then playing the desired note on the  
keyboard while holding down the ENTER button.  
7. Set Timbres 2 and 3 to a Top Key of B3, and a  
Bottom Key of C–1.  
Key Zone Slope  
In addition to “hard” splits, where the sound changes  
abruptly, you can use the Slope parameters to  
gradually fade a sound in or out over a range of keys.  
In the example above, you could set the Bottom Key of  
timbre 1 to G3, and set the Top Key of timbre 2 to G4,  
so that these two timbres overlap.  
Next, if you set the Bottom Slope of timbre 1 to 12, and  
set the Top Slope of timbre 2 to 12, the sound will  
change gradually instead of changing suddenly.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing and editing Combinations  
MIDI filter settings  
MIDI settings  
For each MIDI Filter item, you can specify whether or  
not the corresponding MIDI message will be  
transmitted and received. The checked items will be  
transmitted and received.  
Timbre Parameters MIDI page  
Status  
The MIDI filters don’t turn the functions themselves on  
or off. Instead, the filter just controls whether or not  
that MIDI message will be transmitted and received.  
This controls the status of MIDI and the internal tone  
generator for each Timbre. Normally, if you’re playing  
an internal Program, this should be set to INT.  
If the status is set to Off, EXT, or EX2, that Timbres  
internal sounds will not be played. Off simply disables  
the Timbre entirely. The EXT and EX2 settings allow  
the Timbre to control an external MIDI device.  
For example, if portamento is on, portamento will be  
applied to the internal KROME sound even if Enable  
Portamento SW is unchecked.  
As another example, lets say that you’ve selected a  
bass Program for Timbre 1, and a piano Program for  
Timbre 2, with the goal of creating a bass/piano split.  
You could choose the following settings so that  
pressing the damper pedal affects only Timbre 2s  
piano sound:  
1. Access the P5–1: MIDI Filter <1> T01–08 page.  
2. Uncheck the Enable Damper box for Timbre 1.  
3. Check the Enable Damper box for Timbre 2.  
For details, please see “Status” on page 81 of the  
Parameter Guide.  
Bank Select (when status=EX2)  
When the Status is set to EX2, these parameters allow  
you to transmit MIDI Bank Select messages to external  
MIDI devices.  
MIDI Channel  
Timbres that you wish to play from the KROMEs  
keyboard must be set to the global MIDI channel. Your  
playing on the keyboard is transmitted on the global  
MIDI channel, and will trigger any timbre that matches  
this channel. Normally you will set this to Gch. When  
this is set to Gch, the MIDI channel of the timbre will  
always match the global MIDI channel, even if you  
change the global MIDI channel.  
On some preloaded Combinations, Timbres used  
by the arpeggiator may have their MIDI Channels  
set to something other than Gch. These will be  
timbres that play only when the arpeggiator is on,  
which is a very useful technique for creating  
Apreggiator based” Combinations.  
For details, please see Arpeggiator settings in  
In particular, note the relationships between  
arpeggiator A/B assignments and MIDI Channel.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Detailed Editing with Combinations Altering Programs to fit within a Combination  
Timbre Parameters: Pitch  
Altering Programs to fit  
within a Combination  
You can make various changes to Programs within the  
context of a particular Combination to make them fit  
better with other Programs, or to create particular  
sonic effects. These changes do not affect the original  
Programs, or how those Programs sound in other  
Combinations (see page 81 of the Parameter Guide).  
Timbre Parameters: OSC  
Transpose, Detune (BPM Adjust)  
These parameters adjust the pitch of the timbre.  
• In a layertype combination, you can set two or  
more timbres to the same program, and create a  
richer sound by using Transpose to shift their pitch  
apart by an octave or by using Detune to create a  
slight difference in pitch between the two.  
• In splittype combinations, you can use Transpose  
to shift the pitch (in semitone units) of the  
programs specified for each key zone.  
Note: If you wish to change the playback pitch of a  
drum program, use Detune. If you change the  
Transpose setting, the relationship between the notes  
and drum sounds will change.  
Force OSC Mode  
If you wish to force a polyphonic program to sound  
monophonically, set this either to MN (Mono) or LGT  
(Legato). Conversely, set this to Poly if you wish to  
force a monophonic program to play polyphonically.  
Normally this should be set to PRG, so that the sound  
will play as set by the original Program.  
Use Program’s Scale, Scale  
This specifies the scale for each timbre.  
If you check Use Program’s Scale, the scale specified  
by the program will be used. Timbres where this  
parameter is not checked will use the Scale setting.  
For details, please see “Force OSC Mode” on page 82 of  
the Parameter Guide.  
OSC Select  
If the timbre is using a Program where the Oscillator  
Mode is Double or Double Drums, and you want only  
OSC1 or OSC2 (not both) to sound, set this to OSC1  
(only OSC1 will sound) or OSC2 (only OSC2 will  
sound).  
Normally, this should be set to BTH (Both).  
Portamento  
If the Program uses portamento, but youd like to  
disable this for the current Combination, set this  
parameter to Off.  
Conversely, if you want to force the portamento to be  
on, or just to change the portamento time, set this to a  
value of 001–127. The portamento will change to use  
the newly specified time.  
Normally, this should be set to PRG.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Playing and editing Combinations  
Delay  
Arpeggiator settings  
You can set some Timbres so that they don’t sound  
immediately at noteon. This can create cool effects,  
and more dramatic layers.  
You can specify the delay for each Timbre either in  
milliseconds (ms), or in rhythmic values which sync to  
the system tempo.  
According to the note data received from the keyboard  
or from the MIDI IN connector, the arpeggiator will  
automatically generate a wide range of phrases or  
patterns including arpeggios, guitar or keyboard  
backing riffs, bass phrases, or drum patterns. If the  
SELECT button is set to ARP, you can use the knobs to  
vary the duration and dynamics of the arpeggiated  
notes.  
If you set the Delay to Key Off, the Timbre will sound  
when the note is released.  
For more about the arpeggiator, please see page 85.  
Drum Track settings  
While you perform using a combination, you can use  
the KROMEs rich variety of drum patterns to play  
highquality drum programs.  
Playing along with Drum Track patterns is often a  
useful way to come up with new phrases.  
For more about the Drum Track function, please see  
Editing Programs with Tone Adjust  
Using Tone Adjust, you can create detailed edits to  
Programs within the context of the Combination.  
These edits will not affect the original Program, or any  
other Combinations which use the Program. To edit a  
Program with Tone Adjust:  
Effects  
For details, please see “Using Effects” on page 77.  
Select a timbre in the Timbre field of the P0: Play– Tone  
Adjust page. Then select the parameter that you want  
to adjust, and use the VALUE controllers to edit the  
sound.  
Automatically importing a  
Combination  
into Sequencer mode  
The Auto Song Setup feature automatically applies the  
settings of the current Combination to a song.  
For details, please see Auto Song Setup function” on  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Creating songs (Sequencer mode)  
Overview  
About the KROMEs Sequencer  
Sequencer mode structure  
Sequencer mode is structured as follows.  
The sequencer brings together the KROMEs numerous  
functions such as its arpeggiator, RPPR, high‐  
performance effects, and controllers, allowing you to  
take advantage of these in a wide range of situations.  
Songs  
This sequencer is a 16track MIDI sequencer that can  
store up to 128 songs and 210,000 MIDI events. You can  
use it to record and play back notes for the internal  
sound generator as well as for external MIDI sound  
modules.  
A song consists of tracks 1–16, a master track, song  
parameters such as the song name, arpeggiator, Drum  
Track function, effect and RPPR parameters, and 100  
user patterns.  
A maximum of 128 such songs can be created on  
KROME.  
Tracks 1–16 consist of setup parameters (such as each  
tracks program, pan, and volume) located at the start  
of the song, and the musical data itself. The master  
track consists of tempo and time signature data (see  
“Setup parameters & Musical data” on page 106 of the  
Parameter Guide).  
When you turn off the power, the settings created  
in Sequencer mode, the song data, any user  
pattern data, and Cue List that you recorded will  
not be backed up. If you wish to keep this data,  
you must save it on an SD card before turning off  
the power, or perform a MIDI data dump to save  
the data on an external data filer etc.  
If you wish to write the programs, track  
parameters, effects, and arpeggiator settings etc.  
selected for a song as a template song, use the  
menu command Save Template Song.  
Immediately after the power is turned on, KROME  
will not contain any song data, so if you wish to  
play a song on the sequencer, you must first load  
data from SD card, or receive a MIDI data dump  
from a MIDI filer. For details, please see page 118,  
and page 219 of the Parameter Guide.  
Song recording and editing  
Song recording is performed on tracks.  
You can record tracks in either of two ways; realtime  
recording or step recording. For realtime recording  
you can choose one of six recording modes.  
You can edit tracks by using Event Edit operations to  
modify the recorded data or insert new data, and by  
using Track Edit functions such as Create Control Data,  
which generates and inserts pitch bend, aftertouch, or  
control change data.  
Patterns  
There are two types of patterns: preset patterns and  
user patterns.  
Preset patterns: Patterns suitable for drum tracks are  
preset in internal memory, and can be selected for any  
song.  
User patterns: Each song can have up to 100 patterns.  
When using a pattern in a different song, use the  
Utility menu commands Copy Pattern or Copy From  
Song etc. to copy the pattern. The pattern length can be  
specified in units of a measure.  
Each pattern consists of musical data for one track. It is  
not possible to create patterns that contain multiple  
tracks.  
You can use these patterns by placing them in a track  
(Put to Track menu command) or by copying them  
(Copy to Track menu command). You can also use  
patterns with the RPPR function of a song (see  
page 71).  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Creating songs (Sequencer mode)  
PAUSE ( ) button  
Recording and editing a pattern  
You can record a pattern in either of two ways: realtime  
recording or step recording. However, unlike realtime‐  
recording to a track, you can select only one recording  
type (loop recording) when realtimerecording to a  
pattern.  
You can edit the pattern to correct mistakes in the  
recorded data, or use event editing to insert new data.  
You can use the Get From Track menu command to  
obtain a desired region of performance data from a  
track and use it as pattern data. Conversely, you can  
use the Put to Track or Copy to Track menu  
commands to place or copy a patterns performance  
data into a track.  
This button pauses the playback of the song. When  
paused, the buttons LED will light up. Press PAUSE  
(
) once again to resume playback, and the LED will  
turn off.  
REW ( ) button  
When the Song is playing or paused, this button will  
rewind the song. When you press and hold this button,  
its LED will light up, and the playback will rewind.  
(Rewind is disabled during recording, and while the  
Song is stopped.)  
Note: You can use the FF/REW Speed menu command  
to specify the fastforward and rewind speed.  
FF ( ) button  
How Sequencer patterns are related to Drum  
Track patterns  
The patterns of the Drum Track function you use with  
a Program or Combination are related to Sequencer  
mode patterns as follows.  
When the Song is playing or paused, this button will  
fastforward the song. When you press and hold this  
button, the button will light up, and the playback will  
fastforward. (Fastforward is disabled during  
recording, and while the Song is stopped.)  
Preset patterns are a common library that can also be  
used by the Drum Track function.  
User patterns cannot be directly used by the Drum  
Track function, but they can be converted to user Drum  
Track patterns and used with a Program or  
Combination. If you convert a user pattern, it will be  
stored in internal memory, and this data will not  
disappear even when you turn off the power.  
LOCATE ( ) button  
By pressing the LOCATE ( ) button you can move to  
a specified locate point. By default, you’ll move to  
001:01.000.  
To change the locate point thats assigned to the  
LOCATE ( ) button, use the menu command Set  
Location. Alternatively, you can set the locate point  
during playback by holding down the ENTER button  
and pressing the LOCATE ( ) button.  
Cue List  
START/STOP (  
) button  
The cue list allows you to playback multiple songs in  
succession. The KROME lets you create twenty cue  
lists. Each cue list lets you connect up to 99 songs and  
specify the number of times that each song will repeat.  
The menu command Convert to Song lets you convert  
the songs in a cue list into a single song.  
For example you can use a cue list to create the  
backing, convert the cue list to a song, and then add  
solo phrases on unused tracks.  
This starts or stops recording and playback in  
Sequencer mode.  
REC ( ) button  
Pressing this button will enter recordready mode.  
Once you’re in recordready mode (shown by the  
buttons lit LED), you can begin recording by pressing  
the SEQUENCER START/STOP (  
) button. For  
Buttons in the display (the transport  
bar)  
The transport buttons in the bottom line of the display  
can also be used to control sequencer recording and  
playback in the same way as the front panel  
SEQUENCER buttons.  
The transport buttons will appear when you press the  
“<” button on the lower right side of the display and  
drag it toward the left. To close them, press the “>”  
button and drag it toward the right.  
Transport control  
These controls let you play back, record, fastforward,  
or rewind the sequencer.  
Front panel buttons  
You can use the front panel SEQUENCER buttons to  
control recording and playback on the sequencer.  
REW  
PAUSE  
FF  
<, >  
SET LOCATE REC START/ PAUSE REW  
STOP  
FF  
popup LOCATE  
LOCATE  
REC  
START/  
STOP  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playing Songs Playback  
Playing Songs  
Changing the volume, mute, and solo  
settings of each track  
In the SEQ P0: Play/REC– Prog T01–08, T09–16, Mixer  
T01–08, and T09–16 pages you can change the volume,  
mute, and solo settings of each track.  
Playback  
In order to play back song data in the sequencer, you  
must first record, load or dump song data into the  
KROME.  
Lets start by loading and playing the demo song data.  
For details, please see “Listening to the demo songs”  
on page 21 of the Quick Start Guide.  
1. Press the SEQ button or MODE button to enter  
Sequencer mode.  
Muting a specific track/Monitoring a  
specific track (Mute/Solo functions)  
The KROME provides a Mute function that lets you  
silence specified tracks 1–16, and a Solo function that  
lets you hear the specified track or channel by itself.  
These functions can be used in various ways. For  
example you can intentionally mute or solo specific  
tracks, or listen only to the rhythm section of the  
previouslyrecorded tracks while you record new  
tracks. Lets try out the Mute and Solo functions.  
The P0: Play/REC– Program T01–08 or T09–16 page  
will appear. If this is not displayed, press the EXIT  
button about three times.  
2. Use “Song Select” to select the song you want to  
play back.  
You can press the Song Select popup button and  
choose from a list. If you select an empty list, a new  
song will be created.  
You can also select a song by using the INC/DEC  
button or VALUE dial. However if there is no song,  
you can’t make a selection using the VALUE  
controllers.  
1. Use “Song Select” to select the song that you want  
to play back.  
2. Press the SEQUENCER START/STOP (  
button.  
)
3. Press track 1 Play/Rec/Mute.  
Meter  
Tempo  
Location  
Song S  
Popup  
Song Position Bar  
Track Select  
The display will change from Play to Mute, and the  
playback of track 1 will no longer be heard. In this way,  
the “mute” function allows you to silence a specified  
track until the track is unmuted.  
elec  
t
Press track 2 Play/Rec/Mute. The display will change,  
and the playback of track 2 will also be muted. To  
cancel muting, press Play/Rec/Mute once again.  
Category  
Program Select,  
& Popup  
Play/Mute/Rec  
Solo  
Track 1  
Track 2  
4. Press track 1 “Solo On/Off.”  
3. Press the SEQUENCER START/STOP (  
button.  
Alternatively, pull out the transport bar and press the  
START/STOP ( ) button. The transport control  
)
“Solo” will be highlighted, and this time, only the  
performance of track 1 will be heard. To play back only  
a specified track by itself in this way is known as  
“soloing” the track (turning Solo on).  
functionality in the procedure below is described as  
button operations, but you can also perform the same  
operations using the onscreen transport buttons.  
If both Mute and Solo are used, the Solo function will  
be given priority.  
Press track 2 “Solo On/Off.”  
The display will change, and you will hear the  
playback of tracks 1 and 2. You won’t hear the sound of  
tracks 3–16.  
The song you selected in step 2 will begin playing.  
Note: The song will begin playing if you press the  
START/STOP (  
) button in a page other than P10:  
Pattern/RPPR. If you press this button while you’re in  
P10: Pattern/RPPR, the currentlyselected pattern will  
begin playing. (In P11: Cue List, the songs of the cue  
list will be played.)  
5. To switch Solo off, press Solo On/Off once again.  
Press Solo On/Off for both tracks 1 and 2.  
The display will change, and the playback of tracks 1  
and 2 will be muted. If the Solo function is turned off  
for all tracks, playback will be according to the Play/  
Rec/Mute settings.  
4. During playback, you can press the START/STOP  
(
) button to stop playback.  
If you press the START/STOP (  
) button once  
again, playback will resume from where you stopped.  
For details on the functions of the LOCATE ( ),  
PAUSE ( ), REW ( ), and FF ( ) buttons, please  
see page 54.  
The SOLO setting is not stored when you save the  
song.  
You can use the FF/REW Speed menu command to  
specify the fastforward and rewind speed.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Creating songs (Sequencer mode)  
Exclusive Solo  
Exclusive Solo is a function that limits the Solo  
function (described above) to a single track at a time. If  
Exclusive Solo is on, only the track for which Solo was  
last turned on will be played; other tracks will always  
be silent.  
Use the Exclusive Solo menu command to specify how  
the Solo function will function.  
Exclusive Solo off: You will be able to solo more than  
one track at a time. The status of a track will change  
each time you press its Solo On/Off button.  
Exclusive Solo on: When you press a Solo On/Off  
button, only that track will be soloed.  
Tip: You can turn Exclusive Solo on/off by holding  
down the ENTER button and pressing numeric key 1.  
Loop playback  
When recording or playing back a song, you can loop  
individual tracks that are playing.  
In the P0–1: Play Loop T01–08 or T09–16 page, check  
Track Play Loop for the tracks you want to loop, and  
use Loop Start Measure and Loop End Measure to  
specify the starting and ending measure of the region  
that will play back as a loop.  
If you check Play Intro, the measures preceding the  
loop will be played back as an introduction before the  
loop begins.  
Track Play Loop  
Loop Start  
Measure  
Loop End  
Measure  
Play Intro  
If you play back from the first measure with the  
settings shown in the screenshot above, the specified  
region of measures will repeat as follows.  
Measures  
Track 1  
1
1
9
2
2
3
3
9
4
4
5
5
9
6
6
7
7
9
8
8
9
5
9
10 11 12 13  
6
7
9
8
5
9
Track 2  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
If Play Intro is unchecked, the specified region of  
measures will repeat as follows.  
Measures  
Track 1  
1
5
9
2
6
3
7
9
4
8
5
5
9
6
6
7
7
9
8
8
9
5
9
10 11 12 13  
6
7
9
8
5
9
Track 2  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording Preparations for recording  
Recording  
Track settings  
Since we’re going to record a new song in this example,  
we will start by explaining how to assign a program to  
each track, and adjust basic settings such as volume.  
Preparations for recording  
Before you begin recording, make sure that the  
memory protect setting in Global mode is turned  
off. For details, please see “Protecting the  
1. Assign a program to each track.  
Use “Program Select” to assign a program to each  
track. The method is the same as when assigning a  
program to a timbre in a combination (see page 46).  
Creating a Song  
You can copy various settings from Programs or  
Combinations. (See pages 166, 167 of the Parameter  
Guide.)  
2. When assigning a program, you can use Track  
Select to choose the track to which you wish to  
assign a program, and audition the sound.  
3. Set the pan and volume of each track.  
Press the Mixer 1–8 tab (or the Mixer 9–16 tab) to access  
the Mixer T01–08 page (Mixer T09–16 page).  
Before we can begin this example, we need to select an  
empty song where we can record.  
1. Press the SEQ button or MODE button to enter  
Sequencer mode.  
2. Choose “Song Select” (e.g., in the P0: Play/REC–  
Program T01–08 page).  
You can press the Song Select popup button, and  
choose from a list.  
REC Resolution Tempo  
Mode  
Meter  
Tempo  
Location  
Song Select  
Popup  
Track Select  
Category  
Program Select,  
& Popup  
Play/Mute/Rec  
Solo  
3. Use the numeric keys to input the number of the  
new song that you want to create, and press the  
ENTER button. (For example, press the 1 switch  
and then the ENTER button.) A dialog box will  
appear.  
If you pressed the Song Select popup to access the  
Song No. dialog box, press the desired song number to  
open the dialog box.  
Pan sets the pan position of each track, and Volume  
sets the volume level of each track.  
4. Specify the tone generator and MIDI channel that  
will be played by each track.  
Press the PAGE button to access SEQ Page Select, and  
press “P3 Track Parameters” The P3: Track Parameters  
page will appear. Press the MIDI 1–8 tab (or the MIDI  
9–16 tab) to access the MIDI T01–08 page (MIDI T09–16  
page).  
4. Use “Set Length” to input the desired number of  
measures and press the OK button.  
You can change the number of measures later if  
desired. For details, please see “Set Song Length” on  
page 176 of the Parameter Guide.  
5. Press the OK button to create the song.  
Tip: You can use the ENTER button instead of the OK  
button.  
• Use Status to specify whether each track will play  
the internal and/or external sound generator.  
Normally when using the KROME, you will select INT  
or BTH.  
INT: During playback, the KROMEs internal tone  
generator will play the MIDI data recorded on that  
track. When you use the KROMEs keyboard or  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Creating songs (Sequencer mode)  
controllers, you will be playing and controlling the  
track selected by Track Select.  
the notes will be recorded with the timing at which  
you play them.  
EXT, EX2, BTH: During playback, the MIDI data  
recorded on that track will be transmitted from MIDI  
OUT to play an external sound module. When you use  
the KROMEs keyboard or controllers, MIDI data will  
be transmitted to play and control the external sound  
module selected by Track Select. (The MIDI channel of  
the external tone generator must be set to match the  
MIDI Channel of KROME tracks that are set to EXT,  
EX2 or BTH.)  
If Status is set to BTH, both the external tone generator  
and internal tone generator will be played and  
controlled.  
• Use MIDI Channel to specify the MIDI channel for  
each track.  
8. Make other settings as necessary.  
You can adjust the settings for the arpeggiator (P7:  
ARP/DT), MIDI filtering (P5: MIDI Filter), etc. (See  
You may also wish to use Tone Adjust to tweak the  
sound. When you are finished making these settings,  
the basic setup is complete.  
Normally you will set the MIDI Channel to a  
different channel: 1–16 for each track. Tracks that  
are set to the same MIDI channel will sound  
simultaneously when you record or play back  
either of the tracks.  
Saving your song parameter settings  
The song parameter settings you create here can be  
saved as a template. If you use these settings  
frequently, you can simply load one of the templates  
you’ve saved.  
For details, please see “Save Template Song (Save as  
User Template Song)” on page 164 of the Parameter  
Guide.  
5. Adjust the effect settings.  
Adjust settings for each effect in P8: Routing/IFX and  
P9: MFX/TFX/LFO.  
For details, please see “Using effects in Combinations  
6. Set the tempo and time signature.  
Using template songs  
• To set the tempo, you can turn the TEMPO knob or  
press the TAP button at the desired interval.  
Alternatively, you can select (Tempo) in the P0:  
Play/REC– Program T01–08 page (or similar page),  
and use the VALUE controllers to set the tempo. Set  
Tempo Mode to Manual.  
• Next you will set the time signature. In this  
example, we’ll explain how to set the time signature  
using the “Meter” field. Normally, you specify the  
time signature before recording the first track, and  
then begin recording.  
Loading a template song is an easy way to create  
settings appropriate for a particular musical style. You  
can also assign a drum pattern to a track at the same  
time.  
1. In the P0: Play/REC page, press the menu button  
and choose “Load Template Song.”  
A dialog box will appear.  
a) Press the SEQUENCER REC () button, and set “Meter”  
to **/**.  
b) Press **/** to highlight it, and use the VALUE controllers  
to set the time signature.  
c) Press the START/STOP (  
) button to begin  
recording. When the precount has ended and Locate  
2. In the “From” field, choose the template song you  
want to load.  
3. If you check “Copy Pattern to Track too?”, a dialog  
box for copying a pattern will automatically  
appear after you execute the “Load Template  
Song” operation.  
If you execute the command without checking this,  
only the template song you selected in step 2 will be  
loaded.  
4. Press the OK button to load the template song, or  
press the Cancel button if you decide to cancel.  
When you perform this operation, song settings other  
than track Loop and RPPR will be copied.  
If you executed this operation with Copy Pattern to  
Track too? checked in step 3, the Copy Pattern To  
Track dialog box will appear.  
reaches 001:01:000, press the START/STOP (  
)
button to stop recording. The time signature you  
specified has now been recorded on the Master track.  
If you press the START/STOP (  
) button during the  
precount, the time signature won’t be recorded.  
7. Set the “REC Resolution” if necessary.  
When you record in real time on a track, this parameter  
specifies how the timing of the recorded MIDI data  
will be corrected. The timing will also be corrected  
when you record automation data in real tme on an  
audio track. (Data that was already recorded will not  
be corrected.)  
For example, lets suppose that you recorded some  
eighth notes in real time, but your timing was not quite  
perfect, as shown in part 1 of the illustration below. If  
REC Resolution were set to when you recorded, the  
timing would automatically be corrected as shown in  
part 2 of the illustration. If REC Resolution is set to Hi,  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Recording Preparations for recording  
Auto Song Setup function  
1. Enter Combination mode.  
2. In P0: Play page, select the desired combination  
and edit the Arpeggiator etc. as desired.  
Note: If you want to save the edited state of the  
combination, use the Write Combination menu  
commands.  
3. Press the REC () button. Alternatively, select the  
page menu command Auto Song Setup.”  
The Setup to Record dialog box will appear.  
This dialog box is the same as the one that appears for  
the Copy To Track (P10: Pattern/RPPR– Pattern Edit)  
menu command.  
5. In the “Pattern” field, select the pattern that you  
want to copy.  
In the To Track field, select the copydestination track.  
In the Measure field, specify the starting measure of  
the copydestination.  
Following the pattern name for each of the 605 preset  
patterns, the musical style and the name of the most  
suitable Drums category program are partially  
displayed.  
By loading a drums track and the corresponding preset  
pattern, you can instantly set up a drum track  
appropriate for each preset template song.  
4. To execute the Auto Song Setup function, press the  
REC () button or the OK button. If you decide  
not to execute, press the Cancel button.  
You will automatically move to Sequencer mode, and  
the settings of the combination will be copied to the  
song.  
The first unused song will be the copydestination  
song.  
6. To execute this operation, press the OK button.  
When you execute this procedure, the Measure field  
will count up automatically, showing how many  
measures of the selected pattern have been placed in  
the selected song. You can then copy another pattern if  
desired, or add more measures of the same pattern.  
When you’re finished, press the Exit button.  
Contents automatically copied from a combi-  
nation  
The copied contents will be the same as when you  
execute the menu command Copy From Combi with  
the following settings in the dialog box. (See page 166  
of the Parameter Guide)  
Copying the settings of a combination  
or program  
IFXs, MFXs, TFX checked  
Auto Adjust Arp setting for Multi REC checked  
You can copy the settings of a combination or program  
into the sequencer.  
This can be done in the following ways.  
Contents automatically copied from a pro-  
gram  
The copied contents will be the same as when you  
execute the menu command Copy From Program with  
the following settings in the dialog box. (See page 167  
of the Parameter Guide)  
IFXs, MFXs, TFX checked  
Arp checked  
To set to Track 01  
Arp set to A  
with Drum Track checked  
To: Drum Track set to Track 10  
• Check Recording Setup Multi REC  
• Auto Song Setup  
Auto Song Setup is a function that copies the  
settings of the selected combination (in  
Combination mode) or program (in Program mode)  
to the song in Sequencer mode.  
• Menu commands Copy From Combi or Copy From  
Program. (See pages 166, 167 of the Parameter  
Guide)  
In Sequencer mode, you can use these page menu  
commands to copy the desired settings.  
• Set the Play/Rec/Mute setting to REC for tracks 01  
and 10 (see page 101 of the Parameter Guide).  
5. The KROME will automatically enter recordready  
mode, and the metronome will sound according to  
the Metronome setting (See page 119 of the  
Parameter Guide).  
6. Press the START/STOP (  
realtime recording. To stop recording, press the  
START/STOP ( ) button once again.  
) button to begin  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Creating songs (Sequencer mode)  
5. When you finish playing, press the START/STOP  
) button.  
Recording will end, and the location will return to the  
point where you begin recording.  
(
Recording MIDI in real time  
When you’ve finished with “Preparations for  
recording,” you can start recording.  
If you press the PAUSE ( ) button instead of the  
This is a method of recording what you’re playing on  
the keyboard and your controller usage, in real time.  
This method of recording is normally used one track at  
a time, and is called single track recording.  
As an alternative, multitrack recording allows you to  
simultaneously record multiple channels of data onto  
multiple tracks. This is the method you will use when  
using the Drum Track function, the RPPR function, and  
the arpeggiator to record multiple tracks of musical  
data at once, or when you play back existing sequence  
data on an external sequencer and record it onto  
KROMEs sequencer in real time.  
START/STOP (  
) button, recording will pause.  
When you press the PAUSE ( ) button once again,  
recording will resume where you left off before  
pausing. When you are finished, press the START/  
STOP (  
) button to stop recording.  
The following recording setup parameters are also  
available.  
Overdub  
Select this method if you wish to record additional  
performance data by overdubbing it without erasing  
the previouslyrecorded data.  
Recording setup  
In P0: Play/REC– Preferences page Recording Setup,  
select the realtime recording method you want to use.  
Manual punch-in  
Select this method when you wish to use the  
SEQUENCER REC () button or a foot switch to re‐  
record selected portions of a previouslyrecorded  
track.  
Overwrite  
By default, this recording method is selected.  
Auto punch-in  
This will record your performance by overwriting any  
previously recorded data. All data following the  
measure where you start recording will be erased.  
Normally you will use this method to record, and then  
modify the results by using other types of realtime  
recording or MIDI event editing.  
1. Use Track Select to choose the track that you want  
to record.  
2. Set the Recording Setup to Overwrite.  
Select this method when you wish to automatically re‐  
record selected portions of a previouslyrecorded  
track.  
Then, recording will occur only over the specified area  
(Auto Punch In Start MeasureAuto Punch In End  
Measure), rewriting it with the newly recorded data.  
Loop All Tracks  
Select this method when you wish to repeatedly record  
over a specified area of a track, while continuing to add  
data. This is suitable for creating drum patterns, etc.  
For details, please see An example of realtime  
3. In “Location,” specify the location where you wish  
to begin recording.  
Multi (multitrack recording)  
Use MIDI multitrack recording if you want to  
simultaneously record multiple tracks of different  
channels, such as when recording the output of the  
drum track, arpeggiator or RPPR functions, or when  
recording from an external multitrack sequencer.  
Location  
4. Press the SEQUENCER REC () button, and then  
press the START/STOP (  
) button.  
If the Metronome Setup is still set to the default  
settings, the metronome will sound for a twomeasure  
precount, and then recording will begin.  
Play the keyboard and move controllers such as the  
joystick to record your performance.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Recording Step recording  
An example of realtime recording  
In this example, we’ll assign a drum program to track  
01 and create the following onemeasure drum phrase.  
Step recording  
Step recording is the recording method where you  
specify the duration and strength of each note, and use  
the keyboard to specify the pitch of each MIDI note.  
You can use the Rest button and Tie button of the  
dialog box to input rests and ties.  
Hi hat: F#3  
Snare: E3  
Bass drum: C3  
Step recording is useful when you want to create  
mechanically precise beats, or when you need to  
record a phrase that would be difficult to play by hand  
“in real time,” or when you find it difficult to play  
extremely complicated or rapid passages.  
1. Create a new song, and specify a drum program  
for track 01.  
Use Track Select to select track 01, and verify that you  
hear a drum program. (See page 57)  
2. Access the P0: Play/REC– Preferences page. In  
Recording Setup, specify “Loop All Tracks” and  
set it to M001M001 (see page 117 of the Parameter  
Guide).  
With this setting, measure 1 will be recorded  
repeatedly. The newly recorded data will be added at  
each pass.  
An example of step recording  
In this example, we’ll assign a bass program to track 02  
and steprecord the following twomeasure bass  
phrase.  
3. Set “REC Resolution” to . (See page 58)  
4. Press the SEQUENCER REC () button, and then  
the START/STOP (  
The metronome will sound a twomeasure count‐  
down, and then recording will begin.  
) button.  
Step  
Time:  
Select  
Step  
Time:  
. 3 -  
Measure/  
Beat Tick  
Note  
Key, Button  
C3  
G3  
.
C3 key  
G3 key  
001 / 01.000  
001 / 01.360  
001 / 02.000  
001 / 02.240  
001 / 02.360  
001 / 03.120  
001 / 03.240  
001 / 04.000  
001 / 04.240  
002 / 01.000  
002 / 01.120  
002 / 01.360  
002 / 02.000  
002 / 02.240  
002 / 03.000  
002 / 03.240  
002 / 03.360  
002 / 04.000  
002 / 04.240  
002 / 04.360  
5. As shown in the musical example printed above,  
start by playing the C3 note of the keyboard to  
record the bass drum for one measure.  
6. Next, play the E3 note of the keyboard to record  
the snare for one measure, and then the F#3 note to  
record the hihat.  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Rest button  
C4 key  
C4  
Rest button  
C4 key  
C4  
D3  
Eb3  
E3  
D3 key  
7. Press the START/STOP (  
recording.  
) button to stop  
Eb3 key  
E3 key  
8. Play back the result, and listen to the drum  
performance that you recorded.  
F3  
F3 key  
Rest button  
C3 key  
Press the START/STOP (  
) button. When you’ve  
C3  
finished listening, press the START/STOP (  
button once again to stop playback.  
)
Rest button  
F2 key  
F2  
Tie  
F2  
9. If you’re not satisfied with the result, press the  
COMPARE button to return to the state prior to  
recording, and then rerecord from step 4.  
Note: When you’re finished recording, change the  
Recording Setup back to the normallyused Overwrite  
(P0: Play/REC– Preferences page).  
In addition, access the P0: Play/REC– Play Loop T01–  
08 page, check Track Play Loop for track 01, and set the  
Loop Start Measure and Loop End Measure to 001.  
When you play back, track 01 will repeatedly play the  
first measure.  
Tie button  
F2 key  
Rest button  
A2 key  
A2  
A3  
A3 key  
Rest button  
1. Specify a bass program for track 02. Use Track  
Select to select track 02, and verify that you hear a  
bass program.  
2. Access the P6: Track Edit– Track Edit page.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Creating songs (Sequencer mode)  
3. Set “From Measure” to 001.  
With this setting, step recording will begin from  
measure 1.  
7. As described in steps 5 and 6, input the notes and  
rests that follow the first C3 note.  
In addition to the methods described in steps 5 and 6,  
you can also use the following input methods.  
• To input a rest, press the Rest button. This will  
input a rest of the selected Step Time value.  
• To enter a tie, so that two or more notes of the same  
pitch will be played as a single unbroken note,  
press the Tie button. When you press the Tie  
button, the previouslyinput note will be extended  
by the Step Time length.  
• To delete a note or rest that you input, press the  
Step Back button. The previouslyinput note will be  
deleted.  
• To input a chord, simultaneously press the notes of  
the desired chord. Even if you do not press them  
simultaneously, notes that are pressed before you  
fully remove your hand from all keys on the  
keyboard will be input at the same location.  
4. Press the menu button, and press menu command  
“Step Recording.”  
A dialog box will appear.  
• To audition a note without actually inputting it,  
press the PAUSE ( ) button. Now when you play a  
note on the keyboard, it will sound, but the note  
will not be actually input. In this state, playing a  
key will produce a sound, but will not input a note.  
Press the PAUSE ( ) button once again to cancel  
the recordpause state, and resume inputting notes.  
8. When you are finished recording, press the Done  
button.  
Press the SEQUENCER START/STOP (  
to play back.  
) button  
Access the P0: Play/REC– Play Loop T01–08 page,  
check Track Play Loop for track 02, set Loop Start  
Measure to 001, and Loop End Measure to 002. track  
02 will play measures 1–2 repeatedly.  
9. If you’re not satisfied with the result, press the  
COMPARE button to return to the state prior to  
recording, and then rerecord from step 4.  
5. In “Step Time,” use “Select” to specify the basic  
timing value.  
Input the first C3 note as . (dotted eighth note).  
Use the popup button to the left to select .  
You can choose a note value ranging from a whole note  
() to a 32nd note ().  
Input a dotted note by selecting “.” with the popup  
buttons at right.  
When you begin step recording, all data in the  
track that follows the measure where you began  
recording will be erased. You need to be aware of  
this if you begin step recording from a measure  
midway through the song.  
You can specify “3” to input a triplet. If you want to use  
the unmodified length of the note thats selected at the  
left, choose “–”.  
“Note Duration” indicates the length that the note  
itself will sound. Smaller values will produce a staccato  
note, and larger values will produce a legato note. For  
this example, leave this setting unchanged.  
“Note Velocity” is the velocity (playing strength), and  
larger values will produce a louder volume. Set this to  
Key.  
If you want to copy data into a measure that  
already contains data, perform step recording in  
an empty track, and use the Move Measure or  
Copy Measure menu commands. (See page 179 of  
the Parameter Guide)  
If you want to edit or add to the recorded data, you  
can use the Event Edit or Piano Roll function. (See  
pages 169, 171 of the Parameter Guide)  
If you select Key for this parameter, the velocity of how  
you actually play the keyboard will be input.  
6. On the keyboard, press and then release the first  
C3 note that you want to input.  
The data you input will appear in the display as  
numerical values. On the upper right side, Measure  
001 Beat Tick 01.000 will change to Measure 001 Beat  
Tick 01.360. The next note you input will be placed at  
this location.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording Recording multiple tracks from an external sequencer  
5. In the P3: Track Parameters– MIDI T01–08 and  
T09–16 page, use MIDI Channel to specify the  
MIDI channel of each track.  
Set the MIDI channel of each KROME track to match  
the MIDI channel of each external sequencer track.  
Data from each channel will be recorded on the  
corresponding KROME track.  
Make sure that Status is set to INT or BTH.  
6. Press the LOCATE ( ) button to set the location  
to 001:01.000.  
Recording multiple tracks  
from an external sequencer  
The playback from an external MIDI sequencer  
connected to the KROME can be recorded  
simultaneously using multirecording.  
1. Make sure that the MIDI OUT of your external  
sequencer is connected to the MIDI IN of the  
KROME.  
7. Press the SEQUENCER REC () button to enter  
If it is not connected, turn off the power, make the  
connection, and then turn the power on.  
recordstandby mode.  
8. Start your external sequencer.  
2. In the Global P1: MIDI– MIDI Basic page, set  
MIDI Clock to External MIDI. With this setting,  
the KROME will synchronize to MIDI clock  
messages from your external sequencer.  
The KROMEs sequencer will automatically begin  
recording when it receives the MIDI Start message  
transmitted by your external sequencer.  
Make sure that Receive Ext. Realtime Commands is  
checked.  
9. When playback has ended, stop your external  
sequencer.  
The KROMEs sequencer will automatically stop  
recording when it receives the MIDI Stop message  
transmitted by the external sequencer. You can also  
stop recording by pressing the START/STOP (  
button on the KROME.  
)
After this, you can play back the newly recorded  
sequence:  
10. In the Global P1: MIDI– MIDI Basic page, set  
MIDI Clock to Internal.  
Set Tempo Mode to Auto in the Seq P0: Play/REC–  
Program T01–08 page.  
Press the START/STOP (  
) button to play back.  
3. Create a new song in Sequencer mode, and in the  
P0: Play/REC– Preferences page, check the Multi  
REC check box. Set Recording Setup to Overwrite.  
Note: If the correct sounds are not selected when you  
start playing back, you may be able to solve the  
problem by using the menu command Event Edit (P6:  
Track Edit) to respecify the Program Change data.  
4. Press Play/Rec/Mute to select “REC” for the tracks  
you want to record.  
For the tracks you don’t want to record, select Play or  
Mute.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Creating songs (Sequencer mode)  
2. Select Track 09 in “Track Select,” and record  
parameter changes as desired.  
Note: For this example, select an empty track. If you  
want to record onto a MIDI track that already contains  
data, set the P0: Play/REC– Preferences page  
Recording System Exclusive  
events  
Exclusive messages received from an external MIDI  
device or the parameter changes produced when you  
edit a track parameter or effect parameter can be  
recorded in real time on any track.  
During playback, the exclusive messages you recorded  
will control the track parameters and effect parameters  
of the song, and can be sent to external MIDI devices.  
Note: You can use the menu command Put Effect  
Setting to Track to insert an exclusive event containing  
the parameter settings for an insert effect, master effect  
or total effect into the desired location of a track, so  
that these settings will automatically switch during  
playback.  
GM, XG, and GS exclusive messages can be  
recorded on a track, but the KROMEs tone  
generator will not respond to these messages.  
• Select Track 09 in Track Select. Then press the  
SEQUENCER REC () button and then the START/  
STOP (  
) button, and begin recording.  
Recording internal parameter  
changes  
You can use SysEx for automation of internal KROME  
effects and Program parameters.  
Here we’ll explain how to record internal parameter  
changes. As an example, we’ll explain how parameter  
changes recorded on a different track can be used to  
modify the parameters of the insert effect (IFX1)  
applied to the program of track 1.  
• At the appropriate time while recording, adjust the  
parameter(s) that you want to realtimerecord.  
In the P8: Routing/IFXInsert FX Setup page, select  
another effect for IFX1, and modify the effect  
parameter values.  
Note: In order to record system exclusive messages,  
make sure that the Global P1: MIDI– MIDI Routing  
setting Enable Exclusive is checked. Go to Global  
mode and verify that this is checked.  
Note: In addition to effect parameter changes, you can  
also record parameters such as sound parameters. For  
details on the parameters that can be recorded, please  
see page 191 of the Parameter Guide.  
3. Stop recording.  
Note: Exclusive messages are always recorded on the  
current track selected by Track Select. In this example,  
they are recorded on MIDI track 9.  
Note: In the MIDI event edit page you can view the  
recorded exclusive events and their location. Exclusive  
events are displayed as “EXCL”.  
1. Select the desired program for MIDI track 1, and  
route it to IFX1. Then record a phrase of about  
sixteen measures.  
To view these events, go to the P6: Track Edit– Track  
Edit page, and select the menu command MIDI Event  
Edit. Then in the Set Event Filters dialog box, check  
Exclusive and press the OK button.  
• In the P0: Play/REC– Program T01–08 page, use  
“Program Select” to select the desired program for  
MIDI Track 01.  
• In the P8: Routing/IFX– Routing T01–08 page, route  
the MIDI Track 01 Bus (IFX/Output) Select to IFX1.  
Then in the P8: Routing/IFX– Insert FX Setup page,  
select the desired effect for IFX1.  
Exclusive events cannot be changed to a different  
type of event. Nor can other events be changed  
into exclusive events.  
4. If you go to the page (e.g., P8: Routing/IFX) that  
shows the parameters you adjusted in realtime,  
you can watch the recorded changes be reproduced  
while the song plays back.  
• Select MIDI Track 01 in Track Select. Then press  
the SEQUENCER REC () button and then the  
START/STOP (  
) button, and record a phrase  
of about sixteen measures.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Recording Recording patterns  
Exclusive messages that will be recorded dur-  
ing realtime recording  
The following exclusive messages will be recorded.  
(See page 191 of the Parameter Guide)  
• Exclusive messages received from an external MIDI  
device.  
• Parameter changes in Sequencer mode.  
• Master Volume universal system exclusive  
messages assigned to a foot pedal or knob.  
Recording patterns  
Recording and editing patterns  
You can record patterns in either of two ways; realtime  
recording or step recording. However, pattern realtime  
recording differs from song realtime recording in that  
you can use only Loop type recording.  
You can edit patterns by using Event Edit operations to  
modify the recorded data or insert new data. You can  
also use the Get From Track menu command to  
convert a desired region of performance data from a  
MIDI track into a pattern. Conversely, you can use the  
Put to Track or Copy to Track menu commands to  
place or copy the performance data from a pattern into  
a MIDI track.  
In addition, you can use the “Convert to Drum Track  
Pattern” page menu command to convert a user  
pattern to a drum track pattern. (See “Converting to a  
Using realtime controls to record  
changes in a MIDI tracks pan, EQ,  
volume, and tone adjust  
By controlling the pan, EQ, volume, and tone adjust  
parameters during realtime recording, you can record  
these changes so that they will be reflected during  
playback.  
Use multitrack recording if you want to modify the  
settings of multiple tracks simultaneously.  
Note: Controlling these parameters will transmit  
control change or system exclusive messages. In order  
for this data to be recorded, the Global P1: MIDI– MIDI  
Routing Enable Control Change and Enable Exclusive  
settings must be checked. Go to Global mode and  
verify that these items are checked.  
Note: Use Param. MIDI Out in Global P1: MIDI Basic  
page to specify whether control change messages or  
system exclusive messages will be transmitted when  
you edit the Pan (CC#10), Volume (CC#7), or Send 1/2  
level (CC#93 and CC#91) parameters.  
Recording patterns in real time  
When realtimerecording a pattern, a pattern of the  
specified number of measures will play back  
repeatedly, allowing you to continue adding musical  
data to it.  
1. Create a new song, and as described in  
track to the program that will be used by the  
pattern.  
2. Access the P10: Pattern/RPPR– Pattern Edit page.  
In this case, the Global P1: MIDI– MIDI Routing  
settings Enable Control Change and Enable Exclusive  
must be checked respectively.  
REC Resolution  
Remove Data  
Pattern Select  
Track  
Select  
3. Use Track Select to choose the track that you will  
use to record the pattern.  
The pattern will play back with the program and other  
settings of the selected track.  
4. Set “Pattern (Pattern Bank)” to User, and set  
“Pattern Select” to U00.  
User patterns U00–U99 can be created for each song.  
5. Select the menu command “Pattern Parameter”.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Creating songs (Sequencer mode)  
A dialog box will appear.  
Other way to record  
Using the Drum Track function and  
the arpeggiator to record on multiple  
tracks simultaneously  
You can use multirecording to simultaneously record  
a multitrack performance using the Drum Track  
function and arpeggiator.  
6. Set the number of measures in the pattern to a  
“Length” of 04 (four measures), and set “Meter” to  
a time signature of 4/4. Press the OK button.  
For details, please see “Recording MIDI in real time”  
7. As necessary, set “REC Resolution” to apply  
realtime quantization.  
8. Begin realtime recording.  
Using the RPPR function to record on  
multiple tracks simultaneously  
You can use multirecording to simultaneously record  
a multitrack performance using the RPPR function.  
For details, please see “Creating an RPPR pattern” on  
You can record in the same way as you did when  
recording tracks with Loop All Tracks. (See “Loop All  
Press the SEQUENCER REC () button, and then press  
the START/STOP (  
) button.  
After the precount, pattern recording will begin. Play  
the keyboard and use the joystick and other controllers  
to record your performance.  
When you reach the end of the pattern, the sequencer  
will return to the beginning of the pattern and continue  
recording. If you continue recording, the newly  
recorded data will be added to the previously‐  
recorded data.  
9. If you want to delete specific data while you  
continue pattern recording, you can press the REC  
() button or check the “Remove Data” check box.  
For details refer to step 6 of “Loop All Tracks” on  
10. Press the START/STOP (  
recording.  
) button to stop  
If you made a mistake or decide to rerecord, press the  
START/STOP (  
) button to stop recording, and  
press the COMPARE button. Then begin the pattern  
recording procedure again as in step 8.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Song editing Song  
Song editing  
You can apply a variety of editing procedures to a  
song. The available types of editing procedures are  
listed below.  
measures. The Erase Measure command can also be  
used to remove only a specific type of data. Unlike the  
Delete Measure command, executing the Erase  
Measure command does not cause the subsequent  
measures of musical data to be moved forward.  
Delete Measure: This command deletes the specified  
measures. When the Delete Measure command is  
executed, the musical data following the deleted  
measures will be moved towards the beginning of the  
sequence.  
Insert Measure: This command inserts the specified  
number of measures into the specified track. When you  
execute the Insert Measure command, the musical data  
following the insert location will be moved backward.  
Repeat Measure: This command repeatedly inserts the  
specified measures for the specified number of times.  
When you execute the Repeat Measure command, the  
measures will be inserted following the measure  
specified by To End of Measure, and musical data  
following the inserted data will be moved backward.  
Copy Measure: This command copies the measures of  
musical data specified as the “From” source to the  
beginning of the measure specified as the “To”  
location. When you execute the Copy Measure  
command, the existing track data at the copy  
destination will be rewritten.  
Song  
Load (Save) Template Song: Loads a song template  
into the song (or saves a song as a template) (see  
page 58).  
Copy From Combination/Copy From Program: Copies  
the settings of the specified combination/program to the  
settings of the song thats currently selected.  
Copy From Song: This command copies all of the  
setting data and musical data from the specified song  
to the song thats currently selected.  
Rename song: Renames the selected song. You can  
enter up to 24 characters.  
Delete Song: This command deletes the currently  
selected song.  
FF/REW Speed: This allows you to set the speed at  
which fastforward or rewind will occur when you  
press the FF ( ) button or REW ( ) button.  
GM Initialize: This command transmits a GM System  
On message to the Sequencer mode, resetting all MIDI  
tracks to the GM settings.  
Set Song Length: This command changes the length of  
the specified song. When it is executed, the length of  
the master track will change, and the number of  
measures played will change.  
Move Measure: This command moves the specified  
measures of performance data to another measure.  
When you execute the Move Measure command, the  
performance data following the movesource measures  
will move forward by the corresponding number of  
measures, and the performance data following the  
movedestination will move backward (i.e., later in the  
song) by the same number of measures.  
MIDI tracks  
Create Control Data: This command creates control  
change, aftertouch, pitch bend, or tempo data in the  
specified region of a MIDI track or the master track.  
Erase Control Data: This command erases data such as  
control changes, aftertouch, pitch bend, or tempo in  
the specified range.  
Quantize: This command corrects the timing of MIDI  
data of the type you specify (note data, control change,  
aftertouch, pitch bend, program change, etc.) in the  
track.You can also adjust for swing.  
Tracks  
Step Recording: This allows you to specify the length  
and velocity of each note numerically, and to input  
MIDI data, the pitches, from the keyboard. You can use  
the Rest button and Tie button to enter a rest or tie.  
Event Edit: Here you can edit individual events of  
MIDI data.  
Shift/Erase Note: This command shifts (moves) or  
erases the specified note numbers in a specified MIDI  
track and range of measures.  
Modify Velocity: This command modifies the velocity  
values of notes in the specified area so that they will  
change over time according to a selected curve.  
Create Exclusive Data: This command creates  
universal system exclusive messages or KROME  
parameter change messages in the specified region of a  
MIDI track.  
Erase Exclusive Data: This command erases (deletes)  
universal system exclusive messages or KROME  
parameter change messages from the specified region.  
Piano Roll: Allows you to edit notes, velocities, and  
control changes in the piano roll screen. By selecting  
and dragging events in the screen, you can edit their  
pitch or timing, or delete or add events.  
Erase Track: This command erases the data from the  
specified track. It is not possible to erase the master  
track by itself.  
Copy Track: This command copies musical data from  
the copy source track to the specified track.  
Bounce Track: This command combines the musical  
data of the bounce source and bounce destination  
tracks, and places the combined data in the bounce  
destination. All musical data in the bounce source will  
be erased.  
To delete all types of system exclusive message other  
than those listed above, set the Erase Measure  
commands Kind” field to Exclusive, and execute the  
command.  
Erase Measure: This command erases the specified  
type(s) of musical data from the specified range of  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Creating songs (Sequencer mode)  
Pattern  
Track view edit  
Here we’ll explain track view editing.  
You can visually specify regions of measures in the  
display, and then move, copy, or erase them.  
For each track, event data such as notes, velocities, and  
control changes are displayed (see the illustration  
below).  
Your editing will apply to the highlighted measures.  
The range is shown in FROM MEASURE and To END  
of MEASURE in the upper line.  
You can move, copy, or erase data in units of measures.  
Note: You can’t specify a region of measures unless a  
tool is selected in the toolbox.  
Step Recording (Loop Type): Here you can perform  
step recording into a pattern.  
Event Edit: Here you can edit individual events of the  
musical data in a pattern.  
Piano Roll: You can edit notes, velocities, and control  
changes in the piano roll screen.  
Pattern Parameter: This command specifies the  
number of measures and the time signature of the  
selected pattern.  
Erase Pattern: This command erases the data from the  
selected pattern.  
Copy Pattern: This command copies the settings and  
musical data of the selected pattern to another pattern.  
Bounce Pattern: This command combines the musical  
data of the bounce source pattern and bounce  
destination pattern, and places the combined musical  
data in the bounce destination.  
Get From Track: This command takes musical data  
from a MIDI track and loads it into the specified  
pattern.  
Examples of using the tools  
Example)  
Moving the events of measures 1–2 to measures 5–6  
1. Press the  
tool.  
2. Drag over measures 1–2 to specify the edit region.  
1
Put To Track: This command places a pattern into a  
MIDI track.  
Copy To Track: This command copies the specified  
area of musical data from the specified pattern to a  
MIDI track as musical data.  
Convert to Drum Track Pattern: This command  
converts a user pattern into a user drum track pattern,  
which can then be used with the Drum Track in any  
mode.  
Load Drum Track Pattern: This command loads a user  
Drum Track pattern into a user pattern.  
2
3. Press the  
tool.  
Erase Drum Track Pattern: This erases the specified  
Drum Track pattern.  
4. Press measure 5 (the movedestination measure).  
Alternatively, drag the edit region to measure 5.  
4
3
Indicate the selected region.  
Linked with the identically-  
named parameter of the  
Track Edit page.  
Location bar  
Track name indication  
Control message name indication  
Note events  
Scroll button  
Tool box  
(
Track View Setup)  
Specify the starting  
measure.  
Track View area select  
The bar at left indicates the  
four tracks shown in the track  
view area (in this example,  
tracks 1–4).  
Specify the ending  
measure.  
Move the events of the  
selected measure(s).  
Scroll button  
Copy the events of the  
selected measure(s).  
Erase the events of the  
selected measure(s).  
Setup  
Press this button to open  
the Track View Setup  
dialog box.  
Jump to the piano roll.  
(
Track View Setup)  
Displays the values for the  
control message name indicated  
in the left of the screen  
Pattern  
Displays note events in a  
one-octave range  
Selected region  
Velocity indication  
Track View Setup)  
Scroll button  
(
Track View Setup)  
(
Track view area  
(
Track View Setup)  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Song editing Track view edit  
5. In this example, an event exists in the move‐  
destination measure, so the Drag Move dialog box  
will appear.  
4. While continuing to press, drag to the move‐  
destination track, and release.  
Overwrite will overwrite the source data over the  
destination data (replacing the destination data with  
the source data). Merge will combine the source and  
destination data.  
Press the OK button to execute the move.  
If there are no events in the movedestination  
measures, this dialog box will not appear; the move  
will occur immediately.  
4
If the movedestination measures contain events, the  
Drag Move dialog box will appear.  
Overwrite will overwrite the source data over the  
destination data (replacing the destination data with  
the source data). Merge will combine the source and  
destination data. Press the OK button to execute the  
move.  
If there are no events in the movedestination  
measures, this dialog box will not appear; the move  
will occur immediately.  
The destination is overwritten  
If you choose Overwrite  
by the source data  
If you choose Merge  
The two sets of data are combined  
Example)  
Copying the events of measures 1–2 to measures 3–4  
1. Press the  
tool.  
2. Drag over measures 1–2 to specify the edit region.  
1
Example)  
Moving the data of an entire track  
1. Return the location to the beginning.  
2. Press the  
tool.  
3. Press the left side of measure 1 in the track you  
want to move.  
2
2
3. Press the  
tool.  
4. Press measure 3 (the copydestination measure).  
Alternatively, drag the edit region to measure 3.  
3
4
3
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Creating songs (Sequencer mode)  
The copy will be executed.  
Piano Roll Editing  
Piano Roll editing lets you enter, edit, or delete event  
data such as notes, velocities, and control changes.  
1. In the Seq P6: Track EditTrack View page, specify  
the track and measure that you want to edit.  
2. Select the  
tool in the Track View page or select  
“Piano Roll” from the menu commands to access  
the Piano Roll window. (See illustration below)  
5
3. Make sure that the events you want to edit are  
displayed in the note view area at the upper part  
of the window or in the control view area at the  
lower part of the window.  
• Press the note view area selector, and use the value  
controllers.  
5. If desired, you can press another copydestination  
to copy the data repeatedly.  
Example) Copying the data of an entire track  
You can copy the data of an entire track to another  
track.  
• Select the  
tool, and drag.  
• Enter “Meas” or “#” in the event list.  
In step 2, choose the  
tool.  
• Use the view control zoom buttons to zoomin/out.  
• Switch the view area height selector.  
4. Use the tool box to select a tool, and edit the data.  
Note: If you want to undo an edit, press the Undo  
button.  
5. To play back the events, press the Play button. A  
dialog box will open, and the song will start  
playing. This allows you to check the results of  
your editing.  
6. You can change settings such as the note  
resolution. Press the Setup button, and adjust the  
settings in the Piano Roll Setup dialog box.  
7. When you’re finished editing, press the Done  
button.  
Note events  
The selected note event  
Note view area  
Toolbox:  
Select or move a note.  
Change the length of notes.  
Enter notes.  
Note view area select  
Delete notes.  
Select what will be  
shown in the control  
view area. (In this  
example, velocity values  
are shown.)  
Move the note view  
area that is displayed.  
View area height select  
Switch the note event  
display  
Control view area  
Event list  
Scroll (view control)  
Zoom  
Ends piano roll editing  
The Piano Roll Setup dialog  
Undo cancels the  
preceding edit. Redo  
returns to the state prior  
to Undo.  
Plays back the song. The Piano Roll  
Edit Play dialog box will appear  
when you press this button  
box will appear when you  
press the Setup button  
(->see Piano Roll Setup).  
(
Piano Roll Edit Play).  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Creating an RPPR pattern Creating RPPR data  
Creating an RPPR pattern  
RPPR stands for Realtime Pattern Play/Recording, and  
is a function that lets you assign pattern data to each  
key, and then play back that pattern simply by pressing  
the key where it is assigned. You can realtimerecord  
this performance.  
Creating RPPR data  
1. Create a new song, and choose a drum program for  
track 1.  
2. Access the P10: Pattern/RPPR– RPPR Setup page.  
In this page, the RPPR function is automatically  
turned on.  
3. Select the key where the pattern will be assigned.  
4. Select C#2.  
• As described above, assign several other patterns  
such as P003 and higher.  
11. Press the C#2 key.  
The assigned pattern will play.  
12. Take your finger off the C#2 key, and press the D2  
key.  
You can also change this setting by holding down the  
KEY edit cell and playing a note on the keyboard.  
The pattern will change, and playback will begin. At  
this time, the pattern operation will depend on the  
Sync and Mode setting.  
13. Set KEY to C#2, and set Sync to Measure. Make  
the same setting for D2.  
Now press the notes consecutively. Notice that the  
patterns function in a different way.  
With the Measure setting, patterns will be handled in  
onemeasure units. The second and subsequent  
patterns will start in sync with the end of pattern that  
was previously played.  
Note: C2 and lower keys are used to stop playback,  
and cannot be assigned patterns.  
5. Check Assign” for C#2.  
6. Set “Pattern Bank” to Preset, and set “Pattern  
Select” to P001.  
7. Set “Track” to Track01.  
The selected pattern will be played according to the  
settings (program, etc.) of the track you select here.  
If you change the Mode setting to Once, the entire  
pattern will playback to the end even if you release  
your finger from the keyboard immediately.  
• To stop playback, either press the same key once  
again, or press the C2 or lower key.  
For details on Sync, Mode, and Shift, please see  
page 158 of the Parameter Guide.  
• The assigned keys are also shown in the keyboard  
graphic in the display.  
• Keys where no patterns are assigned can be played  
normally. Use Track Select to select the track you  
want to play. For example you could assign backing  
patterns for drums or bass to keys C#2–B2 and use  
these keys to control the pattern playback, while  
using the keys C3 and above to play a solo  
performance in realtime. It’s a good idea to keep  
your RPPR assignments within a specific range of  
keys.  
8. Assign patterns to other keys.  
For “KEY,” press the INC button to select D2.  
9. Press the Revert button.  
The Assign, Pattern Bank, Pattern Select, and Track  
settings will be given the previously (steps 5–7)  
specified values.  
10. Choose “Pattern Select,” and press the INC  
button to select P002.  
By using Revert in this way, you can work efficiently  
when assigning contiguous (or nearby) pattern  
numbers or tracks.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Creating songs (Sequencer mode)  
RPPR playback  
Lets use the RPPR pattern that you created to perform  
in the P0: Play/REC– Program T01–08 page.  
Realtime-recording an RPPR  
performance  
You can record the realtime performance generated by  
RPPR.  
1. Access the P0: Play/REC– Program T01–08 page.  
RPPR On  
Recording an RPPR performance  
The RPPR playback can be recorded as performance  
data on the track(s) assigned to each pattern. This  
means that you’ll use either single track recording or  
multitrack recording, as appropriate for the track  
settings or performance style of the RPPR you’re  
playing.  
On the other hand, even if RPPR uses only one track,  
use multitrack recording if you will be recording  
another track at the same time.  
You should also select multitrack recording if you  
specified the RPPR data using multiple tracks rather  
than just a single track, and want to simultaneously  
record the performance of multiple tracks.  
2. Check the “RPPR” check box.  
The RPPR function will be turned on. Set the RPPR on/  
off for each song.  
Heres how you can record an RPPR performance and  
a keyboard performance at the same time. Before you  
continue, use the P0: Play/REC– Program T01–08 page  
to assign a drum program to MIDI track 1, and a bass  
program to MIDI track 2.  
1. Assign several keys starting with C#2 to preset  
patterns.  
Check the C#2 Assign setting, and set Pattern Bank to  
Preset and Pattern Select to the desired preset pattern.  
For Track, select MIDI track 1 (Track 01) to which you  
assigned a drum program.  
3. Play the keyboard, and patterns will begin playing  
according to the RPPR settings.  
If you want to play RPPR phrases from an external  
MIDI device, you can control them on the MIDI  
channel of the track thats selected in Track Select.  
• Pattern playback for keys where the Sync setting is  
Beat or Measure will synchronize to the pattern  
playback of the very first key played.  
• If you are playing the pattern in synchronization  
(when Sync is Beat, Measure, or SEQ), the pattern  
will start accurately if you play the note slightly  
earlier than the timing of the beat or measure. Even  
if you play the note slightly later than the beat or  
measure (but no later than a 32nd note), it will be  
considered to have started at the beat or measure,  
and the beginning of the pattern will be  
2. For each RPPR pattern, set Sync to SEQ.  
With a setting of SEQ, RPPR patterns triggered while  
the sequencer is playing or recording will start in  
synchronization with the measures of the sequencer.  
(See page 158 of the Parameter Guide.)  
compressed so that the remainder of the playback  
will be correct.  
4. To turn off the RPPR function, uncheck the RPPR  
check box.  
Play RPPR while a song plays back  
RPPR can be played in synchronization with the  
playback of a song.  
Pattern playback for a key with a Sync setting of SEQ  
will synchronize to the playback of the song. Start the  
song playback, and then press the key. The pattern  
playback will start in synchronization with the  
measures of the song.  
3. Access the P0: Play/REC– Program T01–08 page.  
4. Check the “RPPR” check box, and set Track Select  
to MIDI Track 02.  
Synchronization will be lost if you use the REW  
(
) or FF ( ) buttons while a song is playing.  
If the RPPR check box is selected, the RPPR function  
will be turned on even in pages and tabs other than  
RPPR Setup, allowing you to perform with the RPPR  
function by pressing a key to which an RPPR is  
assigned.  
Note: In the note range C#2 and above, keys to which  
no pattern has been assigned can be played to sound  
the program of the MIDI track selected by Track  
Select.  
Note: If you want RPPR pattern playback to begin at  
the moment that song playback begins, it is a good  
idea to insert an empty measure containing no musical  
data before the song playback begins.  
Note: If the song is stopped, the pattern will  
synchronize to the timing of the arpeggiator.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Creating an RPPR pattern Realtime-recording an RPPR performance  
5. Since you want the tracks you play via RPPR and  
the track you play from the keyboard to be  
recorded at the same time, check the Multi REC  
check box.  
Note: If Recording Setup is set to Loop All Tracks, it  
will not be possible to select Multi REC. Set the  
Recording Setup to Overwrite (see page 60).  
6. Press the SEQUENCER REC () button to enter  
recordready mode.  
7. For the tracks you will be recording (MIDI Track 1,  
2), press Play/Rec/Mute to make them indicate  
REC.  
Make sure that the tracks you’re not recording are  
indicated as Play or Mute.  
8. Press the LOCATE ( ) button to set the location  
to 001:01.000.  
9. Press the START/STOP (  
) button, and then  
press a key that plays an RPPR pattern.  
Then press the key where the RPPR pattern playback is  
assigned.  
If the key where the RPPR is assigned is pressed  
during the precount before recording, RPPR pattern  
playback will start the moment that recording begins  
after the precount.  
Record the RPPR pattern playback and keyboard  
performance.  
When recording the playback of patterns triggered  
by RPPR, the timing of the recorded events may be  
slightly skewed. If this occurs, try setting REC  
Resolution to a setting other than Hi.  
10. When you are finished performing, press the  
START/STOP (  
) button.  
Recording will end, and the sequencer will return to  
the location where recording began.  
If you made a mistake during your performance or  
would like to rerecord, you can use the Compare  
function (press the COMPARE button) to rerecord as  
many times as you wish.  
11. If you want to record other tracks, uncheck the  
Multi REC (See step 5) or “RPPR” (See step 4)  
check boxes as necessary.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating songs (Sequencer mode)  
Creating and playing a Cue List  
A cue list allows you to play multiple songs in  
succession. You can create the individual sections of a  
song, such as the intro, melody A, melody B, chorus,  
and ending, and then use a Cue List to assemble these  
sections into a song by specifying the desired order  
and the number of repetitions for each section. You can  
then edit the cue list to efficiently try out different  
structures for your song.  
3. Set the last step to End.  
If you set this to Continue to Step01, the cue list will  
play back repeatedly.  
4. In “Repeat,” specify the number of times that the  
song for that step will be repeated. For this  
example, set Step 02 S001: VERSE to 02.  
5. Specify whether effect settings will also be  
switched when the song at each step is played  
back. If you want effect settings to change, check  
the “Load FX?” check box.  
For this example, check the “Load FX?” check box for  
Step 01, which loads the effects.  
6. To play back at the tempo that was specified for  
each song, set “Tempo Mode” to Auto.  
You can also use this as a jukebox function that will  
play back completed songs in the order you specify.  
Cue List  
Step  
01  
Song  
Repeat  
02  
S000: Intro  
Intro  
Intro  
A
A
A
A
B
B
Chorus  
02  
S001:  
S002:  
A
B
02  
Chorus  
Chorus Chorus  
03  
01  
04 S003: Chorus  
02  
A(Solo) Chorus Chorus Chorus Ending Ending  
If this is set to Manu (Manual), playback will use the  
tempo specified by “=”.  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
S001:  
S002:  
A
B
02  
01  
S003: Chorus  
S001: A (Solo)  
S003: Chorus  
02  
01  
03  
10 S004: Ending  
02  
Creating a cue list  
Each unit in a cue list is called a “step,” and each step  
contains a song number and the number of repeats.  
For example, suppose you’ve created the songs S000:  
INTRO, S001: VERSE, and S002: CHORUS. Lets use a  
cue list to connect these songs together.  
1. Access the Seq P11: Cue List page.  
With the default settings, song S000 will be selected for  
“Step” 01, and End will be selected for “Step” 02.  
7. When you press the SEQUENCER START/STOP  
(
) buttonh, playback will begin from the  
step that is specified as the “Current Step.”  
Song Position Bar  
Step: The arrow will indicate the step that’s  
currently playing. indicates the currently selected  
“Step.” The Song Position Bar located below the  
song name shows the progression of the song  
within the step. While stopped, you can specify the  
Current Step and the display will change  
accordingly.  
2. Add a song to the Step area.  
Select the “Song” for Step 02, and press the Insert  
button. A song will be added to step 02. Press the  
popup button, and then choose S001: VERSE from the  
list.  
In the same way, select the Step 03 “Song,” and press  
the Insert button to add a song to Step 03. Set this to  
S002: CHORUS.  
When you press the Cut button, the selected step will  
be deleted and temporarily saved. When you press the  
Insert button, the song that was cut will be insert at the  
selected step.  
M****: Indicates the starting measure of that step.  
Meter: Indicates the currentlyplaying time  
signature. This cannot be changed.  
• The name of a cue list can be specified by the  
Rename Cue List menu command.  
• When you play the keyboard, the program of the  
track selected by Track Select will sound. If a  
different program is selected for each song, the  
If you press the Copy button, the selected step will be  
copied. If you press the Insert button, the copied step  
will be inserted.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Saving your song Converting a cue list to a song  
program that’s specified for the song that’s  
currently playing will play.  
Saving your song  
In order to ensure that the data you create is  
reproduced faithfully, we recommend that you save  
your data by using Save All so that the programs will  
also be saved. However if you have not changed the  
program numbers or sounds used in your song, saving  
only the songrelated data (.SNG) will minimize the  
size of the data.  
Converting a cue list to a song  
The Convert to Song menu command lets you convert  
a cue list to a single song.  
For details, please see “Convert to Song (Convert Cue  
List to Song)” on page 189 of the Parameter Guide.  
When you turn off the power, the Sequencer mode  
settings, the recorded songs, and the user pattern  
data will be lost.  
1. Insert an SD card in the SD card slot.  
With the card label facing upward, insert the connector  
end of the card into the SD card slot and press it in  
until you hear a click.  
Make sure that the card is oriented correctly when  
you insert it. Forcing it in the wrong direction may  
damage the slot or the card, and the data may be  
lost.  
2. Press the WRITE button.  
The Save Songs and Cue Lists Data dialog box will  
appear. If you want to change the name, adjust the  
appropriate settings (see page 117).  
3. Press the WRITE button once again to save (write)  
the data.  
If data of the same name already exists, as message will  
ask whether you want to overwrite the existing data. If  
you want to overwrite the existing data, press the OK  
button.  
If the savedestination directory is something  
other than a DOS directory (e.g., if you’re in a  
directory shown by opening a .PCG or .SNG file),  
a message such as “File/path not found” will  
appear, and you won’t be able to save the data. If  
this occurs, move to Media mode, select the  
appropriate savedestination (i.e., a DOS  
directory), and then execute “Save All” or “Save  
SEQ.”  
Saving a template song  
If you want the programs, track parameters, effect  
settings, and arpeggiator settings etc. used by a song to  
be saved as a Template song, use the Save Template  
Song menu command to save these settings.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Creating songs (Sequencer mode)  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Effects  
An overview of the KROMEs effects  
You can choose from 193 different types of high‐  
quality digital effects. The KROME provides five insert  
effects, two master effects, and one total effect, together  
with a mixer section that controls the routing of these  
effects. All of these are stereo in/out.  
Specific parameters of these effects can also be  
controlled in real time from the KROMEs controllers  
or via MIDI messages using Dynamic Modulation  
(Dmod), by MIDI/Tempo Sync, or by using a common  
LFO to apply synchronized changes to multiple  
modulation effects.  
Total Effect  
The total effect (TFX) is stereoin/stereoout. The Dry  
(unprocessed) side of the Wet/Dry parameter sends the  
stereo input sound directly to the stereo output. The  
way that the Wet (processed) side is output depends on  
the type of effect, as follows.  
+
+
Effect  
Effect  
Mono In - Mono Out  
Mono In - Stereo Out  
Wet  
Effect  
Effect  
Stereo In - Stereo Out  
Note: The Parameter Guide includes block diagrams  
for each individual effect, which include the effects  
input/output structure. (See page 251 of the Parameter  
Guide)  
Effect I/O  
Insert Effects  
Insert Effects (IFX 1–5) are stereoin/stereoout. If you  
select Dry (unprocessed) for the Wet/Dry parameter,  
the stereo input signal will be output in stereo without  
being processed by the effect. If you select Wet (effect  
applied), the processed signal will be output in one of  
the following ways:  
+
+
Effect  
Effect  
Mono In - Mono Out  
Mono In - Stereo Out  
Wet  
Effect  
Effect  
Stereo In - Stereo Out  
Master Effects  
Master Effects MFX1 and MFX2 are stereoin/stereo‐  
out. Send1 and Send2 determine the send level to the  
Master Effects.  
With Master effects, only the Wet (processed) signal  
will be output. The output signals from the Master  
Effects are routed to the L/R bus with the output level  
specified by Return1 and Return2. These output  
signals are mixed with the output signals from the bus  
specified by Bus (IFX/Output) Select (P8– Routing  
page in each mode) L/R, or with the output signals  
from the bus specified by Bus (IFX/Output) Select (P8–  
Insert FX Setup page in each mode) L/R, then routed to  
the total effect.  
Selecting “000: No Effect” will mute the output. The  
processed signal will be output in one of the following  
ways, according to the type of effects.  
+
+
Effect  
Effect  
Mono In - Mono Out  
Mono In - Stereo Out  
Wet  
Effect  
Effect  
Stereo In - Stereo Out  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Using Effects  
Effects in each mode  
Program mode  
For programs, you can use insert effects to process the  
final sound in the same way that you use the Filter,  
Driver, Amplifier, and EQ (equalizer) to process the  
sound from the oscillators (OSC 1 & 2). Next, the  
master effects are used to create overall ambience such  
as reverb, and you use the total effect to make final  
adjustments. You can apply an effect in the same way  
to the output of a drum track program. All of these  
settings can be made independently for each program.  
Combination and Sequencer modes  
In Combination and Sequencer modes, you can use the  
track EQ and insert effects to process the sound of each  
timbre/track program. Then you can use the master  
effects to create overall ambience, and use the total  
effect to make final adjustments.  
In Combination mode, you can adjust these settings for  
each combination, and in Sequencer mode you can  
adjust them for each song.  
In Sequencer mode, you can switch between effects or  
modify the effect parameters and record these changes,  
so that effects will switch automatically or effect  
parameters will be modified automatically as the song  
plays back.  
Program mode  
Send  
Return  
Oscillator1  
Oscillator2  
Filter1  
Filter2  
Driver1  
Driver2  
Amplifier1  
Amplifier2  
Master Effect 1, 2  
OUTPUT  
L/MONO, R  
EQ  
Insert Effect 1–5  
Total Effect  
EQ  
Drum Track  
Combination and Sequencer modes  
Send  
Return  
Master Effect 1, 2  
OUTPUT  
L/MONO, R  
Timbre 1 /MIDI Track 1  
EQ  
Insert Effect 1–5  
Total Effect  
Timbre 16 /MIDI Track 16  
EQ  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Routing effect settings Program Effects settings  
Routing effect settings  
The insert effects, master effects, and total effect have  
the same structure in all modes, but the routing  
settings will determine how the oscillators of a  
program or the timbres of a combination or track of a  
song will be sent to each insert effect, master effect or  
total effect. In the pages that follow, we will explain  
how you can adjust routing settings and effect settings  
in each mode.  
Insert effects  
5. Access the Prog P8: Routing/IFX– Insert FX Setup  
page.  
Program Effects settings  
Routing  
1. Access the Prog P8: Routing/IFX– Routing page.  
6. Choose the effect type that you want to use for  
each insert effect IFX1–5.  
When you press the popup button, all effects will be  
displayed, organized into ten categories. Use the pages  
located to the left and right to select a category, and  
choose an effect from the desired category on the  
display.  
You can use the Copy Insert Effect menu command to  
copy effect settings from another program etc. Also,  
you can use Swap Insert Effect to exchange (for  
example) IFX1 and IFX5.  
7. Press the On/Off button to turn on the insert  
effect.  
Each time you press this button, the insert effect will  
toggle on/off. When Off, the result will be the same as  
when 000: No Effect is selected; the sound will be  
output without being processed by the insert effect.  
2. Use Bus (IFX/Output) Select to specify the bus  
where the oscillator output will be sent. If you  
want the oscillator output to be input to insert  
effect 1, choose IFX1.  
L/R: The output will not be sent to the total effect. After  
bypassing the total effect, the sound will be sent to  
AUDIO OUTPUT L/MONO and R.  
8. Make Chain settings.  
If the Chain check box is checked, the insert effect will  
be connected in series. Since the output of the oscillator  
is being sent to IFX1 in step 2, adjusting settings as  
shown in the diagram above step 6, would connect all  
five insertion effects IFX1 IFX2 IFX3 in series, so  
that these effects would be inserted into the output of  
the oscillator.  
9. Adjust settings for Pan: #8, Bus (Bus Select), Send  
1, Send 2 and FX Ctrl for the sound after it has  
passed through the insert effects.  
If you’ve specified a chain, the settings that follow the  
last IFX in the chain will be valid (except for FX Ctrl).  
Pan: #8: Sets the pan of the IFX output.  
Bus (Bus Select): Specifies the output destination.  
Normally you will set this to L/R.  
Send 1, Send 2: Sets the send levels to the master  
effects. For this example, set this to 127.  
IFX1–5: The output will be sent to insert effect IFX 1–5.  
Off: Choose this if you want the signal to be connected  
in series to the master effects at the send levels  
specified by Send 1 (to MFX1) and Send 2 (to MFX2).  
3. OSC MFX Send specifies the send level from each  
oscillator to the master effects.  
This can be set only when Bus (IFX/Output) Select is  
either L/R or Off.  
If Bus (IFX/Output) Select is set to IFX1–5, the send  
level to the master effects is set by Send1 and Send2  
(Insert FX Setup page) after the signal passes through  
the insert effects.  
4. FX Control Bus sends the output of oscillator 1 and  
2 to the FX Control bus. Use this if you want the  
audio input to the effect to be controlled by a  
different sound.  
You can use the two FX Control buses to control effects  
freely. For details, please see “FX Control Buses” on  
page 238 of the Parameter Guide.  
FX Control Bus: The FX Control Buses lets you create  
effects “sidechains.” Sidechains let you control an  
effect with one audio signal (the sidechain), while the  
effect processes a completely different audio signal.  
This is convenient for use with vocoders, compressors  
and limiters, gates, etc. For details, please see “FX  
Control Buses” on page 238 of the Parameter Guide.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Using Effects  
10. Access the P8: Routing/IFX– Insert FX Setup page,  
and edit the parameters of the insert effect you  
selected.  
Master effects  
11. The input levels to the master effects are set by  
the Send 1, 2 levels (step 3 or 9). If Send 1, 2 are  
zero, the master effects will not apply. Send 1  
corresponds to MFX1, and Send 2 corresponds to  
MFX2.  
Press the IFX 1–5 tabs and edit the parameters.  
Effect Parameters  
P (Effect Preset)  
Effect On/Off  
12. Access the Prog P9: MFX/TFX/LFO– Routing page.  
Wet/Dry  
Effect 1 On/Off: Turns the insert effect on/off. This is  
linked with the on/off setting on the Insert FX Setup  
page.  
P (Effect Preset): Selects an effect preset. The KROMEs  
internal memory contains “effect presets” which are  
parameter settings for each effect from 001: Stereo  
Compressor through 193: Early Reflections.  
Effect parameters you edit are saved as part of each  
program, but effect presets allow you to save and recall  
your favorite parameter settings for each effect. If  
you’ve come up with an effect setting you like, use the  
menu command Write FX Preset to save it as a preset  
so that you can easily recall it in a different program or  
mode.  
13. In MFX1 and MFX2, select the type of each master  
effect.  
The procedure is the same as when selecting an insert  
effect (see step 6).  
Note: You can only select a doublesize effect for  
MFX1. For details, please see “Doublesize effects,”  
above.  
14. Press the On/Off button to turn on the master  
effect.  
Each time you press this button, the master effect will  
toggle on/off. When Off, the output of the master effect  
will be muted.  
15. Use Return 1 and Return 2 to adjust the output  
levels of the master effects.  
Note: For each effect, the Wet value of the Wet/Dry  
parameter is the output level of the effect. The return  
value is multiplied with this (“Return” = 127 will be  
x1.0) to determine the actual output level of the master  
effect.  
16. Select the MFX1 and MFX2 pages, and set the  
parameters for each selected effect.  
For details on the parameters of each effect, see  
page 251 and following in the Parameter Guide.  
Double-size effects  
Doublesize effects (172: St.Mltband Limiter – 193:  
Early Reflections) use twice as much space as other  
effects.  
You can use doublesize effects for insert effects IFX1–  
IFX4 and master effect MFX1. However, because it  
takes up two units of effects power, the nextnumbered  
effect will be unavailable. For example, if you’ve  
selected a doublesize effect for IFX1, you won’t be able  
to use IFX2. If you’ve selected a doublesize effect for  
MFX1, you won’t be able to use MFX2.  
For details on the “Program Effects settings” step 10.  
Total Effect  
17. If you use Bus (IFX/Output) Select to choose L/R  
as the oscillator output, or if you set the postIFX  
Bus to L/R, the signal will be input to the total  
effect.  
An example of when a doublesize effect is selected for IFX1  
and IFX4  
The output from the master effect is input to the total  
effect via the Return 1 and Return 2 settings of the Prog  
P9: MFX/TFX/LFO– Routing page.  
After being processed through the total effect, the  
signal is output from the AUDIO OUTPUT L/MONO  
and R outputs.  
18. Access the Prog P9: MFX/TFX/LFO– Routing page.  
19. Choose the desired total effect for TFX. The  
procedure is the same as when selecting an insert  
effect. (See step 6)  
You can’t use a doublesize effect as the total effect.  
For details, please see “Doublesize effects,” above.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Routing effect settings Using effects in Combinations and Songs  
20. Press the On/Off button to turn the total effect on.  
4. Press the FX Control 1–8 tabs to access the FX  
Control T01–08 pages.  
Bus (IFX/Output) Select is the same as in the Routing  
T01–08 page. You can set it from either page.  
FX Control Bus sends the output of the timbre to an FX  
Control bus. Use this when you want the audio input  
to an effect to be controlled by another sound. There  
are two FX Control buses, which gives you a great deal  
of freedom for controlling effects freely. For details,  
please see “FX Control Buses” on page 238 of the  
Parameter Guide.  
The total effect will toggle on/off each time you press  
the button. If this is Off, the result will be the same as if  
000: No Effect is selected. The input sound will be  
output without being processed by the total effect.  
21. Access the TFX page, and edit the parameters of  
each effect to adjust the final sound as desired.  
For details on the “Program Effects settings”, see step  
10.  
Using effects in Combinations  
and Songs  
In Combination, and Sequencer modes, you can  
specify the routing of each timbre/track to the insert  
effects, master effects and total effect. These settings  
are adjusted in the same way in each of these modes.  
We will be using the example of Combination mode in  
our explanation here.  
Insert effects  
5. Access the Combi P8: Routing/IFX– Insert FX  
Setup page.  
Routing  
1. Access the Combi P8: Routing/IFX– Routing T01–  
08 page.  
6. Select an insert effect in IFX1–5 and edit the  
settings.  
7. Access the IFX1–5 pages to edit the individual  
effect parameters.  
These settings can be adjusted in the same way. (See  
page 79.)  
You can use MIDI to control dynamic modulation  
(Dmod) for each effect, the postIFX pan (CC#8),  
and Send 1 and Send 2 levels.  
An asterisk “*” is shown at the right of Ch01–Ch16  
for the channel number of tracks routed to IFX. If  
you’ve routed multiple tracks that have different  
MIDI channel settings, this specifies the channel  
on which they will be controlled.  
2. Use “Bus (IFX/Output) Select” to specify the bus  
where each timbre will be output. Choose IFX1 if  
you want to send the output of a timbre to insert  
effect 1.  
The routing, insert effects, and chain settings are  
shown graphically on the upper part of the page. In  
this example, T01 (timbre 1) uses IFX1 and 2. T02 uses  
IFX2, T03 uses IFX3 and 4, T02 and T05 use IFX4, and  
T06 and T07 use IFX5.  
Master effects and Total effect  
These settings can be adjusted in the same way as on  
3. Use Send1 and Send2 to specify the send level of  
each timbre to the master effects.  
This can be set only if Bus (IFX/Output) Select is set to  
L/R or Off.  
You can control these effects via MIDI on the “Ctrl  
Ch.” The specified MIDI channel will control  
dynamic modulation (Dmod) for the Master and  
Total Effect.  
Note: The actual send level is determined by  
multiplying this by the Send 1 or Send 2 settings for  
oscillators 1 and 2 within the program selected by the  
timbre. If the program parameter Send 1 or Send 2 is  
set to 0, the resulting level will still be 0 even if you  
raise this send level.  
If Bus (IFX/Output) Select is set to IFX1–5, the send  
levels to the master effects are set by Send1 and Send2  
(Insert FX Setup page) following the insert effects.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Effects  
Dynamic modulation, Common FX LFO  
When you move the joystick away from yourself and  
press the SW1 button, the feedback level will increase,  
and the delay sound will continue for a longer time.  
The Amt setting specifies the feedback level that will  
be in effect when the SW1 button is pressed. If Amt is  
set to –10, pressing the SW1 button will reduce the  
feedback level to 0.  
Dynamic modulation (Dmod)  
Dynamic modulation (Dmod) lets you use MIDI  
messages or the KROMEs controllers to modulate  
specific effect parameters in realtime.  
Dynamic modulation to control an effect pa-  
rameter in realtime  
As an example, lets set up dynamic modulation to  
control an effect parameter in realtime.  
Finally, we can use the MIDI/Tempo Sync  
function to synchronize the delay time to the  
arpeggiator tempo.  
6. Set BPM to MIDI.  
7. For L, C, and R, set the Delay Base Note and Times  
as desired.  
For this example, set Delay Base Note to and Times  
to x1 so that the effect will be easily understandable.  
The delay time will repeat at an interval of a 8th note.  
1. As described in the procedure for “Program  
Effects settings” on page 79, set IFX1 to 078: L/C/R  
BPM Delay. Verify that you’re hearing a delay  
effect.  
2. Access the Prog P8: Routing/IFX– IFX1 page.  
Now, we can set the Dmod to change the delay  
level via the Joystick  
3. Set Input Level Dmod to +100.  
4. Set Source to JS+Y: #01.  
The delay sound will disappear.  
The input level to the effect can be controlled by the  
joystick. As you move the joystick away from yourself,  
the delay sound will gradually increase.  
8. Rotate the TEMPO knob, and the delay time will  
change.  
When you (push the joystick away from yourself and)  
press the SW1 button, the feedback level will rise, and  
the delays will become longer.  
9. When you turn on the ARP button, arpeggiator  
will begin playing.  
Select any desired arpeggiator. When you rotate the  
TEMPO knob, the delay time will change in  
synchronization with the changing tempo of the  
arpeggiator.  
In addition, we can use Dmod to change the feed-  
back level via SW1  
5. In the P1: Basic/Controllers– Controllers Setup  
page, set the SW1 function to SW1 Mod.CC#80,  
and the Mode to Toggle.  
Depending on the specific delay effect, you may  
hear some unexpected noise if you change the  
tempo while the delay is sounding. This is because  
the delay sound becomes discontinuous, and is not  
a malfunction.  
Choose P8: Routing/IFX– IFX1 page. Set the Feedback  
Src to SW1: #80, and set Amt to +30.  
For some effects, you can synchronize the LFO  
frequency to the tempo. Set the effect parameters  
MIDI Sync to On, and BPM to MIDI. For details,  
please see page 236 of the Parameter Guide.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Dynamic modulation, Common FX LFO Common FX LFO  
Common FX LFO  
Two Common FX LFOs are available for modulation  
effects, such as choruses, filters, phasers, etc. Normally,  
the phase of the LFOs of multiple modulationtype  
effects will not be synchronized even if you set them to  
the identical Frequency, since the LFOs are being  
generated independently.  
However, if you select Common 1 or Common 2 for the  
LFO Type parameter of a modulationtype effect, the  
effect will use the one of the common LFOs instead of  
its own individual LFO. This allows you to use a single  
Common FX LFO to control two or more modulation‐  
type effects such as flanger, phaser, or autopan with  
the same phase. Since you can make independent  
settings for LFO waveform and phase offset for each  
effect, you are free to create complex combinations of  
effects.  
Common FX LFO  
LFO Type = Common1  
Stereo Flanger  
Common FX LFO1  
Frequency[Hz]  
Reset  
Waveform = Triangle  
Phase Offset = 0 [deg]  
Generate original LFO waveform  
Stereo Phaser  
Waveform = Sine  
Phase Offset = 0 [deg]  
Stereo Auto Pan  
Waveform = Sine  
Phase Offset = +90 [deg]  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using Effects  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Arpeggiator function  
Using the arpeggiator while you play  
The arpeggiator is a function that automatically  
Arpeggiator on/off  
• Each time you press the ARP button, the  
arpeggiator will be switched on/off.  
generates arpeggios (patterns of individual notes  
derived from a chord). Most arpeggiators produce an  
arpeggio when you play a chord on the keyboard.  
When the arpeggiator is turned on (the LED will light  
up) and the selected arpeggio pattern will begin when  
you play the keyboard.  
Note: The on/off status is saved when you write each  
The chord you played on  
the keyboard is sounded as  
an arpeggio (broken chord)  
program.  
In Combination and Song modes, the arpeggios  
may not start when you press the ARP button ‐  
depending on the saved settings. You may need to  
play a keyboard (see page 90).  
The KROMEs arpeggiator is also polyphonic, and can  
produce a variety of chordal transformations or  
phrases based on the pitch or timing of the notes you  
play on the keyboard. These functions let you use the  
arpeggiator to play a wide range of patterns including  
drum or bass phrases, and guitar or keyboard backing  
riffs. It is also effective to use the arpeggiator as part of  
the sounddesign process when creating subtly‐  
moving pads, synthsounds, or sound effects.  
The KROMEs Dual Arpeggiator feature lets you use  
two simultaneous arpeggio patterns in Combination  
mode, and Sequencer mode. You can take advantage of  
this in many ways, including a separate arpeggio  
pattern for a drum program, and another applied to a  
bass program, or using a keyboard split or velocity to  
switch between two arpeggio patterns.  
Adjusting the arpeggiator tempo  
• Rotate the TEMPO knob or TAP button  
to adjust the tempo.  
The “=” display in the upper right of  
the LCD will change. The tempo can be  
adjusted over a range of 40.00–300.00  
bpm. The LED will blink in time with  
the specified tempo.  
As an alternative to using the TEMPO  
knob or TAP button, you can also set the  
tempo by selecting “=” in the display,  
using the numeric keys 0–9 to enter the tempo, and  
pressing the ENTER button. You can also set the  
tempo by using the VALUE controllers. The LED  
will blink in synchronization with the tempo you  
specify.  
The KROME provides five preset arpeggio patterns:  
the standard UP, DOWN, ALT1, ALT2, and  
RANDOM. You can also create and store 1,028 of your  
own user patterns. The factory settings contain a wide  
variety of arpeggio patterns stored in these user  
locations (see page 211 of the Parameter Guide).  
Note: The tempo setting is also saved when you write a  
program.  
Note: The arpeggio playback speed is affected by the  
Reso setting (Prog P0: Play– Arpeggiator page), or  
Resolution (P7: ARP/DT– ARP Setup page).  
Using the arpeggiator in  
Program mode  
1. Press the PROG button to enter Program mode,  
and select a program. For details, please see  
2. Press ARP button (the LED will light) to turn on  
the arpeggiator. Arpeggios will begin sounding  
when you play the keyboard.  
If the Global P1: MIDI– MIDI Basic page MIDI  
Clock parameter is set to External MIDI, External  
USB, or set to Auto and MIDI Clock messages are  
being received, the display will indicate “=” EXT,  
meaning that the KROME is synchronized to an  
external MIDI device. In this case, you won’t be  
able to change the tempo by using the KROME.  
3. As described in the following sections “Using  
function,” move the controllers or modify the  
parameters to change the way that the arpeggios  
are played.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Arpeggiator function  
Turning the knob toward the left will shorten the  
pattern length (“Length”) by half. Turning the knob  
toward the right will shorten the interval of the  
arpeggiated notes (“Resolution”) by half. When the  
knob is in the center position (12 o’clock), the pat‐  
tern will be as specified by the parameters Length  
and Resolution (Global P6: Arpeggio Pattern–  
Setup page).  
Using knobs 1–4 to control the  
arpeggiator  
• You can control the arpeggiator by pressing the  
SELECT button to select ARP and then turning  
knobs 1–4.  
If the arpeggio pattern selected by “Pat (Pattern  
Select)” is one of the preset arpeggio patterns P0–  
P4, turning the knobs will not produce any  
change. These adjustments are available only if a  
user arpeggio pattern U0000 (INT)–U1027 (USER)  
is selected.  
Note: The state of the knobs is saved when you write  
the program.  
Note: Depending on the program thats selected, using  
knob 4 may not produce any effect.  
Adjusting the duration of the arpeggiated  
notes  
• Turn knob 1 to adjust the duration of the  
Selecting an arpeggio pattern and  
specifying its function  
In the Prog P0: Play– Arpeggiator page you can select  
an arpeggio pattern and specify how the arpeggiator  
will function.  
arpeggiated notes.  
Rotating the knob toward the left will shorten the  
duration of the notes, and rotating it toward the  
right will lengthen the duration of the notes. At the  
center position (12 o’clock), the note length will be  
as specified by the program parameter: Gate (Prog  
P7: ARP/DT– ARP Setup page).  
• In Prog P0: Play, press the ARP tab to access the  
Prog P0: Play– Arpeggiator page.  
Note: The knob setting is saved when you write each  
program.  
Note: It is effective to use the SELECT button to select  
TONE, and then adjust knob 4 (RELEASE).  
Changing the dynamics of the arpeggiated  
notes  
• Turn knob 2 to adjust the dynamics of the  
arpeggiated notes.  
Turning the knob toward the left will make the  
notes softer, and turning it toward the right will  
make the notes stronger. When the knob is in the  
center position (12 o’clock), the value of the pro‐  
gram parameter Velocity (Prog P7: ARP/DT– Arp  
Setup page) will be used.  
Selecting an arpeggio pattern  
An arpeggio pattern can be selected from preset  
arpeggio patterns P0–P4 and user arpeggio patterns  
U0000(INT)–U1027(USER). The factory settings  
U0000(INT)–U0899(INT), U0900(USER)–U1027(USER)  
contain a wide variety of preloaded user arpeggio  
patterns.  
Note: The state of the knob is saved when you write  
the program.  
Note: It is effective to use the SELECT button to select  
TONE, and then adjust knobs 1 (CUTOFF), 2  
(RESONANCE), and 3 (EG INT).  
• Choose Pattern, and use the VALUE dial, INC/DEC  
buttons, and popup menu to select an arpeggio  
pattern.  
Adding a shuffle feel to the arpeggio pattern  
• If you turn knob 3, the timing of the arpeggiated  
notes on evennumbered beats will be shifted  
forward or backward.  
User arpeggio patterns can also be selected by using  
the numeric keys 0–9 to input the pattern number  
and then pressing the ENTER button.  
Turning the knob toward the left will speed up the  
timing of the evennumbered beats. When the knob  
is in the center position (12 o’clock), the timing will  
be as specified by the program parameter Swing  
(Global P6: Arpeggio PatternSetup page).  
P0: UP  
UP  
Changing the number of steps in the  
arpeggio pattern  
• By turning knob 4 (STEP), you can change the  
number of steps in the arpeggio pattern.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Using the arpeggiator while you play Using the arpeggiator in Program mode  
P1: DOWN  
Sounding an arpeggio in the order of the  
pitches in the chord you played  
DOWN  
You can select whether the notes of the arpeggio will  
be sounded in the order of the pitches in the chord you  
played (regardless of the order in which you actually  
played the notes), or in the order in which you played  
the notes.  
• Press the “Sort” check box in the display to make  
this setting.  
P2: ALT1  
Checked: the arpeggio will play each note in the  
order of its pitch, regardless of the order in which  
you actually played the notes.  
ALT1  
Unchecked: the arpeggio will trigger each note in  
the order in which you actually played the notes.  
Sort  
OFF, UP  
P3: ALT2  
Sort  
ALT2  
ON, UP  
1
3
2
4
P4: RANDOM  
RANDOM  
Setting the arpeggio to continue playing  
even after you have taken your hand off the  
keyboard  
You can select whether the arpeggio will continue  
playing when you take your hand off the keyboard, or  
whether the arpeggio will stop.  
• Press the “Latch” check box to make this setting.  
Changing the note value of the arpeggiated  
notes  
The Resolution parameter lets you set the note value  
Checked: The arpeggio will continue playing even  
after you remove your hand from the keyboard.  
Unchecked: The arpeggio will stop playing when  
you remove your hand from the keyboard.  
of the arpeggiated notes, over a range fromꢄ 3 .  
• Press Resolution, and use the VALUE dial, INC/  
DEC buttons, or popup menu to select the desired  
arpeggio note value.  
Synchronizing the arpeggiator to your  
keyboard timing  
You can specify whether the arpeggio will begin at the  
moment you play the keyboard, or whether it will  
always play in synchronization to the MIDI clock  
tempo.  
• Press the “Key Sync.” check box to make this  
setting.  
Selecting the octave range where the  
arpeggio is sounded  
Use the “Octave” radio buttons to specify the range of  
octaves where the arpeggio will play.  
• Press an “Octave” radio button to make your  
selection.  
Checked: The arpeggio pattern will start from the  
beginning when you press a key. This setting is suit‐  
able when you want the arpeggio to start from the  
beginning of the measure as you are playing in real‐  
time.  
Octave: 4  
UP  
Unchecked: The arpeggiator will synchronize to the  
MIDI clock timing.  
Sounding both the arpeggio notes and the  
notes you play  
• Press the “Keyboard” check box to adjust this  
setting.  
Checked: The notes you play on the keyboard and  
the notes played by the arpeggiator will both be  
heard.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Arpeggiator function  
Unchecked: Only the arpeggiated notes will sound.  
Using the arpeggiator in  
Combination mode  
In Combination mode the KROME provides dual  
arpeggiators, allowing you to run two arpeggio  
patterns simultaneously.  
1. In Combination mode, select a combination (see  
As you select various combinations, you’ll notice that  
the ARP button LED will light up for some  
When you play the keyboard, the arpeggiator will  
start. Even for other combinations, you can turn the  
arpeggiator on by pressing the ARP button (the LED  
will light up).  
2. Listen to how the arpeggio can be modified as  
(below).  
Changing the duration of the arpeggiated  
notes  
The P7: ARP/DT– ARP Setup Gate parameter specifies  
the duration of the arpeggiated notes. With a setting of  
000–100(%), the duration will always be the specified  
gate time. Step is available if you’ve selected  
U0000(INT)–U1027(USER) as the Pattern; the gate  
value specified for each step will be used.  
You can also control this by using the arpeggio control  
(ARP) GATE knob (see page 86).  
The ARP button, TEMPO knob, TAP button, and  
control surface ARP will apply to both  
arpeggiators A and B. Their state is saved when  
the combination is written.  
Specifying the arpeggio pattern’s velocity  
and other settings  
In P7: ARP/DT– ARP Setup, the Velocity parameter  
specifies the velocity of the arpeggiated notes. If you  
choose a value in the range of 001–127, that velocity  
value will always be used. If you choose Key, the  
velocity value of how you played the key will be used.  
Step is available if “Pattern” is set to U0000(INT)–  
U1027(USER); this causes the velocity value specified  
for each step to be used.  
“Swing” offsets the timing of arpeggiated notes that  
are evennumbered (counting from the beginning).  
“Velocity” and “Swing” can be controlled by knobs 2  
and 3 respectively when SELECT is set to ARP.  
Selecting an arpeggio pattern and  
adjusting settings  
In the Combi P0: Play– Arpeggiator page you can  
select an arpeggio pattern and specify how the  
arpeggiator will function.  
• In Combi P0: Play, press the ARP A tab or the ARP  
B tab to select the Combi P0: Play– Arpeggiator A  
or B page.  
Arpeggiator Run Timbre Assign  
Specifying the zone where the arpeggiator  
will function  
In P7: ARP/DT– ARP Scan Zone you can specify the  
range of notes (keys) and velocities where the  
arpeggiator will function.  
Select the arpeggiator(s) that will run  
Use the Arpeggiator Run check boxes to specify the  
arpeggiator(s) that you want to have running. The  
arpeggiator(s) that are checked here will run when the  
ARP button is on. However, the arpeggiator will only  
play a timbre if the table next to the check boxes  
assigns arpeggiator A or B to a timbre: T 1–16. You  
change these settings in Combi P7: ARP/DT– ARP  
Setup T01–08, T09–16 page Arpeggiator Assign (see  
page 90).  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using the arpeggiator while you play Arpeggiator settings in Combination and Sequencer modes  
Arpeggiator-A, Arpeggiator-B  
For each arpeggiator A and B, you can adjust settings  
for Pattern (Select), Resolution, Octave, Sort, Latch,  
Key Sync, and Keyboard (see page 86).  
Checking the structure of a user arpeggio  
pattern  
Lets see how the combination A005: Boom Pow Pad”  
(category: LeadSplits) is constructed.  
• Select combination A005: Boom Pow Pad”  
(category: LeadSplits), and look at the Arpeggio  
Play A page and Arpeggio Play B page.  
• The drum programs of timbres 1–4 use the same  
arpeggiator A pattern, but since the notes sounded  
by each timbre are divided by key zone, each will  
play only a portion of the arpeggiator pattern. Go to  
the P0: Play–Program T01–08 page and try muting  
each timbre 1–4 to hear the result. You can add  
variety by using different combinations of timbres.  
Arpeggiator settings in  
Combination and Sequencer  
modes  
In Combination and Sequencer modes, you can use use  
two arpeggio patterns simultaneously, thanks to the  
KROMEs dual arpeggiator functionality. The settings  
in each of these modes are adjusted in a similar way.  
The following example shows how to adjust settings in  
Combination mode.  
The dual arpeggiator functionality lets you do the  
following things.  
• Assign an arpeggiator for each timbre. Choose from  
Off, (arpeggiator) A, or (arpeggiator) B. step 5  
• Independently specify whether A and B will  
• In “Timbre Assign” you’ll see that arpeggiator A is  
assigned to timbres 1–5, and arpeggiator B is  
assigned to timbres 6 and 7.  
function. step 6  
• Select an arpeggio pattern and set parameters  
independently for A and B. step 7  
When you play the keyboard, the drum programs of  
timbres 1–4 will be sounded by the arpeggio pattern  
of arpeggiator A. (Timbre 5 is a dummy program  
used to play timbres 1–4. See page 91.)  
Arpeggiator B will sound the programs of timbres 6  
and 7.  
• Make Scan Zone page settings so that you can use  
keyboard range or playing velocity to switch  
between normal playing and arpeggiated playing,  
or to switch between arpeggiators A and B. step 8  
• Make settings for timbres that will be silent when  
the arpeggiator is Off, and will sound only when  
the arpeggiator is On. step 10  
• If you uncheck Arpeggiator Run A or Arpeggiator  
Run B, it will stop.  
If you check it once again and play the keyboard,  
that arpeggiator will begin running.  
• When you access the Combi P7: ARP/DT– ARP  
Scan Zone page, you’ll see that the B “Top Key”  
and “Bottom Key” parameters are set so that  
arpeggiator B will run only for the notes B3 and  
below. Arpeggiator A is set to run for any key.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Arpeggiator function  
7. On the Arpeggiator A and Arpeggiator B pages, set  
the parameters for arpeggiators A and B.  
Arpeggiator settings  
The parameters for A and B are the same as for a  
program (see page 86).  
8. In the Scan Zone A/B page, specify the range in  
which arpeggiators A and B will function.  
1. Select Combi P0: Play– Program T01–08 page.  
Select programs for the timbres that you wish to use.  
For this example, select any desired program for  
timbres 1–4.  
The parameters for A and B are the same as for a  
program.  
2. Select Combi P3: Timbre Parameters, MIDI T01–08  
page.  
You can use keyboard ranges or velocity ranges to use  
one or both of the arpeggiators, or to switch between  
arpeggiators A and B. By using the Combi P4: Zone/  
Delay– Key Zone T01–08 – T09–16 page, and Vel Zone  
T01–08 – T09–16 page to set keyboard and velocity  
ranges in conjunction with each other, you can create  
even more variations.  
9. If you wish to save the edited combination  
settings in internal memory, turn off memory  
protect in Global mode, and write the combination  
(see page 115 and page 117).  
For the timbres that you will be using, set Status to  
INT, and set MIDI Channel to Gch or to the global  
MIDI channel (set in Global P1: MIDI Basic MIDI  
Channel).  
For this example, set timbres 1–4 to a Status of INT,  
and timbres 5–8 to a Status of Off. Set the MIDI  
Channel of timbres 1–4 to Gch.  
10. The “Status,” “MIDI Channel” and Assign”  
settings shown in the display of steps 2 and 3 can  
be made so that certain timbres will sound only  
when the arpeggiator is On, and will be silent  
when the arpeggiator is Off.  
Combination A001: Bossa Rose (SW1/2)  
(Category: Keyboard)  
Although this is a somewhat sophisticated editing  
technique, we will describe the settings of one of the  
preset combinations as an example.  
3. Select Combi P7: ARP/DT– ARP Setup T01–08  
page.  
When you play a specific region of the keyboard, this  
combines settings that cause the arpeggiator to play an  
arpeggio using different sounds than whatʹs being  
played by the keyboard, with other settings that cause  
the arpeggiator sounds to remain completely unplayed  
when the arpeggiator is off.  
Before you play, make sure that the global MIDI  
channel (Global P1: MIDI Basic MIDI Channel) is set  
to 01.  
Select combination A001: Bossa Rose (SW1/2), turn the  
ARP button on, and play.  
• Arpeggiator A is assigned to timbre 2 and 16. When  
you play the keyboard, the bass riff arpeggio  
pattern will sound the timbre 2 program.  
4. Set (Temp)” to specify the tempo.  
is shared by both arpeggiators A and B.  
This is the same as for a program. However, the tempo  
• The A Bottom Key and Top Key (Combi P7: ARP/  
DT– ARP Scan Zone page) are set so that  
arpeggiator A will function only for notes B3 and  
lower.  
• Arpeggiator A is also assigned to timbre 16, but this  
is so that the timbre 2 program will sound only  
when the arpeggiator is on.  
5. Make Arpeggiator Assign” settings.  
Assign arpeggiator A or B to the desired timbres. Each  
timbre will be played by the arpeggiator that has been  
assigned to it.  
6. Make Arpeggiator Run” settings.  
Check the arpeggiator(s) that you want to run. The  
arpeggiator(s) checked here will run when the ARP  
button is turned on.  
Notice the timbre settings for timbre 2 and 16.  
Timbre  
Status  
INT  
Off  
MIDI Channel  
02  
Gch  
Assign  
With the settings shown in the display for steps 2 and  
3, turning the ARP button on will cause arpeggiator A  
to run for timbres 1 and 2, and arpeggiator B to run for  
timbre 3. When the ARP button is turned off, timbres  
1–4 will sound as a layer.  
If all timbres Assign status are set to Off, or if  
Arpeggiator Run A or B is unchecked, the arpeggiator  
will not function.  
2
A
A
16  
• If the arpeggiator is off, playing the keyboard will  
sound the timbre(s) that are set to Gch or to the  
global MIDI channel (in this case, 01). Since the  
MIDI Channel of timbre 2 is set to 02, it will not  
sound. Timbre 16 is set to Gch, but since “Status” is  
Off it will not sound.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using the arpeggiator while you play Linking the arpeggiator to programs or combinations  
• Notes from any MIDI channel that is assigned to a  
timbre will trigger the arpeggiator. In this case,  
these will be MIDI Channel 02 and Gch (global  
MIDI channel). When the arpeggiator is on, playing  
the keyboard will trigger arpeggiator A, which is  
assigned to timbre 16 (Gch). Timbre 2 will be  
sounded by arpeggiator A. Since the Status of  
timbre 16 is Off, it will not sound.  
Creating a user arpeggio  
pattern  
About user arpeggio patterns  
The patterns that can be selected on the KROMEs  
arpeggiator are called “arpeggio patterns.” There are  
two types of arpeggio patterns: preset arpeggio  
patterns and user arpeggio patterns.  
• Since the Status of timbre 16 is Off, it will not  
sound, regardless of whether the arpeggiator is on  
or off. It is a dummy timbre that causes timbre 2 to  
sound only when the arpeggiator is on.  
Preset arpeggio patterns:  
There are five patterns; UP, DOWN, ALT1, ALT2, and  
RANDOM.  
The functionality of these patterns is fixed, and cannot  
be edited.  
Combination A005: Boom Pow Pad  
(Category: Synth)  
Before you play, make sure that the global MIDI  
channel (Global P1: MIDI Basic MIDI Channel) is set  
to 01.  
User arpeggio patterns:  
There are 1028 patterns U0000(INT)–U1027(USER) ‐  
which can develop chords or phrases in a wide variety  
of ways, based on the pitches that you play on the  
keyboard or the timing with which you play them.  
Select combination A005: Boom Pow Pad, turn the ARP  
button on, and play.  
• Arpeggiator A is assigned to timbres 1–5, and  
arpeggiator B is assigned to timbres 6 and 7. When  
you press any note of the entire keyboard, the drum  
programs of timbres 1–4 will be sounded by the  
arpeggio pattern of arpeggiator A. When you play  
the B3 or a lower note on the keyboard, the synth  
programs of timbres 6 and 7 will be sounded by the  
backing arpeggio pattern.  
• The arpeggiator A parameters “Bottom Key” and  
“Top Key” (Combi P7: ARP/DT– ARP Scan Zone  
page) are set so that arpeggiator A will run for the  
entire keyboard.  
In Global P6: Arpeggio Pattern, Setup you can modify  
these user arpeggio patterns, or create a new user  
arpeggio pattern from an initialized condition. Edited  
user arpeggio patterns can be written to internal  
memory areas U0000(INT)–U1027(USER) (see  
page 221 of the Parameter Guide).  
In Media mode, you can also save user arpeggio  
patterns to media.  
Editing a user arpeggio pattern  
• The B Bottom Key and Top Key (Combi P7: ARP/  
DT– ARP Scan Zone page) are set so that  
arpeggiators B will function only for the note B3  
and below.  
• Arpeggiator A is assigned to timbre 5 as well, but  
this setting is so that the timbre 1 to 4 program will  
sound only when the arpeggiator is on. Refer to the  
preceding section “Combination Bossa Rose (SW1/  
2).”  
If you want to edit a user arpeggio pattern, you  
must first make sure that memory protect is  
unchecked. (See page 197 of the Parameter Guide)  
If you enter this mode from the Program mode, your  
editing will apply to the arpeggio pattern specified for  
the selected program.  
1. In Program mode, select a program which uses the  
arpeggio pattern you wish to edit, or a program  
that you wish to use as a basis for editing the  
arpeggio pattern.  
2. Press the ARP button to turn the arpeggiator on  
(the button will light up).  
Even if you entered Global mode from a program in  
which the arpeggiator was turned off, you can use the  
ARP button to turn it on.  
Linking the arpeggiator to  
programs or combinations  
You can specify whether the arpeggiator settings  
written to a program or combination will be recalled  
when you switch programs or combinations, or  
whether the current arpeggiator settings will be  
maintained.  
3. Select the Global P6: Arpeggio Pattern– Setup  
page (see page 211 of the Parameter Guide).  
With the factory settings, the former is selected. Use  
the latter when you want to keep the same arpeggio  
pattern running, and change only the program sound.  
This setting is made in “Load ARP when changing”  
(Global P0: Basic Setup, Basic page). (See page 110)  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Arpeggiator function  
4. Arpeggiator Select” will automatically be set to A  
when you navigate to this page from Program  
mode.  
You can also select the step by pressing the Step line  
in the parameter view at the bottom. You can also  
edit by dragging in the parameter view.  
5. In “Pattern,” select the arpeggio pattern that you  
wish to edit.  
For this example, select an empty user arpeggio  
pattern.  
Press the button to the left of the parameter view to  
switch between Pitch (Pitch Offset) Gate (Gate)  
Vel. (Velocity) Flam (Flam).  
Tone: Each step can sound a chord of up to 12 tones  
(Tone No. 00–11). By touching and dragging the  
overview on the right part of the screen or by using  
the zoom scroll buttons above it, select the location  
for entering tones in the zoom view below. Press  
the touch grid to enter tones.  
If a blank pattern is selected, playing the keyboard  
will not start an arpeggio. Although preset  
arpeggio patterns P0–P4 can be selected, they  
cannot be edited.  
When you edit a user arpeggio pattern, the  
changes will have an effect anytime that this  
pattern is used in Program, Combination, or Song.  
When Step is selected, you can also enter tones by  
using the numeric keys 0–9 and the “–” and “.” but‐  
tons.  
6. In “Length,” specify the length of the pattern.  
Note: The Tone No. corresponds to the numeric keys  
0–9 and the “–” and “.” buttons as shown below. Each  
time you press a numeric key 0–9 or a “–” or “.” button,  
the corresponding tone will turn on or off. The  
horizontal lines of the grid in the center of the display  
correspond to tones.  
After the pattern has played for the length specified, it  
will return to the beginning. This setting can also be  
changed during or after editing. For this example, set it  
to 08.  
Set knob 4 (STEP) to the center position (12  
o’clock) so that the values of the “Length” and  
“Resolution” parameters (Global P6: Arpeggio  
PatternSetup page) will be used.  
Length: 8  
Tone00–09: 0–9 buttons  
Tone No.  
Tone10: – button  
Tone11: . button  
Note: For the preload arpeggio patterns U0000(INT)–  
U0899(INT), simply changing the “Length” can  
significantly change the character of the pattern. Try  
changing the length and listening to the result. (See  
“Length (Pattern Length)” on page 211 of the  
Parameter Guide.)  
7. Make settings for the “(Tempo),” “Resolution,”  
“Octave,” “Sort,” “Latch,” “Key Sync.,” and  
“Keyboard” parameters.  
Step No.  
01  
05  
Entering tones  
Alternate: Set or reset the tone.  
Pen (set only): Set the tone.  
Erase (reset only): Reset the tone.  
Tool: Opens the tool tablet. The tool tablet lets you  
use various commands in a region you’ve specified in  
the overview, or to copy and paste (see “Tool Tablet”  
on page 214 of the Parameter Guide).  
These are program parameters, but they can be set  
from here as well.  
If after accessing this page from Program mode,  
you modify these parameters and wish to keep  
your changes, return to Program mode and write  
the program. These parameters are not saved by  
“Write Arpeggio Pattern.”  
Creating an example pattern  
For this example, make the settings shown display step  
3.  
8. In Arpeggio Pattern Setup, specify how the  
arpeggio will be developed.  
9. Press the  
button to select Edit dialog.  
Overview  
Zoom Scroll  
Tone Input  
Resolution  
1. Press the alternate button.  
2. Enter tones in the touch grid as shown in the  
illustration below.  
Touch Grid  
Parameter  
View  
A pattern consists of Steps and Tones.  
Step: Each user arpeggio pattern has up to 48 steps.  
Starting with the first step, the arpeggiator will play  
notes at intervals of the note value specified by  
Resolution. The vertical lines of the grid indicate  
the steps.  
Use Step to select the step; then specify Pitch Off‐  
set, Gate, Velocity and Flam for each step.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the arpeggiator while you play Creating a user arpeggio pattern  
3. When you play the keyboard as shown in the  
Other examples of creating a user  
arpeggio pattern  
illustration, the arpeggiator will begin playing.  
Tone 0 corresponds to the pitch of the lowest key of  
chord you play on the keyboard. (If Sort is unchecked,  
it will correspond to the pitch of the first note you  
play.)  
Melody pattern  
4. For steps 01–08, make settings for “Pitch Offset,”  
“Gate,” “Velocity,” and “Flam.”  
Pitch Offset: This offsets the pitch of the arpeggio note  
in semitones up or down. You can input the same tone  
for each step, and change the Pitch Offset value for  
each to create a melody using a single tone. (See  
Gate: Specifies the length of the arpeggio note for each  
step. With a setting of Legato, the note will continue  
sounding either until the next note of the same tone or  
until the end of the pattern. With a setting of Off, the  
note will not sound.  
Velocity: This specifies the strength of the note. With a  
setting of Key, the note will sound at the strength of  
how it was actually played.  
1. Press the alternate button.  
2. In the touch grid, set tone 0 for “Step” 01, 02, 03, 04,  
05, 07, and 08 (i.e., all but 06).  
3. Specify the pitch. Set the “Step” 02 “Pitch” to +10,  
“Step” 05 “Pitch” to +12, and the “Step” 08 “Pitch”  
to –2.  
The Gate and Velocity settings you select here will  
be valid if the Gate and Velocity parameters  
(Program P7: ARP/DT– ARP Setup page) of the  
program selected in Program mode are set to Step.  
If these parameters have a setting other than Step,  
the Gate and Velocity that were specified for each  
individual step will be ignored, and all notes of the  
arpeggio will sound according to the settings in  
Program P7: ARP/DT– ARP Setup page. Be sure to  
verify the settings of the program.  
When editing Gate, Velocity, and Swing, use the  
SELECT button to select ARP, and set knob 1  
(GATE) and knob 2 (VELOCITY) to the center  
position (12 o’clock).  
4. Play a single key; the arpeggio will begin playing.  
Chordal pattern  
5. To change the user arpeggio pattern name, use the  
“Rename Arpeggio Pattern” menu command. (See  
page 221 of the Parameter Guide)  
6. If you wish to save the edited user arpeggio  
pattern to internal memory, be sure to Write the  
user arpeggio pattern. (See page 221 of the  
Parameter Guide)  
If you turn off the power without writing, the edited  
contents will be lost.  
7. If you wish to save the state of the program at the  
same time, return to Program mode and write the  
program. (See page 115)  
1. Press the alternate button.  
2. In the touch grid, set tone 00 of “Step” 01.  
3. In “Step” 03, 04, 06, and 07, set tones 00–04.  
4. Select “Step” 01, and set “Gate” to Legato.  
5. Select “Step” 06, and set “Gate” to Legato.  
Note: To simulate the timing nuances of a strummed  
guitar chord, select Flam. In Program mode, select an  
acoustic guitar program, and choose the user arpeggio  
pattern that you created here. In the Arpeg. Program  
P7: ARP/DT– ARP Setup page, set Gate to Step.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Arpeggiator function  
Then return to the Global P6: Arpeggio Pattern– Setup  
page. For oddnumbered steps, set Flam to a positive  
(+) value. For evennumbered steps, set Flam to a  
negative (–) value.  
Lets input the following rhythm pattern.  
4. For each “Tone,” specify “Fixed Note No.”  
Use the Fixed Note Setup button to open the dialog  
box. Here you can assign a different drumsample (note  
number) of the drum kit to each fixed note.  
For this example, set Tone No. and Fixed Note No. as  
follows.  
Drum pattern  
You can use the arpeggiator to play a rhythm pattern  
by using “Fixed Note” with a drum program.  
1. In Program mode, select a drum kit program.  
For this example, select the preset program A017: Jazz  
Dry/Amb1 Kit (Category: Drums).  
2. In Global P6: Arpeggio Pattern, select the Setup  
page, and parameter settings.  
Tone No.  
Fixed Note No.  
00  
01  
02  
03  
C2 (kick)  
F2 (snare)  
F#3 (closed hi-hat)  
A#3 (open hi-hat)  
Arpeggio Tone Mode: Set this to Fixed Note. This will  
cause the tone to always sound at the specified pitch.  
Fixed Note Mode: If you set this to Trigger All Tones,  
playing a single note on the keyboard will sound all  
tones.  
If you set this to Trigger As Played, the tones will be  
sounded according to the notes you play on the  
keyboard (see page 212 of the Parameter Guide).  
The drumsample corresponding to each note number  
will differ depending on the drum kit. Its best to play  
the keyboard to find the drum sound you want; then  
hold down Fixed Note No. and play that note to enter  
the desired note number.  
5. Press the alternate button.  
6. Enter the kick (Tone00).  
In the touch grid, set tone 00 (C2) of Step 01 and 05.  
7. Enter the snare (Tone01).  
3. Select the Edit page.  
In the touch grid, set tone 01 (F2) of Step 03 and 07.  
8. Enter the closed hihat (Tone02).  
In the touch grid, set tone 02 (F#3) of Step 01, 02, 03, 05,  
06, and 07.  
9. Enter the open hihat (Tone03).  
In the touch grid, set tone 03 (A#3) for Step 04.  
10. If Fixed Note Mode is set to Trigger As Played,  
playing a single note on the keyboard will cause  
only the kick (Tone00) to play.  
Playing two notes on the keyboard will cause only the  
kick (Tone00) and snare (Tone01) to play. In this way,  
the number of keys that you play will be played by the  
same number of tones.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the arpeggiator while you play Creating a user arpeggio pattern  
11. Set the parameters for each step.  
Use Velocity etc. to add accents to the rhythm pattern.  
7. If you wish to save the edited user arpeggio  
pattern in internal memory, you must write the  
user arpeggio pattern.  
The Gate and Velocity settings you select here will  
be valid if the Gate and Velocity parameters  
(Program P7: ARP/DT– ARP Setup page) of the  
program selected in Program mode are set to Step.  
If these parameters have a setting other than Step,  
the Gate and Velocity that were specified for each  
individual step will be ignored, and the notes of  
the arpeggio will be sounded according to the  
settings of the Program P7: ARP/DT– ARP Setup  
page. Check the settings of the program.  
When specifying Gate and Velocity, press the  
control surface ARP button, and set knob 1 (GATE)  
and knob 2 (VELOCITY) to the center position (12  
o’clock).  
In this case, both user arpeggio patterns will be written  
simultaneously. If you turn off the power without  
writing, the edited contents will be lost (see page 221 of  
the Parameter Guide).  
8. If you wish to save the state of the combination at  
the same time, return to Combination mode and  
write the combination. (See page 115)  
Note: When editing a user arpeggio pattern, pay  
attention to the global MIDI channel, the channel of  
each track, and the arpeggiator assignments, and make  
sure that the arpeggiator you are hearing is the pattern  
that you wish to edit.  
Dual arpeggiator editing  
Here we will use a combination as an example in our  
explanation.  
The same procedure applies when editing an arpeggio  
pattern in Sequencer mode.  
If you have entered this mode from the Combination  
mode, the arpeggio pattern selected by the  
combination will be affected by your editing.  
1. In Combination mode, select a combination that  
uses the arpeggio pattern you wish to edit.  
For this example, select a combination where both  
arpeggiators A and B are assigned.  
2. Press the ARP button to turn on the arpeggiator  
(the button will light up).  
Even if the arpeggiator had been turned off when you  
moved here, you can use the ARP button to turn it on.  
However, if Arpeggiator Run A or B are not checked,  
and if Arpeggiator Assign, is set to off, then the  
arpeggiator will not function.  
3. Select the Global P6: Arpeggio Pattern– Setup  
page.  
4. If you accessed this page from Combination mode,  
use the Arpeggio Select” A and B to select the  
arpeggiator that you wish to edit.  
If this is A, your editing will apply to the parameters  
and user arpeggio pattern of arpeggiator A.  
If this is B, your editing will apply to the parameters  
and user arpeggio pattern of arpeggiator B.  
5. Switch between arpeggiators A and B, and edit  
their respective user arpeggio patterns.  
If you wish to stop one of the arpeggiators, return to  
Combination mode, and in Combination P0: Play–  
Arpeggio A or the Arpeggio B page and uncheck the  
Arpeggiator Run check box.  
6. To modify the name of a user arpeggio pattern, use  
the Utility “Rename Arpeggio Pattern.” (See  
page 221 of the Parameter Guide)  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Arpeggiator function  
Synchronization with Song Start  
Regarding arpeggiator  
synchronization  
• If the arpeggiator is turned on (ARP button is on)  
and is running, it will reset to the beginning of its  
arpeggio pattern when a Song Start is received.  
(This is unaffected by the Key Sync. setting.)  
• In Sequencer mode when Key Sync. is unchecked  
and the ARP button is on, if you start the  
arpeggiator by pressing a key during the precount  
before recording begins, the arpeggiator will start  
its pattern as soon as recording begins, and will be  
recorded.  
“Key Sync.parameter  
The timing of the arpeggiator notes depends on the  
state of the arpeggiator Key Sync. check box.  
If this box is checked, the arpeggiator will start  
running at the first noteon that occurs after you’ve  
taken your hands completely off the keyboard.  
Synchronization with external sequencer  
playback  
If this box is unchecked, the arpeggiator will run in  
synchronization with the internal/external MIDI clock.  
If “(Tempo)” is EXT (i.e., if Global P1: MIDI MIDI  
Clock is External MIDI or External USB) in Program,  
Combination, or Sequencer modes, the arpeggiator  
will synchronize to the MIDI timing Clock and Start  
messages received from a connected MIDI device.  
Below, we will explain how synchronization occurs  
when the Key Sync. check box is not checked  
(Synchronization with Song Start and with MIDI  
realtime Start messages are excluded).  
Note: Synchronization will occur in the same way if  
MIDI timing Clock is Auto and MIDI realtime clock  
messages are being received from a connected MIDI  
device.  
Synchronization between arpeggiators  
A and B  
In Combination and Sequencer modes, the two  
arpeggiators can run simultaneously. In this case, if one  
arpeggiator is already running, and you then run the  
other arpeggiator (with “Key Sync.” unchecked), the  
second arpeggiator will synchronize to the “(Tempo)”  
based on the first arpeggiator.  
Synchronization with external MIDI timing clock  
The arpeggiator will synchronize to the “(Tempo)”  
timing of the external MIDI timing clock.  
Synchronization with MIDI realtime Start messages  
If Key Sync. is checked, arpeggiators A and B will run  
independently, each at their own tempo.  
If the arpeggiator is turned on and running, an  
incoming MIDI realtime Start message will reset the  
arpeggiator to the beginning of its pattern (This is  
unaffected by the Key Sync. setting).  
Synchronization with the drum track  
If you want the arpeggiator to synchronize to the drum  
track pattern thats currently playing, uncheck the Key  
Sync. setting. In this case, the arpeggiator will  
synchronize to the beat of the drum track pattern thats  
currently playing.  
If you want the drum track pattern to synchronize to  
the arpeggiator thats currently running, turn on the  
“Sync” setting (the Trigger parameter of the Drum  
Track page of each mode).  
Synchronization between the arpeggiator  
and sequencer in Sequencer mode  
If song playback is stopped  
• The arpeggiator will synchronize to the “(Tempo)”  
based on the internal MIDI clock timing.  
• If an RPPR pattern is playing in Sequencer mode,  
the arpeggiator will synchronize to the beat based  
on that pattern.  
If you want the RPPR pattern playback to synchronize  
to the arpeggiator thats currently running, set “Sync”  
to SEQ (SEQ P10: Pattern/RPPR– RPPR Setup page).  
Pattern playback will synchronize to the “(Tempo)”  
timing of the arpeggiator.  
While playing back or recording a song  
• The arpeggiator will synchronize to the beat based  
on the timing of the song.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Drum Track function  
Performing with the Drum Track function  
The Drum Track function makes it easy to play the  
KROMEs highquality drum programs using a wide  
Using the Drum Track function  
in Program mode  
variety of Drum Track patterns.  
It provides a convenient way for you to hear Drum  
Track patterns while you try out various phrases on a  
program or combination, or work out the outline of  
your song. Then, when you’ve come up with some  
ideas, you can use the Auto Song Setup function to  
immediately start recording in Sequencer mode.  
You can use preset drum patterns that cover a wide  
range of musical styles, as well as user patterns that  
you yourself created.  
Turning the Drum Track function on/  
off  
1. In Program mode, select a program (see “Selecting  
Preset  
User  
P001...P605  
U000...U999  
Preset Drum Track patterns  
User Drum Track patterns  
You can write your own patterns into U000–U999. User  
patterns you’ve created in Sequencer mode can be  
converted into user Drum Track patterns.  
The Drum Track pattern will start immediately when  
you press the DRUM TRACK button, or when you  
play the keyboard after pressing the ON/OFF button. If  
you’re starting the pattern by playing the keyboard,  
you have the option of starting it by using a specific  
range of notes or velocities.  
In Program mode, the drum track has a dedicated  
mixer channel (including EQ) and effect routing,  
allowing you to control the drum track independently  
from the sound of the program itself. In Combination  
and Sequencer modes, the drum track is handled as a  
conventional timbre or track, allowing you to select  
programs, edit EQ settings, and specify the effect  
routing in the same way as for conventional timbres or  
tracks.  
2. Press the DRUM TRACK button.  
The ON/OFF button will light up or blink, depending  
on the setting (Trigger Mode) of the program.  
If lit: The Drum Track pattern will start according to  
the Sync setting. When you turn it off, the pattern will  
stop. (This will occur if the Trigger Mode parameter is  
set to Start Immediately.)  
If blinking: The Drum Track pattern will be ready to  
start. It will start when you play the keyboard or when  
a MIDI noteon is received. (This will occur if the  
Trigger Mode parameter is set to Wait KBD Trigger.)  
Adjusting the performance tempo  
• You can use the TEMPO knob or the  
TAP button to adjust the performance  
tempo.  
This will change the “=” value located  
on the upper right side of the display.  
You can adjust the tempo with a range  
of 40.00–300.00 bpm. The LED located  
above the TAP button will blink at inter‐  
vals of a quarter note ( ).  
You can also adjust the tempo by choos‐  
ing “=” in the display. Use numeric keys 0–9 to  
enter the tempo, and then press the ENTER button.  
You can also use the VALUE controller to set the  
tempo. The LED will blink at the tempo you specify.  
Note: The tempo setting is also saved when you write a  
program.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Drum Track function  
If the Global P1: MIDI– MIDI Basic page MIDI  
Clock parameter is set to External MIDI, External  
USB, or set to Auto and MIDI Clock messages are  
being received, the display will indicate “=” EXT,  
and the KROME will be synchronized to an  
external MIDI device. In this case, you won’t be  
able to change the tempo by using the KROME.  
Using the Drum Track function  
in Combination mode  
Selecting a combination and turning the  
Drum Track function on/off  
1. Press the COMBI button to enter Combination  
mode, and select the desired combination. For  
Selecting a Drum Track pattern and  
Drum Track program  
1. Access the Prog P0: Play– Main page.  
Drum Track Play/Mute, Solo On/Off, Volume  
Pattern  
Bank/No.  
Drum Track  
Program  
Drum Track  
EQ  
2. Press the DRUM TRACK button.  
The ON/OFF button will light up or blink, depending  
on the setting (Trigger Mode) of the combination.  
If lit: The Drum Track pattern will start according to  
the Sync setting. When you turn it off, the pattern will  
stop. (This will occur if the Trigger Mode parameter is  
set to Start Immediately.)  
If blinking: The Drum Track pattern will be ready to  
start. It will start when you play the keyboard or when  
a MIDI noteon is received. (This will occur if the  
Trigger Mode is set to Wait KBD Trigger.)  
2. Select a Drum Track pattern. Use “Pattern Bank”  
to select the preset or the user bank, and use  
“Pattern No.” to select the pattern number.  
3. Use “Drum Track Program” to select the program  
that will play the Drum Track pattern.  
Note: You can only select programs of category  
number 15 (Drums). If you want to use an original  
program you created as the Drum Track program, save  
it with “Category” set to 15 (see page 30).  
Note: If you’ve selected an empty pattern, the DRUM  
TRACK button will not function.  
These parameters can also be set from P7: ARP/DT  
page.  
Adjusting the performance tempo  
You can use the TEMPO knob or the TAP button to  
adjust the performance tempo.  
Setting the EQ, volume, mute, and  
solo for the drum track pattern  
In the Prog P0: Play– Mixer & Drum Track page you  
can use a 3band EQ to adjust the sound of the drum  
track program. You can also edit the volume, mute,  
and solo settings.  
Selecting a Drum Track pattern and Drum  
Track program  
Unlike its functionality in Program mode, the Drum  
Track function in Combination mode does not have its  
own dedicated track (timbre). The program that plays  
the Drum Track pattern will use the timbre that you  
specify.  
1. In the Combi P0: Play– Program T01–08 page or  
T09–16 page, select the timbre that you want to use  
for the drum track, and then select the Drum Track  
program.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Performing with the Drum Track function Using the Drum Track function in Combination mode  
In the following illustration, we’ve selected timbre 5  
for use by the drum track.  
2. Specify the MIDI channel of the drum track  
timbre.  
Be aware that if another timbre uses the same MIDI  
channel, that timbre will also be played.  
3. Access the Combi P7: ARP/DT– Drum Track page.  
Specify the drum tracks MIDI channel Output. Set this  
to match the MIDI Channel of the timbre you  
specified in step 2.  
4. Select a Drum Track pattern. Use “Pattern (Pattern  
Bank)” to select the preset or user bank, and use  
“Pattern No.” to select the pattern number.  
Note: If you select an empty pattern, the DRUM  
TRACK button will not function.  
5. Press the DRUM TRACK button to verify that the  
pattern plays correctly.  
The method of triggering will depend on the Trigger  
settings. If the Trigger Mode parameter is set to Start  
Immediately, the Drum Track pattern will start when  
you press the DRUM TRACK button. For details on the  
Trigger settings, please see “7–4b: Trigger” on page 56  
of the Parameter Guide.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Drum Track function  
Drum Track function settings  
4. If “Trigger Mode” is set to Wait KBD Trigger,  
specify the “Latch” setting. “Latch” specifies  
whether the Drum Track pattern will continue  
playing even after you take your hand off the  
keyboard.  
Drum Track function settings  
in Program mode  
Off: If the DRUM TRACK button is on (the LED will  
blink), the pattern will start when you play the  
keyboard (noteon). The pattern will stop when you  
release the keyboard (noteoff).  
Starting/stopping the drum track  
1. Access the Prog P7: ARP/DT– Drum Track Pattern  
page.  
On: If the DRUM TRACK button is on (the LED will  
blink), the pattern will start when you play the  
keyboard (noteon). The pattern will continue when  
you release the keyboard (noteoff). The pattern will  
stop when you turn the DRUM TRACK button off (the  
LED will go dark).  
5. If “Trigger Mode” is set to Wait KBD Trigger,  
specify the Keyboard Zone and Velocity Zone.  
These settings specify the range of keys and velocities  
that will trigger the Drum Track pattern when you play  
the keyboard (or receive a noteon).  
Saving the on/off status  
If “Trigger Mode” is set to Wait KBD Trigger, the drum  
tracks on/off status can be saved in the program.  
If “Trigger Mode” is set to Start Immediately, the drum  
tracks on/off status will always be saved as “off,”  
regardless of the state of the DRUM TRACK button.  
2. “Trigger Mode” specifies how the Drum Track  
pattern will be triggered.  
Start Immediately: When you press the DRUM  
TRACK button to turn it on, the LED will light up and  
the Drum Track pattern will start according to the Sync  
setting. It will stop when you press the DRUM TRACK  
button to turn it off.  
Wait KBD Trigger: When you press the DRUM  
TRACK button to turn it on, the LED will blink and the  
Drum Track pattern will wait to start. When you play  
the keyboard or receive a MIDI noteon, the Drum  
Track pattern will start according to the Sync setting.  
EQ adjustments for the Drum Track  
program  
You can adjust a threeband EQ for the Drum Track  
program.  
If you turn Auto Load Program EQ” on (selected), the  
threeband EQ settings specified for the program will  
be automatically loaded when you switch Drum Track  
programs. Normally you will leave this selected.  
You are free to adjust the threeband EQ settings that  
are loaded automatically. These adjustments are  
applied relative to the original settings of the program.  
3. Specify the Sync setting.  
Off: The Drum Track pattern will not synchronize to  
the arpeggiator thats currently running, but will start  
immediately.  
On: The Drum Track pattern will synchronize to the  
arpeggiator thats currently running.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Drum Track function settings Drum Track function settings in Combination mode  
MIDI transmission and reception for  
the drum track  
In Program mode, the Drum Track function transmits  
and receives on the following MIDI channels.  
Receive: If you’re controlling the triggering by playing  
the keyboard, the drum track will receive on the global  
MIDI channel.  
Drum Track function settings  
in Sequencer mode  
The parameters for the Drum Track function are  
structured in the same way as in Combination mode.  
Assign the Drum Track program to the desired track 1–  
16.  
However, while a combination triggers the Drum  
Track pattern on the global MIDI channel, a song  
triggers the Drum Track pattern on the MIDI channel  
specified by the Drum Pattern Input. Normally you’ll  
set this to Tch. With the Tch setting, the MIDI channel  
of the track selected by Track Select will automatically  
be used as the trigger channel.  
Transmit: The drum track will transmit on the MIDI  
channel specified by Drum Track Prog MIDI Ch  
(default: channel 10). (Note data etc. of the Drum Track  
program will be transmitted.)  
Note: MIDI transmission of the pattern data is enabled  
if Drum Track Prog MIDI Out is selected. The default  
setting is off (unselected).  
For details, please see “Selecting a Drum Track pattern  
The Drum Track program does not transmit or receive  
program changes.  
Drum Track function settings  
in Combination mode  
Unlike Program mode, Combination mode does not  
have a dedicated track for the Drum Track function.  
You’ll need to specify a timbre 1–16 as the one for use  
by the Drum Track program.  
Then set the drum tracks output MIDI channel Output  
to match the timbres MIDI channel MIDI Channel so  
that the Drum Track program can be played.  
For details, please see “Selecting a Drum Track pattern  
In Sequencer mode you can use the Drum Track  
function while realtimerecording a song track or  
pattern.  
The noteon/off data transmitted by the Drum Track  
pattern can be recorded as events in a track or pattern.  
MIDI transmission and reception for  
the drum track  
In Combination mode, the Drum Track function  
transmits and receives on the following MIDI channels.  
Receive: If you’re controlling the triggering by playing  
the keyboard, the drum track will receive on the global  
MIDI channel.  
You can’t use note data from the internal  
sequencer as a trigger to start patterns for the  
Drum Track function.  
When you’ve used the Drum Track function with a  
program or combination to come up with an idea for a  
song, you can then use the Auto Song Setup function to  
immediately start realtimerecording (see page 59).  
Transmit: The drum track will transmit on the MIDI  
channel specified by the Drum Pattern Output setting  
of each combination.  
Set this to match the MIDI channel of the timbre you’ve  
specified for the drum program.  
MIDI transmission and reception for  
the drum track  
In Sequencer mode, the Drum Track function transmits  
and receives on the following MIDI channels.  
Receive: The drum track will receive on the MIDI  
channel specified by the Drum Pattern Input setting of  
each song. Normally you’ll set this to Tch and use the  
KROMEs keyboard to control the triggering.  
If the timbres Status is EXT or EX2, the note data etc.  
of the Drum Track pattern will be transmitted.  
Transmit: The drum track will transmit on the MIDI  
channel specified by the Drum Pattern Output setting  
of each song. Set this to match the MIDI channel of the  
MIDI track where you’ve assigned the drum program.  
If the tracks Status is BTH, EXT, or EX2, note data etc.  
of the Drum Track pattern will be transmitted.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Drum Track function  
Sync settings  
Key 1 on Key 2 on  
Key 1 off  
Synchronizing the Drum Track  
function  
Song  
Patterns 1 and 2 are set to  
Mode=Manual, and have  
identical Sync settings  
The Trigger “Sync” parameter  
The trigger timing of a drum track will depend on the  
setting of its Trigger Sync parameter.  
Sync: Off  
Pattern 1  
Pattern 2  
On (checked): The trigger timing will be quantized to  
the nearest beat relative to the base tempo.  
Sync: Beat  
Pattern 1  
Off (unchecked): If Trigger Mode is set to Start  
Immediately, triggering will occur at the moment you  
press the DRUM TRACK button. If this is set to Wait  
KBD Trigger, triggering will occur at the moment you  
play the keyboard.  
Pattern 2  
Sync: Measure  
Pattern 1  
Pattern 2  
Synchronizing the drum track with the KAR-  
MA function, Sequencer mode songs, pat-  
terns, and RPPR performance  
If you want the Drum Track pattern to play or be  
recorded in synchronization with the arpeggiator thats  
currently running, a currentlyplaying song, pattern,  
or RPPR performance, turn Trigger Sync on.  
Trigger Sync Off: If the Trigger Mode setting is Start  
Immediately, the Drum Track pattern will be triggered  
the moment you press the DRUM TRACK button. If  
this is set to Wait KBD Trigger, the Drum Track pattern  
will be triggered the moment you play the keyboard. It  
will not synchronize to the arpeggiator thats currently  
running or to the song, pattern, or RPPR thats  
currently active.  
Trigger Sync On: Triggering will synchronize to the  
song thats currently playing, pattern or RPPR  
performance in units of a measure. Triggering will  
synchronize to the arpeggiator thats currently running  
(in Sequencer mode if the song or pattern is stopped)  
in units of a beat.  
Synchronization with song stop  
Synchronization with a song in Sequencer  
mode  
• When you press the SEQUENCER START/STOP  
(
) button, the Drum Track function will stop  
as well as the sequencer.  
• If you want the Drum Track function to start  
simultaneously with the start of recording, press  
the DRUM TRACK button during the precount  
before recording (if Trigger Mode is set to Start  
Immediately) or play the keyboard (if Trigger  
Mode is Wait KBD Trigger). The Drum Tracks will  
not be triggered immediately, but will be triggered  
in synchronization with the sequencer the moment  
recording starts.  
Note: If you want to synchronize arpeggiator to the  
Drum Track function thats currently running , set the  
Sync parameter (Prog/Combi/Seq P7: ARP/DT‐  
DrumTrk Pattern).  
Note: If you want to synchronize the RPPR pattern  
performance to the Drum Track function thats  
currently running, set the Sync parameter (Seq P10:  
Pattern/RPPR– RPPR Setup page) to Beat or Measure.  
Slave operation  
Connect the KROMEs MIDI IN to your external MIDI  
devices MIDI OUT, or connect the KROMEs USB B  
connector to your computers USB port.  
Set MIDI Clock (see page 111) to External MIDI or  
External USB.  
Note: If the KROME is set to MIDI Clock= Auto, it will  
also synchronize to the external MIDI device in the  
same way if MIDI timing clock messages are being  
received from the external device.  
Synchronization to MIDI clock  
The arpeggiator function will synchronize to a tempo  
based on the external MIDI clock timing.  
Synchronization with MIDI realtime commands  
In Sequencer mode, Song Start, Continue, and Stop  
messages that the KROME receives will control song  
playback and recording just as when you use the front  
panel START/STOP (  
) button. The KARMA  
function also will be controlled in the same way as  
when you use the front panel START/STOP (  
)
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Drum Track function settings Creating a Drum Track pattern  
5. Use the To Drum Track Pattern Select” field to  
specify the user Drum Track pattern number that  
will hold the converted data. When you execute  
the command, the data will be overwritten onto  
this number.  
6. If you select the All Patterns available in Song  
***” option, all patterns in the song that contain  
note data will be converted, starting with the  
number you specified in step 3.  
7. If you execute this command with “Note Only”  
selected, only the note events will be converted.  
8. Press the OK button or the ENTER button to  
execute. If you decide not to execute, press the  
Cancel button or the EXIT button.  
Master operation  
If you want an external MIDI device or computer to  
synchronize to the KROMEs MIDI timing clock and  
realtime commands, connect the KROMEs MIDI OUT  
to your external MIDI devices MIDI IN, or connect the  
KROMEs USB port to your computers USB port.  
Set MIDI Clock to Internal.  
Note: The same applies if MIDI Clock=Auto and MIDI  
realtime clock messages are being transmitted (see  
Synchronization via MIDI clock  
The connected external MIDI device will synchronize  
to the MIDI clock of the KROME.  
in Program mode” on page 97, set the Drum Track  
“Pattern Bank” to User, and set “Pattern No.” to  
the user Drum Track pattern you converted. Then  
play the Drum Track pattern.  
Creating a Drum Track pattern  
Once you’ve converted the pattern in this way, you’ll  
be able to use it with the drum track in each mode.  
These converted Drum Track patterns are held in  
internal memory even after you turn off the power.  
This means you can manage them together with the  
programs and combinations.  
Song  
Drum Track  
Program  
/Combination  
Preset  
Pattern  
Track/RPPR  
Drum Track  
100  
User  
Pattern  
User  
Drum Track  
Pattern  
Preparing a user pattern  
You’ll first need to prepare the user pattern that you  
want to convert to a Drum Track pattern.  
Convert to  
Drum Track Pattern  
Internal memory (saved inside the KROME)  
Sequencer memory  
(Not saved internally;  
save on external USB  
media.)  
To create a user pattern, you can realtimerecord it (see  
page 65) in the Seq P10: Pattern/RPPR– Pattern Edit  
page, or steprecord it (see page 167 of the Parameter  
Guide).  
Alternatively, performance data from a track can be  
imported into a pattern, meaning that performance  
data you’ve created in a track or SMF data you’ve  
loaded in Media mode can be used as a user pattern. To  
do this, execute the Get From Track menu command in  
the Seq P10: Pattern/RPPR– Pattern Edit page (see  
page 187 of the Parameter Guide).  
If the drum pattern memory is insufficient, or if  
there are not enough pattern slots, the error  
message “Not enough Drum Track pattern  
memory” or “Not enough Drum Track pattern  
locations available” will appear, and the command  
cannot be executed.  
Tip: Its a good idea to convert drum patterns that you  
use frequently. Use “Load Drum Track Pattern” to load  
them.  
Converting to a Drum Track pattern  
1. Press the SEQ button to enter Sequencer mode.  
2. Access the Seq P10: Patern/RPPR– Pattern Edit  
page.  
3. Select the user pattern that you want to convert to  
a Drum Track pattern.  
Set Pattern to User, and use Pattern Select to select the  
desired pattern.  
4. Choose the menu command Convert to Drum Trk  
Pattern to access the dialog box.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Drum Track function  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Drum Kits  
Drum Kit Overview  
Before you start editing…  
Whats a Drum Kit?  
Selecting a drum program  
A drum kit is a collection of drumsamples (drum set  
sounds such as bass drum, snare, or cymbals, as well as  
a wide variety of other percussion sounds), with each  
sample assigned to a note of the keyboard.  
Drum Kits are edited in Global Mode. While you’re in  
Global Mode, you’ll play the kit that you’re editing as if  
you were playing it from within the Program, Combi,  
or Song which was selected before you entered Global  
mode.  
• Each key can play a different sound  
So, before you enter Global mode, its best to select a  
Program which is already set up for drums, with the  
appropriate EG settings, effects, and so on. Just use the  
Program Category select popup, and choose a drum  
Program such as “Studio Standard Kit.”  
• On each key, you can use up to eight Drumsamples,  
with velocity crossfades  
• Each key has separate settings for the most  
important sound parameters, including volume,  
filter cutoff and resonance, envelope attack and  
decay, pitch, drive and low boost, and gain for each  
band of the Program EQ.  
Even if the programs oscillator is set to Double  
Drums, this page will show only the single drum  
kit that is selected by Drum Kit Select.  
For instance, you could combine high drive and  
low cutoff frequency to create a lofi effect on only a  
few sounds, while the rest of the sounds remained  
clear and pristine.  
Matching the key of the keyboard  
with the drum kit  
In order for the note mappings to match the keyboard,  
the Oscillators Octave setting needs to be +0 [8ʹ]. All  
Drum Kit Programs should have this setting already. If  
you’re unsure, you can check this yourself:  
• Each note can be routed to different Insert Effects,  
or have separate FX Send amounts. For instance,  
you can send a snare sound through a dedicated  
compressor.  
You can use Drum Kits only in Programs whose  
Oscillator Mode is set to Single or Double Drums.  
1. Go to the OSC1 Setup tab of the OSC/Pitch page.  
With a setting other than +0 [8ʹ], the relationship  
between the keys and the Drum Kit sound map will be  
incorrect.  
Drum Kit memory structure  
The KROME has over 161 Drum Kits, divided into  
Internal, User, and GM (General MIDI) groups as  
shown below. You can edit or write into any of the  
locations except for the GM bank, which cannot be  
erased.  
2. Set the Global P0: Basic Setup– Basic parameter  
“Key Transpose” to +00.  
Make sure that Memory Protect is  
disabled  
Before you start editing, go to the Global P0: Basic  
Setup– System Preferences page, and look in the  
Memory Protect section. Make sure that Drum Kit is  
not checked–if so, you won’t be able to make any edits.  
Drum Kit contents  
Bank  
No.  
00...31  
Contents  
Preload Drum Kits  
User Drum Kits  
GM2 Drum Kits  
INT  
User  
32...47  
48...56  
GM 0  
The 9 Drum Kits in the GM bank are compatible with  
the GM2 sound map. The other Drum Kits may use  
different mappings, where appropriate.  
Drum Kits may be used by more than  
one Program  
When you edit a Drum Kit, all Programs that use that  
Drum Kit will be affected. To avoid changing the  
factory voicing, you may wish to copy Drum Kits to  
empty locations in the USER banks before editing.  
Using a drum kit in a program  
(Oscillator Mode)  
In the Program P1: Basic Ctrls– Program Basic page, set  
the Oscillator Mode parameter to Drums or Double  
Drums. Then for the oscillator, select the drum kit that  
you want to use.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Using Drum Kits  
If Assign is checked, the key will have its own settings.  
This is the default.  
Editing a Drum Kit  
If Assign is not checked, the key won’t have its own  
settings. Instead, it will use the same settings as the  
next higher note–except that the drumsamples will be  
played at a lower pitch. The amount of pitch change  
depends on the Pitch Slope parameter, on the Prog P2:  
OSC/Pitch– OSC1 Pitch or OSC2 Pitch page.  
Basic Editing  
1. Select the Program that you wish to use while  
editing the Drum Kit.  
2. Access the P2: OSC/Pitch– OSC1 Setup page or the  
OSC2 Setup page (Double Drums only), and press  
the Jump to Drum Kit Edit button.  
Use this setting when you want only to change the  
pitch, such as with tom or cymbal sounds.  
If you want to edit the OSC2 drum kit of a double  
drums program, press the Jump to Drum Kit Edit  
button from the P2: OSC/Pitch– OSC2 Setup page.  
Velocity crossfade settings  
For this key, lets create a simple velocity crossfade  
between two stereo drumsamples.  
1. On the left side of the page, make sure that  
Drumsample1 and 2 are turned On.  
Just press the On/Off buttons to toggle them, if  
necessary.  
You’ll jump to the Global mode P5: Drum Kit– Sample  
Setup page.  
Note: If you enter Global mode by pressing the  
GLOBAL button or the mode button, and then access  
the P5: Drum Kit– Sample Setup page, the OSC1 sound  
settings will be used.  
2. In the same way, make sure that Drumsamples 3–8  
are Off.  
When they are turned off, most of their parameters will  
be grayed out.  
KEY Assign  
Drum Kit  
Select  
3. Select Stereo as the Bank for Drumsample1 and  
Drumsample2.  
Drumsamples come in several types: Mono, Stereo,  
VM.M, or VM.S. Mono are mono drumsamples, and  
Stereo are stereo drumsamples. Stereo drumsamples  
use twice as many voices as mono drumsamples.  
VM.M and VM.S are respectively mono and stereo  
versions of largecapacity drumsamples.  
3. In the top line of the display, use “Drum Kit  
Select” to select the drum kit that you want to edit.  
Drumsamples are organized into categories such as  
bass drum or snare.  
GM drum kits 48 (GM)–56 (GM) cannot be selected  
here. (It is not possible to edit or write a GM drum  
kit.) If you wish to modify the settings of one of the  
drum kits 48 (GM)–56 (GM), you can use Copy  
Drum Kit to copy it to 00 (INT)–47 (USER), and  
then edit the copy.  
4. Press the Drumsample popup for Drumsample1.  
This brings up a list of Drumsamples, organized by  
category. Use the tabs at the left of the display to  
browse through the different categories.  
For a list of the Drumsample names, please see the  
Voice Name List.  
4. Use the Key parameter to select the note that you  
wish to edit.  
To select a key, you can use any of the standard VALUE  
controllers (the dial, numeric keypad etc.). As a  
shortcut, you can also hold down the Key and play a  
note on the keyboard.  
This Key selection applies to all five Drum Kit editing  
pages.  
5. Use the Assign check box to specify whether the  
key will have its own settings, or use the same  
settings as the next higher note.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Editing a Drum Kit  
Fine-tuning the sound of each sample  
1. If you like, adjust the Levels for the two  
Drumsamples.  
This can be very useful in creating a smooth velocity  
split or crossfade.  
2. As necessary, specify the tuning, EG parameters,  
and filter.  
Access the P5: Drum Kit– Sample Parameter page.  
Adjust Tune, Attack (Amp EG Attack), Decay (Amp  
EG Decay), Cutoff and Resonance for each  
drumsample.  
5. Select a Drumsample by touching its name in the  
list.  
3. You can also edit the drive, boost, and EQ for each  
drumsample.  
6. Press the OK button to confirm your selection.  
Access the P5: Drum Kit– Drive/EQ page.  
7. Switch the slot to 2, and make settings for  
Drumsample 2 in the same way.  
Adjust Drive, Low Boost, and 3 Band EQ Gain [dB]  
for each drumsample.  
Now that you’ve assigned Drumsamples to  
Drumsample1 and Drumsample2, lets set up the  
velocity ranges and crossfades.  
8. Access the P5: Drum Kit– Velocity Split page.  
9. Set Drumsample2’s Threshold Velocity to 1, and  
its Crossfade to Off.  
4. Repeat “Basic Editing,” on page 106 to set up each  
key of the Drum Kit.  
5. You can also copy settings from one key to  
another, using the Copy Key Setup menu  
command.  
Using Exclusive Groups  
1. Access the P5: Drum Kit– Voice/Mixer page.  
2. Use the Exclusive Groups to make one drum  
sound cut off another drum sound such as closed  
and open hihats.  
10. Set Drumsample1’s Threshold Velocity to 80.  
You can edit the Threshold Velocity setting by  
touching and dragging the graphic on the right  
Now, Drumsample2 will sound when you play softly,  
at velocities of 79 or less–and Drumsample1 will sound  
when you play harder, with velocities of 80 or more.  
For example, lets say that you’ve assigned an open hi‐  
hat and a closed hihat to the same exclusive group:  
The meter at the left side of the Velocity Split graphic  
indicates the noteon velocity value. This lets you  
verify the drumsample that will be sounded by a given  
velocity.  
11. Next, set Drumsample1’s Crossfade to 20, and its  
Curve to Linear.  
• Play the open hihat sound.  
• While it’s still ringing, play the closed hihat.  
• The open hihat sound will be cut off–simulating  
the action of a physical hihat.  
Notice that the graphic now shows the two ranges  
tapering into one another. Between 80 and 100,  
Drumsample2 will fade out, and Drumsample1 will  
fade in, creating a gradual velocity transition instead of  
a hard split.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Drum Kits  
5. Use Send1 (to MFX1) and Send2 (to MFX2) to set  
the send levels to the master effects.  
Sustaining the sound even after the key is re-  
leased (Hold)  
Use the Hold function for instruments that should  
continue sustaining even after the key is released, such  
as a crash cymbal. The way this works will depend on  
the settings of the program and drum kit.  
Controlling pan for each key  
To use separate pan settings for each key:  
1. Access the Prog P4: Amp/EQ– Amp1/Driver1 or  
Amp2/Drive2 page.  
Set the Hold function as follows.  
1. Access the Prog P1: Basic/Controllers– NoteOn/  
2. Under Pan, make sure that the Use DKit Setting  
Scale page.  
checkbox is checked.  
If you jumped to the Global P5: Drum Kit page by  
pressing the Jump to Drum kit Edit button from  
Program mode, you can return to Program mode by  
pressing the Return to OSC button.  
When Use DKit Setting is on, the Program will use the  
pan settings for each key of the Drum Kit.  
3. Access the Global P5: Drum Kit– Voice/Mixer  
page.  
4. Use “Pan” to specify the panning for each key.  
2. Under Key Zone, make sure that the Hold check‐  
box is checked.  
Once you’ve turned on Hold for the Program, the  
function is controlled on a notebynote basis  
according to settings within the Drum Kit.  
3. Access the Global P5: Drum Kit– Voice/Mixer  
page.  
Saving Drum Kits  
Once you’ve spent some time editing, you’ll want to  
save your work.  
The contents of your editing in Global mode are  
preserved as long as the power is on, but will be  
lost when you turn off the power. If you want to  
keep your edits, you must execute the Write Drum  
Kits function.  
4. For each key, set the Enable NoteOff Receive  
parameter as desired.  
If this check box is not selected, notes will be held, and  
the sound will continue even after the key is released.  
If it is checked, the key will not be held.  
This will save all drum kits.  
If you turn off Hold in the Program, no keys will be  
held regardless of their Enable NoteOff Receive  
setting.  
Controlling effects for each key  
Drum Kits have their own, builtin mixers. For each  
key, you can control the Insert Effects bussing, Master  
Effects sends, and pan.  
To use separate bus settings for each key:  
1. Access the Prog P8: Routing/IFX– Routing page.  
2. Make sure that the Use DKit Setting checkbox is  
checked.  
When Use DKit Setting is on, the Program will use the  
Bus Select and Effects Send settings for each key of the  
Drum Kit.  
When Use DKit Setting is off, the Program will ignore  
the Drum Kits Bus Select and Effects Send settings.  
3. Access the Global P5: Drum Kit– Voice/Mixer  
page.  
4. Use the Bus (IFX/Output) Select parameter to send  
drum sounds through their own Insert effects, or  
to the L/R outputs.  
If you like, you can send each note to its own Insert  
effect, or to the individual audio outputs, in addition to  
the L/R outputs.  
For example, you might send all snare sounds to IFX1,  
all kick sounds to IFX2, and the remaining sounds to L/  
R.  
Tip: In most preloaded drum kits, the drum  
instruments have the same Bus (IFX/Output) Select  
settings according to their type, as follows.  
Snares IFX1  
Kicks IFX2  
Other IFX3  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting Global KROME setings  
How Global mode is structured  
In Global mode you can adjust overall settings for the  
entire KROME. These consist mainly of the following  
settings.  
• Master tune  
• Key transpose  
• Effect global button  
• Global MIDI channel  
• Creating scales  
• Damper pedal, assignable foot switch/pedal  
• Category names for programs and combinations  
• Creating user drum kits  
• Creating user arpeggio patterns  
Three types of data are handled in Global mode:  
user drum kit settings (Global P5), user arpeggio  
patterns (Global P6), and other global settings  
(Global P0–4). Each of these has a respective  
memory area to store its data. This data can also be  
saved to various types of SD card in Media mode.  
For details, please see “Writing Global settings,  
The Compare function that lets you return to the  
state prior to your editing (or undo edits) is not  
available in Global mode.  
For details on how to access each page, please see  
Global settings  
You can adjust the transposition over a range of ±1  
octave.  
3. Use the Global mode P1: MIDI– MIDI Basic page  
Convert Position parameter to specify the position  
at which the transpose and velocity curve settings  
will be applied.  
PreMIDI is the normal setting. With this setting, the  
Transpose setting described above and the Velocity  
Curve described below will be applied to the KROMEs  
keyboard performance data, and will affect both the  
MIDI OUT and the internal sound generator. This is  
also required in order to record the output of the  
curves into the internal sequencer.  
Basic setup  
Tuning and  
transpose  
settings  
Velocity/  
curve settings  
Effect bypass  
settings  
Link the  
arpeggiator  
Stop the  
arpeggiator  
and drum  
track  
PostMIDI applies the transposition and curves to  
incoming MIDI, for adjusting the KROME response to  
an external MIDI controller.  
When simply playing the internal sounds from the  
KROME keyboard, both settings work the same.  
Tuning and Transposing  
Tuning to another instrument  
To adjust the tuning in fine increments, in order to  
match other instruments or recorded music:  
1. In Global mode, go to P0: Basic Setup– Basic page.  
2. Adjust the Master Tune to the desired pitch.  
The Master Tune is adjustable over a range of ±50 cents  
(one semitone = 100 cents). When Master Tune is at 0,  
middle A is tuned to 440 Hz.  
Adjusting the keyboard response  
Velocity curve let you adjust the way the KROME  
responds to how you play on the keyboard. The  
default setting should work for most players, but there  
are many other choices to let you customize the  
response to match your own style.  
To set the velocity and after touch curves:  
1. In Global mode, go to P0: Basic Setup– Basic page.  
2. Set the Velocity Curve to suit your playing style.  
Velocity Curve 4 is the default, and should work for  
most players.  
Transposing the keyboard  
You can also transpose the keyboard in semitones, for  
quick keychanges (for instance, if the band decides to  
play a song in F rather than E). To do so:  
1. In Global mode, go to P0: Basic Setup– Basic page.  
2. Adjust the Key Transpose as desired.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Adjusting Global KROME setings  
Curve 9 is designed specifically for playing piano  
sounds from the weighted NH keyboards in the 73‐  
note and 88note models.  
For details on the other curves, see the graphic below,  
as well as the “Velocity Curve” section on page 194 of  
the Parameter Guide.  
2. In the “Load ARP when changing” area, if the  
“Program” or “Combination” box is selected,  
switching programs or combinations respectively  
will recall the arpeggiator settings written in that  
program or combination.  
3. Specify the position where the velocity curve will  
be applied. For more about “Convert Position,”  
Disabling the arpeggiator and drum  
track  
1. Access the Global mode P0: Basic Setup– Basic  
page.  
2. If the All ARP/DT Off” box is selected, all  
arpeggiator and drum track functionality will be  
turned off.  
Velocity curves  
Convert Position = PreMIDI  
Velocity (Keyboard to MIDI Out)  
Convert Position = PostMIDI  
Velocity (MIDI In to sound engines)  
127  
MAX  
6
7
Velocity  
8
5
7
Even if the ARP or DRUM TRACK buttons are on, the  
arpeggiator and drum track will not function.  
effect  
8
4
6
5
3
2
4
3
2
1
9
1
9
1
Recalling the last-selected mode and  
page at power-on  
Soft  
Strong  
1
127  
Bypassing the effects  
You can bypass the KROMEs insert effects, master  
effects, and total effects. These settings will bypass the  
effects in all modes. If you’re using effects such as  
reverb or chorus provided by an external effect  
processor, mixer, or DAW, you can bypass the  
KROMEs own effects so that they will not be used.  
Select the  
mode that is  
selected at  
power-on  
Beep setting  
Memory  
protect  
settings  
1. Access the Global mode P0: Basic Setup– Basic  
page.  
2. Use the various Effect Global SW buttons to select  
the effects that you want to bypass. The effect will  
be bypassed if the check box is cleared.  
Clearing the “IFX 15” box: Bypasses the insert effects  
Clearing the “MFX 1&2” box: Bypasses the master  
effects  
1. Access the Global mode P0: Basic Setup– System  
Preferences page.  
2. If the PowerOn Mode is set to Reset (factory  
setting), KROME will automatically select the  
Program mode P0: Play.  
If the Power On Mode is set to Memorize, the location  
(mode and page) and the program or combination  
number that had been selected when you turned off  
the power will be recalled.  
Clearing the “TFX 1&2” box: Bypasses the total effects  
“MFX1&2” and “TFX” can also be controlled by the  
front panel MASTER FX button and TOTAL FX button.  
This is convenient when you want to temporarily turn  
off these effects during a performance.  
Note: These parameters will always be turned on when  
the KROME starts up.  
Enabling a beep tone when the  
display is pressed  
1. Access the Global mode P0: Basic Setup– System  
Preferences page.  
2. If the “Beep Enable” check box is selected, a beep  
tone will sound when you press an object in the  
display. Clear the check box if you don’t want a  
beep to sound.  
Arpeggiator recall settings (Linking  
the arpeggiator with programs or  
combinations)  
You can specify whether the arpeggiator settings  
written into each program or combination will also be  
selected when you select that program or combination,  
or whether the arpeggiator will stay in its current state  
without changing settings.  
With the factory settings, the former will occur. You  
can choose the latter behavior if you want to play  
phrases and patterns with certain arpeggiator settings  
while you switch only the sound between different  
programs or combinations.  
Protecting the memory  
1. Access the Global mode P0: Basic Setup– System  
Preferences page.  
2. If a Memory Protect check box is selected, the  
corresponding write, data load, or song recording  
operation will be disabled, thus protecting the  
contents of memory.  
1. Access the Global mode P0: Basic Setup– Basic  
page.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Global settings MIDI Settings  
Other screen display settings (Edit  
pad function and animation)  
You can keep the edit pad (see page 4) or realtime  
control popup (see page 6) from appearing, and  
disable the animation that appears when a popup is  
displayed.  
1. Access the Global mode P0: Basic Setup– System  
Preferences page.  
2. If the “Value Edit Popup,” “Realtime Controls  
Popup,” and Animation” check box are cleared,  
the respective function will be disabled.  
MIDI Clock synchronization  
The KROME can use its own internal tempo, or  
synchronize to external clocks from either MIDI or  
USB.  
The best generalpurpose setting is Auto. This combine  
the functionality of Internal and External MIDI/USB,  
so that you don’t have to manually switch between the  
two:  
• If external clocks are being received, they control  
the KROME tempo.  
• If external clocks are not being received, the  
KROME uses its internal tempo instead.  
Note: If the KROME is processing large amounts of  
musical data such as from the drum track or sequencer,  
the realtime control popups or animation effects might  
be disabled automatically in some cases.  
Synchronizing to a USB-connected computer  
If you want to synchronize the KROMEs tempo to a  
computer connected via USB:  
1. Go to the Global P1: MIDI– MIDI Basic page.  
2. In the MIDI Setup section, set the MIDI Clock to  
Auto.  
MIDI Settings  
Global MIDI  
channel  
Local  
Control  
on/off  
Pedal and other controller  
settings  
MIDI clock  
settings  
In the Global mode P2: Controllers– Foot Controllers  
page you can assign the functions of the assignable  
buttons and assignable pedals. (See “Connecting a  
Assignable  
button and  
Assignable  
Pedal settings  
Global MIDI  
filter settings  
Global MIDI Channel  
The Global MIDI Channel is the most important MIDI‐  
related setting in the KROME. It determines the main  
MIDI channel used for both Program and Combination  
modes, for instance. To set the Global MIDI Channel:  
1. Go to the Global P1: MIDI– MIDI Basic page.  
2. In the MIDI Setup section, set the MIDI Channel  
as desired.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Adjusting Global KROME setings  
Creating user scales  
Setting Category Names  
In the Global P4: Category pages you can assign names  
to the categories and subcategories of programs and  
combinations.  
The Global P3: Scales page lets you create your own  
original scales. You can create sixteen User Octave  
Scales which allow you to specify the pitch of each note  
in an octave (which will then be applied across all  
octaves), and you can create one User All Note Scale  
which allows you to individually specify the pitch for  
every one of the 128 notes.  
Category  
name  
settings  
By adjusting the pitch of each key in the range of ±99  
cents, you can raise or lower it by approximately one  
semitone relative to the normal pitch.  
The user scales you create here can be used by  
specifying the scale for a program, for each timbre of a  
combination, or for each track of a song.  
Editing the Category/sub category names is very  
simple:  
User Octave  
Scales select  
1. Press the T (Text) button next to the name you’d  
like to edit.  
The text editing dialog will appear.  
Key lock  
button  
2. Enter the new name, and press OK.  
To edit a Sub Category name:  
1. Choose the Main Category from the popup menu.  
2. Edit the SubCategory names as described above.  
You can choose these scales from the following pages.  
Mode  
Page  
P1: Basic/Controllers– Note-On/Scale:  
Scale  
Program  
P3: Timbre Parameters– Scale T01–08/  
T09–16: Scale, Use Program’s Scale  
Combination  
Sequencer  
P3: Track Parameters– Scale T01–08/T09–  
16: Scale, Use Program’s Scale  
Here is how to set the scale type for each timbre in  
Sequencer mode.  
1. Create a user octave scale or a user all notes scale.  
Select a key, and use the VALUE controllers to adjust  
the pitch. The range of ±99 raises or lowers the pitch  
approximately one semitone above or below the  
standard pitch.  
Note: You can also select the key by holding down the  
ENTER button and playing a note on the keyboard.  
Alternatively, you can turn on the key lock button and  
then play a note on the keyboard.  
Note: You can copy one of the preset scales and edit it  
to create an original scale. To do so, use the page menu  
command Copy Scale.  
2. Access the Sequencer mode P3: Track Parameters–  
Other T01–08 or T09–16 page.  
3. If you want the Track to use the scale saved with  
its individual Program, check the track’s “Use  
Program’s Scale” check box.  
Tracks that are not checked will use the scale specified  
by Scale “Type (Songs Scale).”  
4. Set Type (Song’s Scale)” to select the scale for the  
currently selected song.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Loading & saving data  
Saving data  
About preloaded data and preset data  
Saving data on the KROME  
You can save the KROMEs various types of data in the  
following ways.  
• Writing to internal memory  
• Saving to an SD card (commercially available)  
• MIDI data dump  
“Preloaded data” refers to the data that is loaded in the  
KROME when it is shipped from the factory. You are  
free to rewrite this data, and with the exception of the  
demo songs, the data will be written to the location as  
described in “Writing to internal memory.” This data is  
stored in the KROMEs system area.  
You can reload the factory preload data into internal  
memory by using the Global mode menu command  
Load Preload/Demo Data.  
Writing to internal memory  
The following types of data can be written into the  
internal memory.  
Preset data, on the other hand, is data that cannot be  
overwritten by the Write operation. This includes the  
following data.  
• GM program banks GM, g(1)–g(9), g(d)  
• GM drum kits 48(GM)–56(GM)  
• Preset template songs P00–P15  
• Preset patterns P000–P605  
Program  
Programs 000–127 in banks A–F  
Combination  
Combinations 000–127 in banks A–D  
Global settings  
(Global P0: Basic Setup– P4: Category)  
Saving to SD card  
The following data can be saved to an SD card  
(commercially available) inserted in the KROMEs SD  
card slot.  
User drum kits  
00(INT)–47(USER)  
User arpeggio patterns  
U0000(INT)–U1027(USER)  
.PCG file:  
User Drum Track patterns  
U000–U999  
Programs, Combinations, Drum kits, Global  
settings, user Drum Track patterns, and user  
arpeggio patterns (The data that was checked in the  
check boxes of the Save dialog box will be saved.)  
(See page 97)  
User template songs U00–U15  
Song settings such as the song name and tempo,  
track settings (see page 106 of the Parameter  
Guide), arpeggiator, and effect settings can be  
saved (written) to internal memory. However, the  
musical data for song tracks and patterns are not  
saved to internal memory. Furthermore, settings  
that govern how the musical data is played back  
such as Meter, Metronome, PLAY/MUTE, Track  
Play Loop (including Start/End measure), and  
RPPR settings will not be saved either. Use the  
Sequencer mode menu command Save Template  
Song to write this data; for details, please see  
page 164 of the Parameter Guide.  
.SNG file:  
Song and cue list.  
.EXL file:  
System exclusive data from an external device that  
was saved on the KROME (This allows the KROME  
to be used as a data filer.)  
.MID file:  
Saves a Sequencer mode song in Standard MIDI  
File (SMF) format.  
(See the illustration on the following page.)  
MIDI data dump  
The KROME can transmit the following types of data  
as a MIDI data dump; you can save this data on an  
external data filer or other device.  
• Programs, combinations, drum kits, and global  
settings  
• Song and cue list  
Effect presets  
For each effect, you can write parameter settings  
into internal memory by using the menu command  
Write FX Preset.  
The musical data and setup data of a song you  
create in Sequencer mode cannot be saved in the  
KROMEs internal memory. You’ll need to save  
this data to a commercially available SD card or by  
using MIDI data dump.  
• User drum kit patterns  
• User arpeggio pattern  
For details, please see “Dump:” on page 218 of the  
Parameter Guide.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Loading & saving data  
Supported file types  
DOS files  
.PCG file  
All programs  
1 program  
bank A...F  
1 program  
1 combination  
1 drum kit  
DOS directory  
All combinations  
Undefined DOS file  
1 combination  
bank A...D  
All drum kits  
User  
1 drum kit  
bank INT, USER  
All user  
1 user  
arpeggio patterns arpeggiopattern  
bank INT, USER  
All drum track  
patterns  
1 drum track  
pattern  
Global settings  
DOS files  
.SNG file  
Cue list  
.MID file  
.EXL file  
All track  
1 song  
(S000-127)  
1 user pattern  
(U00–99)  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving data Writing to internal memory  
A combination does not contain the actual  
program data for each timbre, but simply  
references the number of the program used by  
each timbre. If you edit a program that is used by a  
combination, or exchange it with a different  
program number, the sound of the combination  
will also change, reflecting the altered program.  
Writing to internal memory  
Writing a Program or Combination  
About the Program and Combination edit  
buffer  
When you select a program in Prog P0: Play or a  
combination in Combi P0: Play, the program or  
combination data is called into the KROMEs edit  
buffer.  
When you then use the various Program or  
Combination pages to edit the parameters, your  
changes will affect the data in the edit buffer.  
1. Verify that the program or combination you want  
to save is selected.  
2. Press the WRITE button.  
Alternatively, press the page menu button in the upper  
right of the display, and select the menu command  
“Write Program” or “Write Combination.”  
The Write Program or Write Combination dialog box  
will appear.  
If you wish to save this modified data into internal  
memory, you must perform the Write operation.  
When you perform the Write operation, the data in the  
edit buffer is written to the specified program or  
combination number of the specified bank.  
If you select another program or combination without  
writing your edits, the data of the newly selected  
program or combination will overwrite the edited data  
in the edit buffer, and your changes will be lost.  
Note: When you press the COMPARE button in  
Program mode, or Combination mode, the data from  
memory (i.e., the contents that were written into  
memory) will be temporarily called into the edit buffer.  
This allows you to compare the settings you are editing  
with the original unedited settings.  
This screenshot is for Program mode  
3. Check the program/combination name displayed  
in the upper line (the writing source).  
4. If you wish to change the name of the program/  
combination, press the text edit button.  
The text dialog box will appear. Enter the name of the  
program/combination. For details, please see “Editing  
Editing applies to the data in the edit  
buffer. Programs or combinations will  
play according to the data in the edit  
buffer.  
Edit  
When you write, the  
Edit Buffer  
After you have entered the name, press the OK button  
to return to the Write Program/Write Combination  
dialog box.  
When you select a program  
or combination, its data is  
called from internal memory  
into the edit buffer.  
program or combination  
settings will be saved in  
internal memory.  
Write  
Select  
5. In “Category,” specify the category of the Program/  
Combination.  
6. Select a “Sub Category” as well.  
Internal Memory  
Program  
Combination  
0...127  
A
0...127  
A
For combinations, the category and subcategory you  
specify here can be selected in the following pages.  
Prog P0: Play  
“Category”  
Combi P0: Play– Program T01–08, 09–16  
“Category”  
Seq P0: Play/REC– Program T01–08, 09–16  
“Category”  
Writing (saving) procedure  
The Program and Combination settings you’ve made  
in the various editing pages can be saved to internal  
memory. This action is referred to as “writing a  
program” or “writing a Combination.” If you want  
your edited data to be preserved after the power is  
turned off, you must perform a Write operation.  
For Programs, the category/subcategory you specify  
here can be selected in the following pages.  
Combi P0: Play– Program T01–08, 09–16  
“Category”  
There are two ways to write a Program or  
Combination.  
7. Use To” to specify the bank and number of the  
writing destination program/combination.  
Use the VALUE controllers or the BANK buttons to  
make your selection.  
8. To execute the Write operation, press the WRITE  
button.  
• Use the WRITE button.  
• Use the Write Program or Write Combination  
menu commands in the upper right of the display.  
Before you can write data into memory, you must  
turn off the memory protect setting in Global  
mode.  
For details, please see “Memory protect” on  
Alternatively, press the OK button in the Write dialog  
box.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Loading & saving data  
To cancel without executing press the Cancel button or  
EXIT button.  
Writing Global settings, User Drum  
Kits and User Arpeggio Patterns  
About the Tone Adjust settings that are  
saved  
There are three types of Tone Adjust parameters, as  
listed below. The way in which settings are written will  
depend on the type.  
Absolute: This type of Tone Adjust parameter  
controls a single program parameter. The Program  
parameter and the Tone Adjust parameter reflect  
each other exactly. If you edit one, the other  
parameter will reflect the identical change. This  
type of Tone Adjust parameter “absolutely”  
controls the program parameter itself.  
Memory in Global mode  
When the power is turned on, the Global mode data is  
called from internal memory into the Global mode  
memory area. Then when you modify the parameters  
in Global mode, the data in the memory area will be  
modified. If you wish to save this modified data in  
internal memory, you must Write it.  
When you write this data, the data in the memory area  
is written into internal memory.  
If you turn off the power without writing, the modified  
data in the memory area will be lost.  
Relative: This type of Tone Adjust parameter  
controls two or more program parameters  
Editing will affect the data that has  
been called into the memory area.  
Edit  
simultaneously. For example, “Filter/Amp EG  
Attack Time” controls a total of six program  
parameters. The value of a relative parameter  
indicates the amount of change that is applied to  
the value of each program parameter it’s affecting.  
When a relative parameter is at zero (i.e., when its  
slider is in the center position), the program  
parameters it controls will function according to  
their original settings. Raising or lowering the value  
of a relative parameter will indirectly raise or lower  
the value of these program parameters.  
Memory Area  
When you Write, the  
various Global mode  
settings will be saved in  
internal memory.  
When the power is  
turned on, the settings  
are called into the  
memory area.  
Write  
Power On  
Internal Memory  
Global Setting  
P0...P4  
Drum Kits  
P5  
Arpeggio Patterns  
P6  
Writing (saving) procedure  
The following three types of Global mode data can be  
saved by writing it into the KROMEs memory.  
Meta: This type of Tone Adjust parameter affects  
other Tone Adjust parameters. It does not affect  
program parameters directly.  
If you’ve adjusted an absolute or a relative Tone Adjust  
parameter, the result of your adjustment will be  
written as follows.  
• Global settings (the settings in Global P0–P4)  
• Drum kits (the settings in Global P5)  
• Arpeggio patterns (the settings in Global P6)  
Changes you make to this data will be remembered as  
long as the power remains on, but will be lost when  
you turn off the power. If you want to keep your  
changes even after turning the power off, you must  
write them into memory.  
The following are exceptions.  
Parameters that are not saved even if you Write  
• Effect Global SW  
Parameters that are saved even if you don’t Write  
• Auto PowerOff  
1. Access the page that contains the parameters or  
settings that you want to save.  
Program mode:  
• The settings of relativetype Tone Adjust  
parameters are automatically applied directly to the  
program parameters when you write the program.  
The Tone Adjust values will be reset to zero.  
• The settings of absolutetype Tone Adjust  
parameters are written “as themselves” (i.e., as the  
new settings of those Tone Adjust parameters).  
Combination mode:  
• The settings of both relativetype and absolutetype  
Tone Adjust parameters are written and preserved  
as the Tone Adjust settings for each timbre.  
For details, please see pages 7, 75 of the Parameter  
Guide.  
Choose one of the P0–P4 pages if you want to write  
global settings, choose P5 if you want to write drum  
kits, or choose P6 if you want to write arpeggio  
patterns.  
2. Press the WRITE button.  
Alternatively, press the page menu button in the upper  
right of the display, and choose “Write Global Setting,”  
“Write Drum Kits,” or “Write Arpeggio Patterns.” The  
corresponding one of the following dialog boxes will  
appear.  
Write Global Setting dialog box (P0–P4)  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Saving data Editing names  
Write Drum Kits dialog box (P5)  
Editing names  
You can modify the name of an edited program,  
combination, song, drum kit, or user arpeggio patterns  
etc.  
You can also modify the category names for programs  
and combinations.  
Write Arpeggio Patterns dialog box (P6)  
These renaming procedures can be performed in the  
following pages.  
Item  
Page  
Prog P0…9 menu command:  
Write Program  
Program  
3. To execute the Write command, press the WRITE  
button.  
Alternatively, press the OK button in the Write dialog  
box.  
If you decide not to execute, press the EXIT button or  
the Cancel button.  
Combi P0…9 menu command:  
Write Combination  
Combination  
Song  
Seq P0…5 menu command:  
Rename Song  
Track  
Seq P6: Track Name  
Pattern  
Seq P10: Pattern Name  
Seq P11: menu command: Rename  
Cue List  
Cue list  
Memory protect  
Program category/  
sub category  
Global P4: Program Category  
To prevent Programs, Combinations, Songs, Drum  
Kits, and User Arpeggio Patterns from being  
overwritten accidentally, the KROME provides a  
Memory Protect setting that prohibits writing to  
memory.  
Before you save edited data or load data from media,  
use the following procedure to turn the memory  
protect off (uncheck the appropriate check box).  
Combination category/  
sub category  
Global P4: Combination Category  
Global P5 menu command:  
Rename Drum Kit  
Drum Kit  
Global P6 menu command:  
Rename Arpeggio Pattern  
Arpeggio Pattern  
Media Save: Save All…Save Exclusive,  
Media Utility menu command:  
Rename, Create Directory, Format  
Seq P0–P11:  
File  
You must also turn memory protect off before loading  
the above data from media or via a MIDI data dump,  
or before recording in Sequencer mode.  
Save Songs and Cue Lists Data  
Prog, Combi, Seq P8, 9 menu  
command: Write FX Preset  
Effect preset  
1. Press the GLOBAL button to enter Global mode.  
2. Access the Global P0: Basic Setup– System  
Preferences page.  
1. In the pages listed above, or after selecting a menu  
command in these pages, press the text edit button  
to access the text edit dialog box.  
Character Set Selects  
the type of character.  
Text  
Cursor  
Character  
buttons  
Shift button  
Switches  
between  
uppercase and  
lowercase  
characters.  
3. Press the “Memory Protect” check box for the type  
of data you wish to write to internal memory, so  
that the box is unchecked.  
Delete button  
Deletes the  
character to the  
left of the cursor.  
Cursor buttons  
Move the cursor  
to left or right.  
Cancel button, OK button  
If you are satisfied with the text  
that you input, press the OK  
button. If you wish to discard  
your input and exit the text edit  
box, press the Cancel button.  
Space button  
Insert a space at  
the cursor location.  
Clear button  
Delete all characters  
of the text.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Loading & saving data  
Removing a card  
Saving to SD card (Media–  
Save)  
Never remove an SD card from the slot while  
loading, saving, or formatting is in progress.  
• Remove the card from the SD card slot.  
For details on the data that can be saved on storage  
media. For details, please see “Saving data” on  
Press the card inward; you will hear a click, and the  
card will pop out partway, allowing you to pull it  
completely out.  
The musical data of a song you create in Sequencer  
mode cannot be saved in the KROMEs internal  
memory. You must save this data on a  
commercially available SD card, or save it using  
MIDI data dump. When you’ve come up with  
settings you like, its a good idea to save them, so  
that even if you subsequently edit those settings,  
you’ll always be able to reload the previous  
settings if desired.  
Refer to the owners manual included with your  
card, and observe the guidelines for handling and  
use.  
Formatting media  
Some consumer electronics products that use SD cards  
utilize their own proprietary format. Before using an  
SD card with the KROME, you must format it on the  
KROME (see page 123).  
Types of SD card you can use  
How to save data  
SD card specifications  
SD memory cards up to 2GB and SDHC memory cards  
up to 32GB are supported.  
SDXC memory cards are not supported.  
MSDOS format FAT16 or FAT32 are supported.  
As an example here, we’ll execute Save All to save the  
.PCG and .SNG files.  
“Save All” saves all internal memory Programs,  
Combinations, Global settings, Drum Kits, User  
Arpeggio Patterns, and Drum Track User Patterns to  
media as a .PCG file. It also saves songs and cue lists as  
a .SNG file.  
This method is available only if the current directory is  
a DOS directory.  
Media is not included. You will need to purchase it  
separately.  
Inserting/removing a card in the SD  
card slot  
If you’ve placed an SD card in the SD card slot, you can  
use it to save or load various types of Program,  
Combination, and Song data.  
If you save this data to lowcapacity media, you  
may need more than one media.  
1. Prepare the media on which you want to save the  
data.  
2. Press the MEDIA button to enter Media mode.  
3. Access the Media– Save page. Press the Save tab.  
4. If the media contains directories, select the  
directory in which you want to save the data.  
Press the Open button to move to a lower level, or  
press the Up button to move to an upper level.  
Note: If you are saving data on highcapacity media,  
we recommend that you create directories to organize  
the media into sections.  
To create a new directory, move to the level at which  
you want to create the directory, and execute the Utility  
menu command Create Directory.  
5. Press the menu button to access the menu, and  
press Save All.  
A dialog box will appear. The contents, settings, and  
operations for the dialog box will depend on the type  
of data that you are saving.  
About the write protect setting of an SD card  
SD cards have a write protect switch that prevents the  
data from being overwritten accidentally and lost. If  
you set the cards Lock (write protect) switch to the  
“protected” setting, it will be impossible to write or  
erase data on the card, or to format it. If you need to  
save edited data on the card, move the switch back to  
its original “unprotected” setting.  
Inserting a card  
• Insert an SD card in the SD card slot.  
With the card label facing upward, insert the connector  
end of the card into the SD card slot and press it in  
until you hear a click.  
SD card slot  
SD card  
Make sure that the card is oriented correctly when  
you insert it. Forcing it in the wrong direction may  
damage the slot or the card, and the data may be  
lost.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Saving data Using the KROME as a data filer  
6. Press the text edit button and input a filename for  
the file you want to save. (See page 117.)  
Cautions when saving  
7. Press each Selection button to access the dialog  
box, and use the check boxes to uncheck any items  
that you do not need to save.  
If an identically named file exists on the media  
If a file with the same name already exists on the  
media, you will be asked whether you want to  
overwrite. If you wish to overwrite, press the OK  
button. If you want to save without overwriting, press  
the Cancel button and rename the file before you save  
it. For details, please see “Editing names” on page 117.  
Please note when saving  
In order to accurately reproduce the data you created,  
we recommend that you check all of the boxes.  
When you’ve finished making settings, press the OK  
button to close the dialog box.  
• When using Save All (PCG & SNG), and Save  
PCG to save combinations, you should also  
remember to save the programs used by each  
timbre (or the drum kits, and user arpeggio  
patterns used by the programs) at the same time.  
8. Press the OK button to execute the Save operation.  
Similarly when saving programs, you should also  
remember to save the drum kits, user drum track  
patterns and user arpeggio patterns used by the  
programs.  
• If the data fits on one volume of media  
The data will be saved on the specified media, and  
you will return to the Save page.  
• If the data does not fit on one volume of media  
The “No space available on media” dialog box will  
appear.  
Time required when saving data  
• The length of time required will depend on the  
amount of data being saved.  
Using the KROME as a data  
filer  
The KROME can receive MIDI System Exclusive data  
sent by an external device, and save this data to media.  
(This is sometimes referred to as the “Data Filer”  
function.) For details, please see “Save Exclusive” on  
page 232 of the Parameter Guide.  
Press the OK button and the file will be divided and  
saved to multiple volumes of media. If you don’t want  
to divide the file, press the Cancel button, and resave  
it to largercapacity media.  
For details, please see “If the data being saved does not  
fit on one volume of media” on page 231 of the  
Parameter Guide.  
9. When saving ends and you return to the Save  
page, the display will show the file that was saved.  
The various types of data are saved as the following  
files.  
• .PCG file  
• .SNG file  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Loading & saving data  
Loading data  
Data that can be loaded  
Loading data from SD card  
(Media–Load)  
Loading from media  
You can load the following data from media.  
.PCG file:  
Loading all Programs, Combinations,  
Drum Kits and Arpeggio patterns  
Here we’ll explain how to load all data from a .PCG file  
containing Programs, Combinations, Drum kits,  
Global settings, User Arpeggio patterns, and Drum  
Track patterns in a single operation.  
Programs, Combinations, Drum Kits, Global  
settings, User Arpeggio Patterns, and User Drum  
Track patterns  
.SNG file:  
Song and cue list.  
When loading Programs, Combinations, Songs, or  
Drum Kits, you must make sure that the Global  
mode memory protect setting is unchecked. For  
details, please see “Memory protect” on page 117.  
.MID file:  
Standard MIDI file (SMF) format  
.EXL file:  
MIDI exclusive data  
Note: Please see page 117 for details on the SD card  
from which you can load data.  
Loading the preloaded data and  
demo songs to restore the factory  
settings  
1. Make sure that the media is ready for you to load  
data. For details, please see “Inserting/removing a  
2. Access the Media– Load page. Press the Load tab.  
You can load the factory settings and demo songs back  
into the KROMEs internal memory. For the procedure,  
3. Press the .PCG file containing the program and  
combination data you want to load, so that the file  
is highlighted.  
Preload data:  
• If there are directories, press the Open button to  
move to a lower level, or press the Up button to  
move back to the higher level.  
Programs, Combinations, Drum Kits, Global  
settings, User Arpeggio Patterns  
• Demo song data  
4. Press the Load button. Alternatively, choose the  
menu command “Load Selected.”  
A dialog box will appear.  
5. If you want to load song data at the same time,  
select the “Load ********.SNG too” box. When you  
execute the load operation, the .SNG file will be  
loaded together with the .PCG file.  
Use “Select .SNG Allocation” to specify the destination  
to which the song data will be loaded.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Loading data Loading data from SD card (Media–Load)  
App end” will load the song into the song number that  
follows the song(s) currently existing in internal  
memory, without leaving a vacant number.  
2. Press the Load button. Alternatively, choose the  
menu command “Load Selected.”  
A dialog box will appear.  
“Clear” will erase all songs from internal memory, and  
load the songs into the numbers from which they were  
saved.  
6. Press the OK button. All data from the .PCG file  
will be loaded into the KROME.  
Never remove the media while data is being  
loaded.  
Note: You can load individual banks of programs or  
combinations. For details, please see page 228 and  
following of the Parameter Guide.  
3. Use the “Combination” (upper line) to select the  
loadsource combination, and use “(To)  
Combination” (lower line) to specify the  
destination combination. For this example, select  
D000.  
You can press the popup button and select from a  
menu, or use the BANK buttons and numeric keys to  
make a selection.  
Loading individual data from a .PCG  
file  
The KROME lets you load Programs, Combinations,  
Drum kits, user Drum Kit patterns, User Arpeggio  
patterns individually or by individual banks. This is a  
convenient way to rearrange Combinations in the  
order in which you will use them during a live  
performance.  
4. Press the OK button to execute loading; the loaded  
combination will be assigned to D000.  
Loading songs for use in Sequencer  
mode (.SNG)  
As an example here, we will explain how to load a  
song. We’ll assume that this song uses edited  
programs, multisamples you sampled and programs  
that use drumkit and user arpeggio patterns etc. In  
such cases, it is best to load “all data.”  
1. Perform steps 1–3 under “Loading all Programs,  
on page 120. Select the .SNG file containing the  
data you want to load (it will be highlighted).  
2. Press the Load button. Alternatively, choose the  
menu command Load Selected.  
Be aware that if you change the order of Programs,  
the sounds played by Combinations may also be  
affected.  
As an example here, we will explain how a  
combination saved in bank A can be loaded into D000.  
1. Move to the “Bank A” directory, and select the  
Combination that you want to load. (.PCG file/  
Combinations/Bank A/)  
The procedure is as follows:  
• Perform steps 1–3 under “Loading all Programs,  
on page 120. Select the .PCG file containing the data  
you want to load (it will be highlighted), and press  
the Open button.  
A dialog box will appear.  
• Press “Combinations” to highlight it, and press the  
Open button.  
• Press “Bank A” to highlight it, and press the Open  
button.  
• Press the scroll bar to find the Combination you  
want to load, and highlight it.  
Alternatively, you could select any file, since the  
desired file can be selected later from the dialog box.  
Note: The contents and settings of the dialog box will  
differ depending on the type of file that you are  
loading.  
3. Check the “Load ********.PCG too” check box.  
When you execute loading, the .PCG file will be loaded  
along with the .SNG file.  
Use “Select .SNG Allocation” to specify the destination  
to which the song data will be loaded.  
Append” will load the song into the song number that  
follows the song(s) currently existing in internal  
memory, without leaving a vacant number.  
“Clear” will erase all songs from internal memory, and  
load the songs into the numbers from which they were  
saved.  
Note: When you press the keyboard of the KROME,  
you will hear the combination you have selected.  
However, the internal programs will be used as the  
program of each timbre.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading & saving data  
4. Press the OK button to execute loading.  
Never remove the media while data is being  
loaded.  
Loading KROME system update data  
You can update the KROMEs system by downloading  
the most recent version of the system file from the  
Korg website (http://www.korg.com) to your  
computer, and loading it into the KROME. For details  
on the procedure, please see the Korg website and to  
“Update System Software” on page 218 of the  
Parameter Guide.  
Use the Global mode menu command Update System  
Software to load the system update data.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Media utility Formatting media  
Media utility  
Formatting media  
Newly purchased media or media that has been used  
by another device cannot be used “as is;” you must  
format the media before you can use it with the  
KROME.  
Setting the current time  
Specify the date and time; this is used to record the  
correct date and time when you save data. You can set  
the date and time by using the Media Utility pages Set  
Date/Time menu command.  
When you format media, all data that had been  
saved on that media will be erased. Be sure to  
doublecheck media for data before you format.  
After formatting, it is not possible to press the  
COMPARE button to return to the previous state.  
The KROME does not contain an internal calendar  
or clock, you must use the Utility menu command  
Set Date/Time to set the date and time before  
saving the file.  
1. Press the MEDIA button to enter Media mode.  
1. Make sure that the media you want to format is  
inserted. For details, please see “Inserting/  
2. Access the Media– Utility page. Press the Utility  
tab.  
3. Open the menu, and select the Set Date/Time  
command.  
2. Access the Media– Utility page. Press the Utility  
tab.  
The following dialog box will appear.  
3. Press the menu button to access the menu, and  
press “Format” to open the dialog box.  
4. Use the VALUE controllers to set the correct year,  
month, day, hour, minute, and second.  
5. Press the OK button.  
4. In Volume Label,” use the text edit button to  
access the text edit dialog box, and specify the  
volume label.  
The previouslyspecified volume label will be  
displayed. If no volume label had been specified for the  
media, or if a nonDOS media was inserted, this will  
indicate “NEW VOLUME.”  
5. Specify the initialization format.  
Quick Format: This erases the file information on the  
SD card, allowing the card to be formatted quickly.  
Normally you’ll use this method of formatting.  
Full Format: All blocks on the media will be erased.  
Normally, there is no need to apply a Full Format; you  
should simply execute Quick Format.  
6. Press the OK button to format, or press the Cancel  
button if you decide to cancel.  
When you press the OK button, a message will ask you  
for confirmation. Press the OK button once again to  
execute the Format operation.  
You must use the KROME to format the media.  
The KROME will not correctly recognize media  
that has been formatted by another device.  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Loading & saving data  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Restoring the factory settings  
3. In the “Kind” field, select All (Preload PCG and  
Demo Songs).  
Loading the preloaded data  
4. Press the OK button to load the preload data. If  
you decide not to load the preload data, press the  
Cancel button.  
When you press the OK button, a dialog box will ask  
you for confirmation. Press the OK button to execute  
loading.  
The original preload data is backed up in the KROME,  
so you can restore any or all of the Programs,  
Combinations, Drum Kits, User Arpeggio Patterns,  
and Global settings to their original factory settings.  
Note: The original demo songs can be reloaded at any  
time. For details, please see About the data loaded by  
User banks and user patterns into which preload data  
has not been loaded will remain unchanged. If you  
want to erase user banks or user patterns, initialize the  
KROME and then load the preload data. For more  
Note: When the dialog box is displayed, the ENTER  
button performs the same function as the OK button.  
About the data loaded by All (Preload PCG  
and Demo Songs)  
When you execute All Preload PCG, the following data  
will be loaded:  
• Program: Bank A, B, C, D, E  
• Combination: Bank A, B, C  
• Drum Kit: 00(INT)–31(INT)  
• User Arpeggio Pattern: U0000(INT)–U899(INT)  
• Global Setting  
Never turn off the power while the data is being  
loaded.  
Before you load the preload data, go to the Global  
mode P0: Basic Setup– System Preferences page,  
and uncheck the “Memory Protect” settings for the  
data that you want to load. If you execute this  
procedure with these settings checked, the data  
will not be loaded.  
Loading the preloaded data will overwrite the  
contents of the internal memory. If you want to  
keep the existing data that is stored in internal  
memory, use “Save All (PCG&SNG)” or “Save  
PCG” to save your data to external media before  
you continue.  
If you execute All (Preload PCG and Demo Songs), the  
demo songs will be loaded as well as the above data.  
• Demo Song: S000–003  
Only when executing All (Preload PCG and Demo  
Song)  
Note: As with the other user songs, the Demo Song  
data will not remain in Sequencer mode when you turn  
off the power. You’ll need to load it again if necessary.  
1. Access the Global mode P0: Basic Setup– Basic  
page.  
Enter Global mode by pressing the GLOBAL button  
or by using the mode button.  
If the Global P0: Basic Setup– Basic page is not  
shown, press the EXIT button.  
Initialization  
If your KROME should become unstable, you can  
initialize it.  
• Turn off the power, and then, while holding down  
the EXIT button and PAGE button, turn the power  
on.  
2. Press the menu button, and choose “Load Preload/  
Demo Data.”  
A dialog box will appear.  
The KROME will be initialized. While the data is  
being loaded, the display will indicate “Now writ‐  
ing into internal memory.”  
The resulting state will be the same as when Load  
Preload/Demo Data All is executed (see page 125).  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Appendices  
Troubleshooting  
If you experience problems, please see the relevant  
item and take the appropriate measures.  
1. Press the GLOBAL button (lit).  
2. Press the EXIT button several times.  
3. Hold down the ENTER button and press 4 on the  
numeric keypad.  
The Touch Panel Calibration page will appear. Follow  
the onscreen instructions to recalibrate the touch  
panel.  
Power supply  
Power does not turn on  
Is the AC adapter connected to an outlet? p.15  
Can’t switch modes or pages  
If you’re doing any of the following, you may not be  
Power turns off  
Could the Auto PowerOff function be enabled? p.16  
able to change modes or switch to a different page:  
• Recording or playing back a song or pattern.  
Alternatively, could the KROME be in the paused  
PAUSE ( ) or recordready condition?  
Display  
Could something be pressing the TouchView display?  
Could a realtime control popup or similar message be  
displayed?  
• Disabling “Animation,” “Value Edit Popup,”  
“REALTIME CONTROLS Popup” (Global P0:  
Basic Setup– System Preferences) will improve the  
response time and performance.  
The power is turned on, but nothing is shown  
on the display. The KROME functions normal-  
ly when you play the keyboard or perform  
other procedures.  
Access the Global mode menu “Display Setup” (Global  
P0: Basic Setup), and use “Brightness” to adjust the  
contrast of the display. PG p.216  
In Combination, or Sequencer modes, you  
can’t edit the value of Timbre/Track parame-  
ters such as MIDI Channel or Status  
Some parameters can’t be edited while notes are  
playing, either locally or from MIDI. If the damper  
pedal is held down, or if its calibration is incorrect,  
notes may be sustaining even if they aren’t audible.  
• Are you using a damper pedal with a polarity that  
does not match the Damper Polarity setting (Global  
P2: Controllers– Foot Controllers)? p.18  
• In some cases, this problem can be solved be  
executing the menu command Half Damper  
Calibration (Global P0: Basic Setup). PG p.217  
The power is turned on, but the display does  
not work normally, or an error message is dis-  
played. There is no sound when you play the  
keyboard, and the KROME does not function  
normally.  
This type of problem may occur if a data writing  
operation to internal memory was not completed  
correctly, for example, if the power of the KROME was  
turned off while a program or other data was being  
written. If this occurs, use the following procedure to  
initialize the KROMEs internal memory.  
1. Turn off the power.  
No beep sounds when you touch the display  
Check the Beep Enable check box (Global P0: Basic  
Setup– System Preferences). p.110  
2. Initialize the KROME. While holding down the  
EXIT button and the PAGE button located beside  
it, turn on the power of the KROME.  
The KROME will be initialized, and data will be  
written into internal memory. While the data is  
being written, the display will indicate “Now writ‐  
ing into internal memory.”  
Audio output  
After initialization, all user data will be empty, and  
you will need to reload the preload data. Execute  
the Global mode menu command Load Preload/  
Demo Data to load the data. p.125  
No sound  
Are connections made correctly to your amp, mixer, or  
headphones? p.17  
Is the connected amp or mixer poweredon, and is its  
volume raised?  
Operations in the display don’t work, the po-  
sition has drifted, the response is poor  
On the Global P0: Basic Setup page, use the Touch  
Panel Calibration menu command to adjust the touch  
panel response. PG p.217  
In order to perform the calibration optimally, use a  
stylus pen to accurately press the center of the symbol  
(calibration target) that appears in the corner of the  
display.  
Is Local Control turned on?  
• In Global P1: MIDI, check the Local Control On  
check box. PG p.198  
Could the VOLUME knob be turned all the way to the  
Is the Master Volume assigned to Foot Pedal Assign,  
and is that pedal volume lowered? p.19  
Could the program be muted? p.27  
If a specific timbre doesn’t sound in Combination  
mode, is its Play/Mute button set to Play?  
Note: If you are unable to select commands from the  
menu, do the following:  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Troubleshooting Programs and Combinations  
Alternatively, are all Solo button settings turned off?  
Pitch is incorrect  
• In the Global P0: Basic Setup page, are the Master  
If a specific track doesn’t sound in Sequencer mode, is  
its Play/Rec/Mute button set to Play? Alternatively, are  
all Solo button settings turned off? p.55  
Tune and Transpose settings correct? p.109  
• In the Prog P2: OSC/Pitch page, is the Pitch Slope  
set to +1.0? PG p.20  
Make sure that the Status is INT or BTH. p.50, p.57  
• In the combination or song, are the Transpose and  
Detune settings of each timbre/track set  
appropriately? PG p.82, p.127  
• In the timbre/track settings of each program,  
combination, or song, could you have selected a  
nonstandard scale type other than Equal  
Temperament? PG p.15, p.83, p.128  
Are the Key Zone and Velocity Zone set so that sound  
will be produced when you play? PG p.14, p.84,  
p.129  
Is the Oscillator, Drum Track, Timbre, or Track level  
lowered in the control surface mixer? p.27, p.46, p.55  
Could the level of the Master Volume following the  
total effect have been lowered? PG p.62, p.99, p.152  
Could the total polyphony be exceeding the maximum  
polyphony of 120 voices? p.32  
Programs and Combinations  
Notes do not stop  
Settings for oscillator 2 are not displayed  
In Prog P1: Basic/Controllers– NoteOn/Scale, select  
the Program Basic page, make sure that the Hold check  
box is unchecked. PG p.14  
Make sure that the Oscillator Mode (Prog P1: Basic/  
Controllers) parameter is set to Double or Double  
Did you use Tone Adjust to turn Hold on? PG p.10  
In Global P2: Controller, make sure that Damper  
Polarity or Foot Switch Polarity is set correctly.  
PG p.202  
If the DRUM TRACK or ARP buttons are turned on,  
try turning them off.  
Program does not sound  
Could the oscillator or amp level be lowered?  
PG p.5, p.6, p.35  
Could the program be muted?  
• Use the Play/Mute button in the Prog P0: Play–  
Mixer & Drum Track page to mute/unmute a  
program, or in the Combi P0: Play– Program T01–  
08 and T09–16 pages to mute/unmute a  
combination.  
Notes are sounded in duplicate  
Is Local Control turned Off?  
• Clear the Local Control On checkbox (Global P1:  
MIDI). PG p.198  
A combination does not play correctly after  
you load data  
In the dialog box when you saved the data, did you  
check the items that you wanted to save? PG p.231  
Are the bank/numbers of the programs used by the  
combination the same as when the combination was  
created?  
• If you have switched program banks, you can use  
the Global mode Change all bank references menu  
command to change the program bank for each  
timbre of a combination. PG p.216  
Noise or oscillation is heard  
When using the MIDI/Tempo Sync function to control  
the delay time of an effect, noise may occur in the delay  
sound. This noise is due to discontinuities in the delay  
sound, and is not a malfunction.  
Some effects, such as 019: Stereo Analog Record,  
generate noise intentionally. It is also possible to create  
oscillation using a filter with resonance. These are not  
malfunctions.  
Note that if you use the following effects with the  
routing described below, a feedback loop will be  
created, possibly producing a loud noise. Please use  
caution.  
If the signal from an oscillator or timbre/track output,  
or the signal after an insert effect, is sent to the FX  
Control bus and that signal is output directly, with this  
output sent to the FX Control bus, a loud noise may be  
output. (It is also possible that a DC component will be  
output at the maximum level, producing silence.)  
Can’t write a Program  
Is the Memory Protect Program or Combination  
checkbox (Global P0) cleared? p.110, and PG p.197  
• When using the 003: Stereo Limiter or 006: Stereo  
Gate, and the Envelope Source of these effects is set  
as either FX Control 1 or FX Control 2, and Trigger  
Monitor is On.  
• When using 174: Vocoder, with the Modulator  
Source set to FX Control 1 or FX Control 2, and the  
Modulator High Mix set to other than 0.  
Can’t play chords  
Could the programs Voice Assign Mode be set to  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendices  
Songs  
Arpeggiator  
Song does not play correctly after being loaded  
The Arpeggiator does not start  
In the dialog box when you saved the data, did you  
check all of the items that you wanted to save?  
PG p.231  
Are the programs used by the song the same as when  
the song was created?  
Is the ARP button turned on (lit)? p.85  
If the arpeggiator does not start for a combination or  
song, make sure that Arpeggiator Run is checked, and  
that an arpeggiator is selected for Assign. p.88, and  
PG p.74, p.92, p.114  
• If you have switched program banks, you can use  
the Global mode Change all bank references menu  
command to change the program bank for each  
track of a song. PG p.216  
If the arpeggiator does not run in the Global P6:  
Arpeggio Pattern page, could you have navigated  
there from Combination or Sequencer mode with  
settings that do not start the arpeggiator?  
• When saving the song, it is best to use Save All  
(PCG&SNG) so that the programs are saved  
together with the song. Then when loading, load  
both the .PCG and the .SEQ data. PG p.231  
Is the MIDI Clock (Global P1: MIDI) parameter set to  
Internal? PG p.199  
In the Global P0: Basic Setup page, is All ARP/DT Off  
checked? PG p.195  
Playback does not start when you press the  
SEQUENCER START/STOP (  
Sequencer mode  
Is the MIDI Clock (Global P1: MIDI) set to Internal or  
Auto? PG p.199  
) button in  
Drum Track function  
The Drum Track does not start  
Is the DRUM TRACK button turned on (lit)? p.97  
You pressed the DRUM TRACK button but the drum  
track pattern did not start.  
• Is the DRUM TRACK button blinking? Trigger  
Mode is set to Wait KBD Trigger. The drum track  
pattern will start when you play the keyboard or  
receive a noteon. PG p.56  
Can’t record in Sequencer mode  
Did you use Track Select to select the MIDI track that  
you want to record? p.60  
Is the Memory Protect Song check box (Global P0)  
unchecked? p.110, and PG p.197  
Is the MIDI Clock (Global P1: MIDI) set to Internal or  
Auto? PG p.199  
• Did you select a pattern that does not contain data?  
• Could P000: Off be selected as the pattern?  
A combination copied using “Copy From Com-  
bi” doesn’t record via arpeggiator as it did  
when you were playing it in Combination mode  
Is Multi REC (Seq P0: Play/REC) checked? p.60, and  
PG p.118  
Are the settings in the Copy from Combination dialog  
box correct? PG p.166  
• In the Copy from Combination dialog box, check  
the Auto adjust Arp setting for Multi REC option  
before you execute the copy. This will cause the  
settings to be adjusted automatically.  
PG p.55  
If the drum track pattern fails to start in Combination  
mode, is the Output setting appropriate?  
If the drum track pattern fails to start in Sequencer  
mode, are the Input and Output settings appropriate?  
p.99, and PG p.146  
Is MIDI Clock (Global P1: MIDI) set to Internal or  
Auto? PG p.199  
In the Global P0: Basic Setup page, is All ARP/DT Off  
checked? PG p.195  
Can’t record Tone Adjust data  
Changes you make using Tone Adjust are recorded as  
system exclusive data. Did you check the Global mode  
MIDI Filter Enable Exclusive check box? PG p.201  
Drum Kits  
The drumsample’s pitch does not change  
RPPR does not start  
Is the Seq P0: Play/REC RPPR setting checked? p.72  
Are Assign, Pattern Select, and Track set correctly?  
Is the MIDI Clock (Global P1: MIDI) parameter set to  
Internal or Auto? PG p.199  
You have left the Assign check box unchecked, and  
want to play the drumsample at the adjacent right a  
semitone lower, but the pitch does not change.  
• If you have selected a drum program in Program  
mode, and then want to edit the drum kit in Global  
mode, go to the Prog P2: OSC/Pitch– OSC1 Pitch  
page and set Pitch Slope to +1.0 before you enter  
Global mode. PG p.20  
SMF you loaded in Media mode won’t play  
correctly  
Execute the menu command GM Initialize to restore  
the settings. PG p.165  
Set Bank Map to GM(2) and load the data again.  
PG p.196  
Can’t edit the drum kit for Double Drums  
OSC2  
• Access the P2: OSC/Pitch– OSC2 Setup page, and  
move to Global mode by pressing the Jump to  
Drum Kit Edit button.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Troubleshooting Effects  
Effects  
Media  
Effects are not audible  
Can’t format the SD card  
Have you selected effect program 000 (No Effect)?  
• Select an effect other than 000: No Effect for “IFX1–  
5,” “MFX 1, 2” or “TFX.”  
Does the media meet the requirements for use on the  
Is the media inserted correctly? p.118  
Are the Effect Global SW IFX 1–5, MFX1&2, or TFX  
(Global P0: Basic Setup page) settings checked?  
PG p.195  
If you are in Combination and Sequencer mode, and  
master effects are not audible when you raise the  
Send1 or Send2 of the timbre/track, does Return 1 or  
Return 2 from the master effect need to be raised?  
PG p.61, p.99, p.152  
Alternatively, has Send 1 or Send 2 for each oscillator  
of the program used by the timbre/track been lowered?  
PG p.96, p.148  
Note: The actual send level is determined by  
multiplying the send setting of each oscillator in the  
program with the send setting of the timbre/track.  
Could the medias Lock (write protect) switch be on?  
Can’t save/load data on the SD card  
Is the media inserted correctly? p.118  
Has the media been formatted? p.123  
Could the medias Lock (write protect) switch be on?  
The date of the data is wrong  
The files you saved have the incorrect date.  
• The KROME does not contain an internal calendar.  
Use the menu command Set Date/Time (Media–  
Utility page) to specify the current time and date  
before you save the data. p.123  
Have you routed the output to an insert effect?  
PG p.57, p.58, p.96, p.98, p.148, p.149  
Connections with a computer  
The KROME does not respond to MIDI data  
sent from outside  
Is the USB cable connected correctly? p.20  
MIDI  
The KROME does not respond to incoming MIDI  
data  
The computer does not detect the KROME  
Are all MIDI cables or USB cables connected correctly?  
Are the USB cables connected correctly?  
An error occurs when you disconnect from  
the computer  
Never disconnect the KROME from the computer  
while your host application is in use.  
Are the KROMEs receive settings (such as the global  
MIDI channel and the timbre/tracks receive channel)  
set to match the channels of the transmitting device?  
PG p.360  
The KROME does not respond correctly to in-  
coming MIDI data  
While connected, you are asked to install  
software or a device driver  
Are the Global P1: MIDI settings MIDI Filter Enable  
Program Change, Enable Bank Change, Enable  
Control Change, Enable AfterTouch, and Enable  
Exclusive each checked? PG p.200  
Does the KROME support the types of messages that  
are being sent to it? PG p.360  
Does the operating system or version of your computer  
support the KROME?  
When using USB, sound processing is slow, or  
the tempo is unstable  
Is the KORG USBMIDI driver installed correctly?  
• You must install the dedicated Korg driver in order  
to use the KROME via USB MIDI.  
Can’t recall programs of the desired bank  
Is the Bank Map setting correct? PG p.196  
If your computers operating system is Windows,  
you’ll need to install the driver for each USB port  
where you connect the KROME.  
If you connect the KROME to a different USB port  
than the one you used when installing the KORG  
USBMIDI Driver for Windows, you’ll need to rein‐  
stall the KORG USB MIDI driver.  
Damper pedal  
Damper response is wrong  
Execute the menu command Half Damper Calibration  
(Global P0: Basic Setup) to correctly calibrate the half‐  
damper pedal sensitivity. PG p.217  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Appendices  
Error messages  
Destination is empty  
Error and confirmation  
messages  
Meaning: When editing, the track or pattern that was  
specified as the destination contains no musical data.  
To solve this problem:  
• Select a track or pattern that contains musical data.  
A
Destination measure is empty  
Meaning: The measure that was specified as the  
destination contains no data.  
Are you sure ?  
Meaning: This message asks you to confirm execution.  
To execute press the OK button. To cancel, press the  
Cancel button.  
• Specify a destination measure that contains data.  
Destination song is empty  
Meaning: The song that was specified as the copy  
C
destination or bounce destination does not exist.  
Can’t calibrate  
Meaning: Calibration could not be performed  
correctly.  
• Execute the Create New Song command in the  
dialog box that appears when a new song is  
selected before copying or bouncing. (See page 57)  
• Try again.  
Directory is not empty  
Cleanup directory  
Are you sure?  
Can’t copy/swap double size effect  
Meaning: When copying or swapping an insertion  
effect or master effect, you attempted to place a  
doublesize effect in IFX5 and MFX2.  
Meaning: When deleting a directory, files or  
directories exist within that directory.  
• Press the OK button to delete all files and/or  
directories within that directory.  
• Modify your settings so that a doublesize effect is  
not moved to IFX5 or MFX2, and execute again.  
E
Can’t open pattern  
Continue?  
Meaning: When you finished recording, there was not  
enough memory to open the pattern that was put into  
the track (When it must be opened automatically). If  
you press the OK button, the pattern data will be  
deleted, and the recorded or edited content will be  
saved. If you press the Cancel button, the recorded  
content will be discarded.  
Error in formatting media  
Meaning: An error occurred while performing a  
physical format (full format) or highlevel format  
(quick format) of the media. To solve this problem:  
• Use other media.  
Error in reading from media  
Meaning: An error occurred while reading data from  
media. This error may also appear when data is being  
written to media by a Save or Copy operation. To solve  
this problem:  
• Execute the reading procedure once again. If the  
same error occurs, it is possible that the data on the  
media has been damaged.  
Completed  
Meaning: The processing executed by the command  
has been completed.  
Completed. Please turn the power off, and then  
on again  
Meaning: Execution of Update System Software has  
been completed successfully. Turn the power switch  
off, and then on again to complete the update.  
Error in writing to media  
Meaning: A verification error occurred while writing  
data to a media. To solve this problem:  
• It is possible that the media has been physically  
damaged. Try another media. Avoid using the  
media that produced the error.  
D
Destination and source are identical  
Meaning: When copying or bouncing, the same song,  
track or pattern was selected for both the source and  
destination. To solve this problem:  
• Select a different song, track, or pattern for the  
source and destination.  
F
File already exists  
Meaning: When executing a Create Directory or File  
Rename procedure, a directory or file of the same  
name already exists on the media.  
Destination from-measure within the limits of  
source  
Meaning: When executing the Move Measure  
command for all tracks or within the same track, the  
specified destination measure is within the source  
range. To solve this problem:  
Meaning: When executing the Media mode Utility  
Copy command without using wild cards, the copy  
destination contained a file of the same name as the  
copy source.  
• Set a destination measure that is outside of the  
source range.  
• Either delete the existing directory or file, or specify  
a different name.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Error messages Error and confirmation messages  
Measure number over limit  
File unavailable  
Meaning: You attempted to load or open a file whose  
format was incorrect.  
Meaning: The attempted edit procedure would cause  
the track length to exceed 999 measures.  
• Delete unnecessary measures.  
File/path not found  
Measure size over limit  
Meaning: When executing the Delete command in the  
Media mode Utility page, the specified file did not  
exist.  
Meaning: When executing the Copy command in the  
Media mode Utility page, and you used a wild card to  
specify the copy file name, the specified file was not  
found. Alternatively, the length of the copy source path  
name exceeded 76 characters.  
Meaning: When loading a Standard MIDI File, the  
number of events in a measure exceeded the maximum  
(approximately 65,535 events).  
Meaning: The attempted edit procedure would cause  
the maximum number of events in a measure  
(approximately 65,535) to be exceeded.  
To solve either of these problems:  
• Use event editing etc. to delete unwanted data.  
Meaning: In Media mode when you used the Open  
button to open a directory, the path length including  
the selected directory name exceeded 76 characters.  
Media changed  
• Check the file or directory.  
Meaning: When executing the Copy command in the  
Media mode Utility page, the media was exchanged or  
ejected, and it was not possible to copy between  
separate media on the same drive.  
Meaning: When you pressed the WRITE button to save  
your data in Sequencer mode, the media was not in a  
state that allowed saving, or the previouslyopened  
directory was not a location where SNG files could be  
saved.  
• If the savedestination directory is something other  
than the DOS directory from which you opened a  
.PCG or .SNG file, a message such as “File/path not  
found” will appear, and the data cannot be saved.  
In this case, move to Media mode, select an  
appropriate savedestination, and then execute  
Save All or Save SEQ.  
Media unavailable  
Meaning: You selected a media source that does not  
allow writing.  
Media write protected  
Meaning: The other writingdestination media is  
writeprotected.  
• Turn off write protect on the other media, and  
execute the command once again.  
Memory full  
I
Meaning: When editing a song, track or pattern in  
Sequencer mode, the total data of all songs has used up  
all of the sequence data memory, and further editing is  
not possible. To solve this problem:  
Illegal file description  
Meaning: The filename that you specified when saving  
a file or creating a directory contained invalid  
characters. To solve this problem:  
• Change the filename you are specifying. Filenames  
not permitted by MSDOS cannot be used as a  
filename.  
• Delete other song data etc. to regain free memory.  
Meaning: While realtime recording in Sequencer  
mode, there is no more free memory to accommodate  
the recorded data, so recording has been forcibly  
halted. To solve this problem:  
Illegal SMF data  
• Delete other song data etc. to regain the amount of  
free memory.  
Meaning: You attempted to load a file that was not a  
Standard MIDI File.  
Memory overflow  
Illegal SMF division  
Meaning: While receiving exclusive data in Media  
mode Save Exclusive, all remaining internal memory  
was used up. To solve this problem:  
• If you are receiving two or more sets of exclusive  
data, transmit them separately to the KROME.  
Meaning: You attempted to load a Standard MIDI File  
that was timecodebased.  
Illegal SMF format  
Meaning: You attempted to load a Standard MIDI File  
of a format other than 0 or 1.  
Memory Protected  
Meaning: The internal program, combination, song,  
M
drum kit, user arpeggio pattern is protected.  
Master Track can’t be recorded alone  
• In Global mode, turn off writeprotect, and execute  
Meaning: When realtimerecording a single track, you  
attempted to begin recording with the master track as  
the current track.  
the write or load procedure once again.  
MIDI data receiving error  
Meaning: While receiving MIDI System Exclusive  
data, the format of the received data was invalid, for  
example, because the size of the data was incorrect.  
• Select a MIDI track for recording, instead of the  
Master Track.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Not enough memory to open pattern  
Meaning: There was insufficient sequencer memory to  
open the pattern, so editing is not possible.  
• Either delete unwanted data such as a song, track,  
or pattern, or do not open the pattern.  
N
No data  
Meaning: When loading a Standard MIDI File, the file  
contained no events.  
No media  
Not enough pattern locations available  
Meaning: When executing a command in Media mode,  
no media was inserted in the drive. To solve this  
problem:  
Meaning: When executing Load Drum Track Pattern,  
the attempted load procedure would exceed the  
remaining number of user patterns in the selected  
song.  
• Create a new song, and reload the data into the user  
patterns of that song. You can load up to 100 user  
patterns into each song. If you have more drum  
track patterns than this to load, you can divide  
them between two or more songs.  
• Insert media, and navigate to an appropriate  
directory that the KROME will recognize. p.118  
No recording track specified  
Meaning: When performing realtime multitrack  
recording, you attempted to begin recording with no  
tracks set to REC. To solve this problem:  
Not enough song locations available  
• Set the desired tracks for recording to REC.  
Meaning: When loading a .SNG file with Append  
specified, you attempted to load more songs than can  
be loaded.  
• In Sequencer mode, execute Delete Song to  
increase the number of songs that can be used, and  
then load the song again.  
No space available on media  
Meaning: When you attempted to save or copy a file,  
or to create a directory, there was not enough free  
space on the other media. To solve this problem:  
• Either delete an existing file, or replace the media  
with another that contains sufficient free space.  
Not enough Drum Track pattern locations  
available  
Meaning: When converting a songs user pattern to a  
user drum track pattern, you have exceeded the  
number of user drum track patterns available for use.  
• As necessary, execute the Media mode Save PCG  
command to save your user drum track patterns. In  
Sequencer mode, execute the menu command Erase  
Drum Track Pattern to increase the number of  
available drum track user patterns. Then try the  
conversion procedure again.  
P
Pattern conflicts with events  
Meaning: It was not possible to execute the Bounce  
procedure because one of the tracks contained a  
pattern, and the same measure of the other track  
contained events or a pattern.  
• Open the pattern.  
Pattern exists across destination to-end-of-  
measure or source from-measure  
Meaning: When moving a measure, the edit procedure  
could not be executed because a pattern had been put  
in the destinationend measure, or the sourcestart  
measure, and had not been opened.  
Not enough Drum Track pattern memory  
Meaning: When converting a songs user pattern to a  
user drum track pattern, there was not enough free  
memory.  
• Open the pattern.  
• As necessary, execute the Media mode Save PCG  
command to save your user drum track patterns. In  
Sequencer mode, execute the menu command Erase  
Drum Track Pattern to erase other user drum track  
patterns and increase the amount of free memory.  
Then try the conversion procedure again.  
Pattern exists in destination or source track  
Open pattern?  
Meaning: A pattern has been placed in the track that  
you specified as a destination or source for editing. If  
you wish to open the pattern and execute (the events of  
the pattern will be copied), press the OK button. If you  
wish to execute without opening the pattern, press the  
Cancel button.  
Not enough memory  
Meaning: When starting realtime recording in  
Sequencer mode, the minimum amount of free  
memory (such as memory for the BAR events up to the  
recording start location) could not be allocated. To  
solve this problem:  
Pattern used in song  
Continue ?  
Meaning: When editing, the specified pattern has been  
placed in a track. If you wish to execute, press the OK  
button. If you decide not to execute, press the Cancel  
button.  
• Delete other song data etc. to regain free memory.  
Not enough memory to load  
Meaning: When you attempted to load a .SNG file or a  
standard MIDI file in Media mode, there was  
insufficient free memory in the sequence memory. To  
solve this problem:  
• Delete other song data etc. to regain free memory.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error messages Error and confirmation messages  
R
U
Root directory is full  
Unable to create directory  
Meaning: When attempting to create a file or directory  
at the root level of the media, you exceeded the  
maximum number of files or folder that could be  
created in the root directory of that media.  
• Either delete an existing file or directory, or Open a  
directory to move down one level before creating a  
file or directory.  
Meaning: You attempted to create a directory that  
would exceed the maximum path name length (76  
characters for the full path name).  
Unable to save file  
Meaning: When executing the Media mode Utility  
menu command Copy, the copy destination path  
length exceeded 76 characters.  
Meaning: When saving a file in Media mode, the save  
destination path exceeded 76 characters.  
S
Selected file/path is not correct  
Meaning: When you executed the Media mode Utility  
menu command Copy, the file management data  
exceeded the size of the management area.  
Meaning: When loading a divided .PCG file, you  
attempted to load a .PCG file of the same name that  
was not divided or had differing contents.  
Y
• Load the correct .PCG file.  
Source is empty  
You can’t undo this operation  
Are you sure?  
Meaning: No data exists in the track or pattern that  
Meaning: Once you enter event editing (even if you  
leave event editing without actually editing an event),  
it will no longer be possible to execute Compare to  
listen to the previous edit. If you wish to enter event  
editing, press the OK button. To cancel, press the  
Cancel button.  
you specified as the source.  
• Specify a track or pattern that contains musical  
data.  
Meaning: This message will appear when you execute  
Swap Insert Effect if one of the effects to be swapped  
(“Source1” or “Source2”) is a doublesize effect, and is  
therefore an unusable IFX number.  
• If you want to execute the Swap procedure on a  
doublesize effect, specify an IFX number to which  
a doublesize effect is assigned.  
You can’t undo last operation  
Are you sure?  
Meaning: When you exit recording or event editing in  
Sequencer mode, the memory area for Undo (Compare  
function) is not allocated. If you wish to keep the data  
that was just recorded or edited, press the OK button.  
If you wish to return to the previous data (i.e., to delete  
the data that was just recorded or edited), press the  
Cancel button.  
Meaning: When editing in Sequencer mode, memory  
area for Undo (Compare function) cannot be allocated.  
If you wish to execute the edit, press the OK button (It  
will not be possible to undo your edit). If you decide  
not to execute the edit, press the Cancel button.  
• In order to allocate memory area for Undo  
(Compare function), delete unneeded data such as  
songs, tracks, or patterns. We recommend that you  
data to media before you execute the edit  
procedure.  
T
The internal memory has been corrupted, likely  
due to an interruption of power while the system  
was writing/saving data. This has been repaired  
and the affected Bank has been initialized. [OK]  
Meaning: A memory write procedure did not end  
normally, perhaps because the power was turned off  
while processing was still underway after you wrote a  
program or other data into internal memory.  
• The KROME will automatically initialize itself in  
order to repair the internal memory. This message  
will appear at this time; press OK to close the  
dialog box. In some cases, the preload bank data  
may be temporarily initialized. As necessary, use  
the Global mode Load Preload/Demo Data  
command to load the preload data into internal  
memory, or if you have your own backup PCG,  
load it using Media mode.  
There is not readable data  
Meaning: Either the file size is 0 or the file does not  
contain data that can be accessed by the load or open  
procedure. Alternatively, the data is damaged etc., and  
cannot be loaded or accessed.  
This file is already loaded  
Meaning: When loading a divided .PCG file, you  
attempted to load a file that had already been loaded.  
• Load the .PCG files that have not yet been loaded.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Specifications  
Operating temperature  
0 – +40 °C  
Semi-Weighted Keyboard (velocity sensitive, no aftertouch)  
61-note  
73-note  
Normally C2–C7 (adjustable in the range [C1...C6]–[C3...C8])  
Semi-Weighted Keyboard (velocity sensitive, no aftertouch)  
Normally C1–C7 (adjustable in the range [C0...C6]–[C2...C8])  
Keyboard  
System  
NH (Natural weighted hammer action) Keyboard (no aftertouch)  
* The NH Keyboard delivers a playing feel similar to that of an acoustic piano, with low  
notes being heavier and high notes being lighter.  
88-note  
EDS-X (Enhanced Definition Synthesis-eXpanded)  
120 voices max, single mode  
60 voices max, double mode  
Maximum Polyphony  
* The actual maximum polyphony will vary depending on oscillator settings such as  
stereo multisamples and velocity crossfading.  
3.8 Gbytes (when calculated as 48kHz 16-bit linear data)  
583 multisamples (including twelve stereo),  
2,080 drumsamples (including 474 stereo)  
Preset PCM  
OSC1 (Single), OSC1+2 (Double): Stereo multisamples are supported  
8 velocity zones per oscillator, with switching, crossfades and layers.  
Oscillator  
Filters  
Four types of filter routing (single, serial, parallel, 24 dB)  
Two multi-mode filters per voice (low pass, high pass, band pass, band reject)  
Programs  
Driver  
EQ  
Per-voice nonlinear driver and low boost.  
Three bands, with sweepable mid.  
Sound Engine  
For each voice, two envelope generators (Filter & Amp), two LFOs, two key tracking  
generators (Filter & Amp), and two AMS mixers  
In addition, pitch EG, common LFO, and two common key tracking generators  
Modulation  
Up to sixteen timbres, keyboard and velocity split/layer/crossfade, and modifications  
to the program setting via the Tone Adjust function  
16 Timbres  
Combinations  
Drum Kits  
Master Keyboard  
functionality  
These allow you to control external MIDI devices  
Stereo and mono drumsamples.  
8-way velocity switches with crossfades and adjustable crossfade shapes (Linear, Power, Layer).  
User Combinations  
User Programs  
User Drum Kits  
Preset Programs  
5 Insert Effects  
2 Master Effects  
512 Combinations/384 Preload  
The number of  
-Combinations  
-Programs  
-Drum Kits  
768 Programs/640 Preload  
48 Drum Kits/32 Preload  
256 GM2 Programs + 9 GM2 Drum Programs  
In-line processing; stereo in - stereo out.  
Two effects sends; stereo in - stereo out.  
For overall processing on the main outputs, such as compression, limiting, and EQ;  
stereo in - stereo out.  
1 Total Effect  
3-band Track EQ  
Effects types  
High, low, and sweepable mid band. Per Program in Program Mode, per Timbre in  
Combination mode (16 total), and per Track in Sequencer mode (16 total).  
Effects  
193 types (Usable for insert, master, or total effects. However, double-size effects  
cannot be used as the total effect.)  
Modulation  
Dynamic Modulation, two common LFOs  
Stereo side-chaining for limiter, gates, vocoders, etc.  
Up to 32 per Effect  
Effects Control Bus  
Effects Presets  
Program mode: one arpeggiator available. Combination and Sequencer modes: two arpeggiators available.  
5 preset arpeggio patterns  
Dual polyphonic arpeggiators  
Drum Track  
1028 user arpeggio patterns (900 preload)  
Preset patterns  
605 patterns (Held in common with sequencer preset patterns.)  
1,000 patterns. Patterns created in Sequencer mode can be converted to drum track  
user patterns.  
User patterns  
Trigger Mode / Sync / Zone settings can be specified  
16 MIDI Tracks & 1 Master Track  
128 Songs  
Resolution: 480 ppq (parts per quarter-note)  
Tempo: 40.00–300.00 bpm (1/100 bpm resolution)  
Up to 210,000 MIDI events  
Sequencer  
16 preset/16 user template songs  
20 cue lists. Songs can be arranged consecutively or repeatedly in up to 99 steps. A cue  
Cue List function  
Patterns/RPPR  
list can be converted back into a song.  
605 Presets /100 User Patterns (per Song)  
RPPR (Realtime Pattern Play/Recording): 1 set per Song.  
Format  
Korg (KROME) format, SMF (formats 0 and 1) supported  
Load, Save, Utility  
Media  
Data Filer functionality (Save and Load MIDI System Exclusive Data)  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specifications Operating requirements  
Joystick, SW1, 2  
SELECT buttons  
4 knobs  
REALTIME CONTROLS (TONE, USER), ARP  
REALTIME CONTROL: Realtime modulation  
Arpeggio control  
Realtime controls  
Controllers  
Drum Track  
Arpeggiator  
Effect On/Off  
Buttons = DRUMTRACK  
Buttons = ARP  
Buttons = MASTER FX, TOTAL FX  
TouchView graphical user interface, 7 inch TFT, WVGA (800x480 dots), adjustable  
brightness.  
Display  
MODE  
Buttons = COMBI, PROG SEQ, GLOBAL, MEDIA  
VALUE Dial, INC/DEC buttons, 10-key numeric keypad, (–) button, (.) button, ENTER  
button, COMPARE button  
Value Controllers  
User Interface  
BANK  
Buttons = A…F (used for Combination A, B, C, D)  
Buttons = PAUSE ( ), REW ( ), FF ( ), LOCATE ( ), REC ( ), START/STOP (  
TEMPO Knob, TAP button  
SEQUENCER  
TEMPO  
Other  
)
WRITE button, PAGE button, EXIT button, VOLUME knob  
1/4" TS (Mono), unbalanced, Volume knob controls  
Output Impedance  
Maximum Level  
1.1kstereo; 550mono (L/Mono only)  
+16.0 dBu  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
L/MONO, R  
Audio Outputs  
Control Inputs  
Analog  
Load Impedance  
10 kor greater  
1/8" TRS (Stereo), Volume knob  
Output Impedance  
Maximum Level  
Headphone output  
33  
60+ 60 mW @33  
DAMPER (Supports piano-style half-damper pedals as well as standard foot switches)  
ASSIGNABLE SWITCH, ASSIGNABLE PEDAL  
IN, OUT  
MIDI  
USB  
1 USB (TYPE B), MIDI interface  
Capacity recognized: SD memory cards up to 2 Gigabytes (GB). SDHC memory cards up to 32 Gigabytes (GB).  
SDXC memory cards are not supported.  
SD-Card slot  
Power  
AC adapter power supply connector (DC 12V,  
), Power On/Off switch  
KROME-61  
KROME-73  
KROME-88  
KROME-61  
KROME-73  
KROME-88  
KROME-61  
KROME-73  
KROME-88  
1,027 x 313 x 93 (mm)/40.43" x 12.32" x 3.66"  
1,191 x 313 x 93 (mm)/46.89" x 12.32" x 3.66"  
1,448 x 383 x 131 (mm)/57.01" x 15.08" x 5.16"  
61-note 7.2 kg/15.87 lbs  
Dimensions  
(W D H)  
Weight  
73-note 8.2 kg/18.08 lbs  
88-note 14.7 kg/32.41 lbs  
Power Consumption  
Accessories  
13W  
AC adapter, Quick Start guide  
Accessory Disc (KROME Parameter Guide (PDF), Operation guide (PDF), Video manual etc.)  
XVP-10  
EXP-2  
Expression/Volume Pedal  
Foot Controller  
Options  
DS-1H  
Damper Pedal  
PS-1, PS-3  
Pedal Switch  
Operating requirements  
KORG USB-MIDI Driver  
Windows  
Operating system: Microsoft Windows XP Home/Professional SP3,  
Windows Vista SP2 (including 64-bit),  
Windows 7 SP1 (including 64-bit)  
Computer: USB port required (a USB host controller made by Intel is recommended)  
Macintosh  
Operating system: Mac OS X 10.5 or later.  
Computer: Apple Macintosh computer with an Intel processor that has a USB port and satisfies the requirements for  
running Mac OS X.  
* Appearance and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[Music Workstation]  
Date : 2011. 10. 04  
Ver.: 1.00  
MIDI Implementation Chart  
KROME  
MIDI Implementation Chart  
Function  
Transmitted  
Recognized  
Remarks  
1 – 16  
1 – 16  
Memorized  
Basic  
Channel  
Default  
Changed  
1 – 16  
1 – 16  
3
Memorized  
Messages  
Altered  
Mode  
Note  
Number:  
0 – 127  
0 – 127  
0 – 127  
All note numbers 0–127 can be transmitted  
by the Arpeggiator or as sequence data  
True Voice  
9n, V=1 – 127  
9n, V=1 – 127  
Note On  
Note Off  
Velocity  
Polyphonic (Key)  
Monophonic (Channel)  
Polyphonic aftertouch and Channel aftertouch *A (receive)  
Aftertouch  
Pitch Bend  
transmitted only as sequence data  
*A (receive)  
*C  
0, 32  
1, 2, 17, 19, 20, 21  
4, 5, 7, 8, 10  
11, 12, 13  
64, 65, 66, 67  
70–79  
Bank Select (MSB, LSB)  
Joystick (+Y, –Y), Knob1-4  
Pedal, Portamento Time, Volume, IFX pan, Pan *C  
Expression, Effect Control 1, 2  
Damper, Portamento Sw., Sostenuto, Soft *C  
Sound (Realtime Control TONE 1–4: 74, 71, 79, 72) *C  
*P  
*C  
*C  
Control  
Change  
80–83  
91–95  
Switch 1, 2, Foot Switch, Controller  
Send 1, 2, Effect ON/OFF (IFXs, MFXs, TFX) *C  
*C  
14, 22–25  
6, 38  
96, 97  
100, 101  
0–119  
120, 121  
Arpeggiator Controllers  
Data Entry (MSB, LSB)  
Data Increment, Decrement  
RPN (LSB, MSB)  
Realtime Control USER 1−4, Seq. Data *C (Seq when received)  
All Sound Off, Reset All Controllers  
*C, *2  
*C  
*C  
*C, *3  
*C  
*P  
Program  
Change  
0 – 127  
0 – 127  
0 – 127  
0 – 127  
Variable Range  
*E, *4  
System Exclusive  
Song Position  
Song Select  
Tune  
When cue list is selected, corresponds to cue list. *1  
When cue list is selected, corresponds to cue list 0-19. *1  
System  
Common  
0 – 127  
*1  
*1  
Clock  
Command  
System  
Real Time  
Local On/Off  
All Notes Off  
Active Sense  
Reset  
Aux  
Messages  
123 – 127  
Notes *P, *A, *C, *E: Transmitted/received when Global P1: MIDI Filter (Program Change, Aftertouch, Control Change, Exclusive) is Enable, respectively.  
*1: When Global P1: MIDI Clock is Internal, transmitted but not received. The opposite for External MIDI.  
*2: Valid if assigned as a MIDI control change in Global P2: Controllers. The number shown here is the CC default assignment.  
*3: RPN (LSB,MSB)=00,00: Pitch bend range, 01,00: Fine tune, 02,00: Coarse tune  
*4: In addition to Korg exclusive messages, Inquiry, GM System On, Master Volume, Master Balance, Master Fine Tune, and Master Coarse  
Tune are supported.  
Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY  
Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY  
Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO  
Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO  
: Yes  
: No  
Consult your local Korg distributor for more information on MIDI IMPLEMENTATION.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMPORTANT NOTICE TO CONSUMERS  
This product has been manufactured according to strict specifications and voltage requirements  
that are applicable in the country in which it is intended that this product should be used. If you  
have purchased this product via the internet, through mail order, and/or via a telephone sale,  
you must verify that this product is intended to be used in the country in which you reside.  
WARNING: Use of this product in any country other than that for which it is intended could be  
dangerous and could invalidate the manufacturer’s or distributor’s warranty.  
Please also retain your receipt as proof of purchase otherwise your product may be disqualified  
from the manufacturer’s or distributor’s warranty.  
4015-2 Yanokuchi, Inagi-city, Tokyo 206-0812 Japan  
© 2012 KORG INC.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Intel Computer Hardware SASMF8I User Manual
Intel Recording Equipment SC5000 User Manual
Invacare Camping Equipment Full Electric Low Bed User Manual
JBL Speaker TLX PS10 User Manual
Johnson Controls Heat Pump BQ 036 User Manual
JVC Stereo System UX V3R User Manual
Kenwood Computer Monitor KVT 815DVD User Manual
Konica Minolta Digital Camera Xt Biz User Manual
Konica Minolta Mobility Aid Wheelchair User Manual
Konica Minolta Printer Printer Copier User Manual